<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" xmlns:mi="http://schemas.ingestion.microsoft.com/common/" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:dcterms="http://purl.org/dc/terms/" version="2.0">
<channel>
  <title><![CDATA[Trendonomist]]></title>
  <description><![CDATA[Capitalizing on Trends]]></description>
  <language>en-us</language>
  <link>https://trendonomist.com/feed/msn-article-trendo</link>
  <lastBuildDate>Fri, 14 Aug 26 10:15:04 -0400</lastBuildDate>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/cpp-fund-jumps-70-3-billion-in-three-months-as-assets-hit-863-6-billion/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[CPP Fund Jumps $70.3 Billion in Three Months as Assets Hit $863.6 Billion]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 14 Aug 26 10:15:04 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/cpp-fund-jumps-70-3-billion-in-three-months-as-assets-hit-863-6-billion/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A powerful three-month market run has pushed Canada’s largest pension fund to $863.6 billion in net assets. CPP Investments ended]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A powerful three-month market run has pushed Canada’s largest pension fund to $863.6 billion in net assets. CPP Investments ended June 30, 2026, up $70.3 billion from the end of March. Most of that increase came from investment performance: the fund earned $60.2 billion in net income and posted a 7.5% net return, its strongest quarterly investment result in more than a decade.</p>
<p>The headline is striking, but the details matter. Another $10.1 billion came from net transfers from the Canada Pension Plan, while gains were spread across public equities, energy, credit and other parts of the portfolio. For more than 22 million CPP contributors and beneficiaries, the quarter is less about a sudden windfall than about the growing scale of a fund designed to support retirement benefits over generations.</p>
<h2>The $70.3 Billion Jump Wasn’t All Market Profit</h2>
<p>CPP Investments started the quarter with $793.3 billion and finished with $863.6 billion, an increase of $70.3 billion in just three months. The largest piece was $60.2 billion in net investment income. The remaining $10.1 billion came from net transfers from the CPP, reflecting the flow of contributions and benefit payments through the system.</p>
<p>That distinction is important because asset growth and investment returns are not the same thing. CPP Investments says it typically receives more contributions than are needed to pay benefits during the early part of the calendar year, while the pattern can reverse later in the year. In other words, the fund’s balance can rise because investments gain value and because fresh money is transferred in. The 7.5% quarterly return is the cleaner measure of how the investment portfolio itself performed during those three months, after expenses were taken into account. This makes the headline clearer.</p>
<h2>It Was the Fund’s Best Quarter in More Than a Decade</h2>
<p>A 7.5% net return in one quarter is unusually strong for a pension fund built around long-term diversification. CPP Investments CEO John Graham said the result marked the organization’s strongest quarterly investment performance in more than a decade. That came immediately after fiscal 2026, when the fund earned 7.8% for the entire year ended March 31.</p>
<p>The comparison helps show why the latest quarter stands out. A pension fund is not managed like a short-term trading account, and CPP Investments repeatedly emphasizes that single-quarter results are not the main measure of success. Its mandate is to earn strong long-run returns without taking undue risk of loss. Still, adding $60.2 billion of net investment income in three months provides a meaningful cushion and lifts the starting point from which future returns can compound, even though market conditions can reverse and quarterly performance will inevitably fluctuate over time while maintaining investment discipline.</p>
<h2>Public Equities and AI-Linked Sectors Did Much of the Heavy Lifting</h2>
<p>Public equities were one of the biggest contributors to the quarter. CPP Investments attributed the strength to resilient corporate earnings, improving investor sentiment and particularly strong performance in sectors tied to artificial intelligence. That matters because the fund owns public-market assets around the world rather than concentrating only on Canadian stocks.</p>
<p>The AI connection also fits a broader pattern in the fund’s recent activity. During the quarter, CPP Investments committed capital to technology-oriented strategies and made investments linked to data centres and AI infrastructure. One example was a US$150 million delayed-draw loan supporting CoreWeave’s deployment of AI computing infrastructure across four data centres in the United States and Canada. The fund also invested US$1.75 billion to support EQT’s strategy to build AI infrastructure led by data-centre operator EdgeConneX, showing that the theme extends beyond listed technology shares and the infrastructure that makes AI possible.</p>
<h2>Energy, Credit and Currency Gains Made the Rally Broader</h2>
<p>The quarter was not simply a technology story. CPP Investments said real assets, particularly energy, made a meaningful contribution, while credit investments and external manager programs also added to returns. That breadth matters for a portfolio whose purpose is to avoid depending too heavily on any one market, sector or economic outcome.</p>
<p>Currency movements helped as well. A stronger U.S. dollar increased the Canadian-dollar value of foreign investments, giving the fund another lift. Fixed income was more subdued, with elevated bond yields and shifting expectations for monetary policy limiting gains. The result shows how different parts of the portfolio can pull in different directions at the same time. When equities, real assets, credit and foreign exchange are all supportive, a globally diversified fund can produce a much stronger overall quarter even if bonds are less impressive, reinforcing the value of spreading exposure across multiple return drivers rather than one market.</p>
<h2>The Base CPP Still Holds Most of the Money</h2>
<p>The $863.6 billion total is split between two accounts with different funding structures. The base CPP ended June with $773.4 billion in assets, up from $712.9 billion three months earlier. It earned $55.5 billion in net income, received $5.0 billion in net transfers and posted a 7.7% quarterly return.</p>
<p>The additional CPP account, created as part of the CPP enhancement that began in 2019, reached $90.2 billion. It earned $4.7 billion in net income, received $5.1 billion in net transfers and returned 5.7% for the quarter. CPP Investments says the two accounts have different market-risk targets and investment profiles because their contribution and funding structures are different. That is why their returns should not be expected to match from quarter to quarter, even though both are managed within the same overall institution and are ultimately intended to support retirement benefits for contributors and beneficiaries across decades of contributions and benefits.</p>
<h2>The Ten-Year Record Matters More Than the Three-Month Surge</h2>
<p>CPP Investments’ preferred scorecard stretches far beyond a single quarter. For the 10 years ended June 30, 2026, the combined fund generated an annualized net return of 9.4%. Since CPP Investments began investing the fund in 1999, it has produced $609.3 billion in cumulative net income.</p>
<p>Those figures put the latest jump in a longer frame. At the end of fiscal 2026, just three months earlier, cumulative net income stood at roughly $549 billion and the 10-year annualized return was 8.8%. The latest strong quarter lifted both measures. Long horizons are central to the fund’s model because the CPP is designed to pay benefits across generations, not to maximize one year’s result. A spectacular quarter can help, but the real test is whether returns remain durable through recessions, inflation shocks, market selloffs and periods when specific asset classes struggle for extended stretches across different market cycles and economic environments.</p>
<h2>The Actuary Says the CPP Remains Sustainable at Current Rates</h2>
<p>The latest independent actuarial review gives the investment result a broader policy context. The Office of the Chief Actuary’s revised 32nd report concluded that both the base CPP and additional CPP remain sustainable over the long term at the legislated contribution rates, based on the plan’s current structure and a wide set of demographic and economic assumptions.</p>
<p>The report does not assume returns anywhere close to 7.5% every quarter. Over the 75-year period from 2025 through 2099, it assumes average annual real returns of 4.05% for the base CPP and 3.53% for the additional CPP. Those are returns after inflation. The gap between those long-run assumptions and the fund’s recent performance helps explain why one strong quarter can improve the funding position, while also showing why it would be risky to extrapolate a short burst of market gains decades into the future despite how impressive the latest result appears today.</p>
<h2>CPP Investments Is Deliberately Kept at Arm’s Length From Government</h2>
<p>The size of the fund can make it look like a giant federal investment account, but its governance is deliberately different. The Canada Pension Plan Investment Board Act requires the organization to invest CPP assets in the best interests of contributors and beneficiaries and to seek a maximum rate of return without undue risk of loss, while considering the plan’s funding needs.</p>
<p>Federal reporting also states that CPP Investments operates independently of the CPP and at arm’s length from governments. The assets are not treated as ordinary federal revenues and expenditures. That separation is a core feature of the model: investment decisions are meant to be driven by the fund’s legislated financial mandate rather than by day-to-day political spending priorities. For contributors, that means the $863.6 billion pool is managed as long-term pension capital, not as cash available for general government programs or routine budget spending or short-term government needs.</p>
<h2>The Fund Is Still Deploying Billions While Markets Rise</h2>
<p>CPP Investments did not spend the quarter simply riding public markets higher. It continued committing capital across private equity, credit, real assets and infrastructure. Among the disclosed transactions were a US$1 billion financing commitment to Blackstone Private Credit Fund, a US$400 million commitment to KKR Asian Fund V and approximately US$300 million committed to several Sequoia-managed funds.</p>
<p>Real assets were just as active. The fund invested US$1.75 billion to support an AI-infrastructure strategy led by EdgeConneX, committed US$1.2 billion in financing to U.S. natural-gas and LNG platform Caturus, and backed data-centre development in India. These deals illustrate the trade-off behind CPP Investments’ approach: it seeks exposure to long-duration growth themes while spreading risk across countries, industries and asset types instead of relying on a narrow basket of public stocks. The strategy also gives the fund access to investments unavailable through ordinary stock indexes, creating more ways to diversify future returns.</p>
<h2>A Bigger Fund Does Not Mean an Immediate Bigger CPP Cheque</h2>
<p>For individual Canadians, the record asset total should not be confused with an automatic increase in monthly CPP payments. Retirement benefits are calculated mainly from a person’s age when they start receiving the pension, how much and how long they contributed, and their average earnings over their working life. In 2026, the maximum new CPP retirement pension at age 65 is $1,507.65 a month.</p>
<p>What a stronger fund does provide is additional financial capacity behind the system. Investment income is one of the sources that helps finance CPP obligations over the long term, and the Chief Actuary tests whether the plan can remain sustainable under its legislated contribution rates. The quarter therefore matters less as a personal windfall and more as evidence that the pool supporting future retirement benefits has become larger and has recently generated returns well above its long-run actuarial assumptions, not a direct change to anyone’s cheque.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/pension-plan.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadian-exporters-bet-trump-will-blink-on-50-tariffs-instead-of-rushing-shipments-south/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadian Exporters Bet Trump Will Blink on 50% Tariffs Instead of Rushing Shipments South]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 14 Aug 26 09:35:46 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadian-exporters-bet-trump-will-blink-on-50-tariffs-instead-of-rushing-shipments-south/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[With an August 19 tariff deadline bearing down, many Canadian exporters are making a striking choice: they are not flooding]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>With an August 19 tariff deadline bearing down, many Canadian exporters are making a striking choice: they are not flooding trucks and warehouses with goods bound for the United States. Instead, they are waiting.</p>
<p>President Donald Trump’s administration has announced 50% tariffs covering nearly US$20 billion of Canadian imports, including products that would otherwise qualify for tariff-free treatment under CUSMA. Yet customs brokers are reporting far less of the frantic front-loading that accompanied previous tariff deadlines. Part of the calculation is financial. Shipping early is expensive and disruptive. But another part is political: companies have watched Trump threaten severe trade measures before, only for deadlines to move or penalties to be softened. With Ottawa and Washington still negotiating intensively, some exporters are effectively wagering that another retreat or compromise will arrive before the tariffs do.</p>
<h2>Why Exporters Are Waiting Instead of Racing the Clock</h2>
<p>The clearest indication of the change in mood comes from the people handling goods at the border. Janine Harker, who heads the Canadian Society of Customs Brokers, told The Canadian Press that businesses have largely avoided a rush to front-load shipments before August 19. She described the atmosphere as one of “watchful waiting.” That represents a notable change from earlier stages of the trade conflict, when companies tried to get merchandise across the border before threatened duties could take effect.</p>
<p>There is a practical logic behind the restraint. Moving September or October orders into August can protect merchandise from a tariff only if the tariff actually arrives as scheduled and the goods can realistically be shipped, stored and sold early. Otherwise, businesses may simply tie up cash and fill warehouses unnecessarily. The threatened 50% rate is severe enough to justify contingency planning, but repeated tariff threats have made firms more reluctant to reorganize their entire supply chains around every deadline. For some exporters, waiting several more days now appears less risky than betting heavily on a deadline that could still move.</p>
<h2>The ‘TACO’ Pattern Has Changed How Businesses Read Tariff Threats</h2>
<p>Wall Street coined an unflattering shorthand during Trump’s earlier tariff battles: the “TACO trade,” or the idea that Trump would threaten exceptionally high tariffs and then retreat when markets, businesses or trading partners pushed back. The expression gained traction after the administration’s sweeping April 2025 tariff announcement. Rates ranging as high as 50% were announced for numerous countries, but many were quickly reduced to a temporary 10% baseline while negotiations continued. Other deadlines were later postponed as well.</p>
<p>Canadian exporters cannot assume the same script will repeat. Trump has also allowed major tariffs to take effect, including measures that inflicted significant damage on Canadian metals shipments. Still, previous reversals have changed the psychology surrounding tariff deadlines. A deadline that once might have triggered an immediate scramble now carries another possibility: waiting could save a company from expensive logistical decisions if Washington ultimately delays, narrows or renegotiates the measure. That calculation helps explain why the current response can look surprisingly calm even when the headline tariff rate is 50%.</p>
<h2>The New Tariff List Reaches Far Beyond the Usual Trade Flashpoints</h2>
<p>The threatened duties are significant partly because of how broadly they reach. Washington says the new 50% tariffs will cover nearly US$20 billion worth of Canadian imports, equivalent to roughly 5.2% of all U.S. goods imports from Canada in 2025. Products identified by the administration and subsequent reporting include wine, dairy products, hockey sticks, cement, furniture, swimming pools, fishing rods, seeds, clothing and other consumer and industrial goods. Energy, potash and certain fish and critical minerals are among the exemptions, while products already subject to separate Section 232 tariffs are treated separately.</p>
<p>The legal mechanism is also unusual. Trump invoked Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930, a provision allowing additional duties of up to 50% when the United States determines another country is discriminating against American commerce. Reuters reported that the proclamations represented the first known presidential use of the provision in nearly a century. More importantly for exporters, Washington has said the new duties apply regardless of whether affected goods satisfy CUSMA rules. That strips away a protection many Canadian companies had relied upon during previous rounds of tariffs.</p>
<h2>Front-Loading Worked Before — But It Comes With a Price</h2>
<p>Canadian companies have already demonstrated how dramatically they can change shipping patterns when a tariff looks unavoidable. In the first quarter of 2025, Canadian goods exports jumped roughly 10% from the previous quarter as companies rushed shipments into the United States before new tariffs took effect. Machinery, equipment and motor vehicles led the increase, while exporters of lumber, food and pharmaceutical products also accelerated shipments. Federal Reserve researchers documented similar front-loading across numerous U.S. trading partners during the same period.</p>
<p>Repeating that strategy indefinitely is much harder. Shipping goods weeks early can move customs clearance ahead of a tariff date, but it also pulls future sales into the present. Importers need somewhere to store the inventory, suppliers may need earlier payment, production schedules can be distorted and the benefit disappears if Washington postpones the tariff anyway. That makes the muted August response particularly revealing. Exporters know front-loading can work; many simply appear unconvinced that doing it again is worth the cost. After more than a year of unpredictable trade announcements, tariff fatigue has itself become part of the business calculation.</p>
<h2>Small Exporters Have the Least Room for a Wrong Bet</h2>
<p>For smaller Canadian businesses, the decision carries much more than theoretical risk. The Canadian Federation of Independent Business polled 1,833 independent business owners between July 28 and August 6. Among exporters exposed to the proposed tariffs, 77% expected revenue losses and 35% anticipated losing at least half their revenue. Nearly eight in 10 said a 50% tariff would make their products uncompetitive in the American market.</p>
<p>Yet the same research found 78% of respondents remained in wait-and-see mode. That apparent contradiction captures the predicament facing smaller exporters. A business may believe a tariff could devastate its U.S. sales while simultaneously lacking the financial flexibility to rush months of merchandise across the border. CFIB also found 75% of affected businesses would look to reduce their dependence on the United States if the tariff takes effect. For a small manufacturer or specialty food exporter built around American customers, however, finding equivalent buyers elsewhere is rarely something that happens between one tariff announcement and the next.</p>
<h2>Why the Bet on a Last-Minute Deal Is Not Pure Hope</h2>
<p>There is another reason companies are reluctant to treat August 19 as inevitable: Ottawa and Washington are still talking. As of August 13, Reuters reported that Canada-U.S. negotiations were progressing, according to a Canadian government source, and that Washington also wanted to reach an agreement before the tariff deadline. Canada-U.S. Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc met U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer for the second time that week and the fourth time in roughly three weeks.</p>
<p>Canada’s chief trade negotiator, Michael Charette, has also been engaging regularly with U.S. counterparts alongside senior Canadian officials from departments including finance, foreign affairs and agriculture. None of that guarantees a breakthrough, and confidential negotiations frequently look more promising from the outside than they ultimately prove to be. But exporters watching those meetings have a tangible reason to hesitate before paying to accelerate shipments. If both governments still see value in an agreement before August 19, every additional negotiating session increases the possibility that the final tariff regime could look different from the one currently scheduled.</p>
<h2>A Deal Could Require Politically Difficult Concessions</h2>
<p>The challenge is that narrowing the tariff fight may require compromises extending well beyond the products facing the new 50% duties. Reuters has reported that negotiators have discussed potential Canadian moves involving tariffs on U.S.-made vehicles, American complaints about the administration of dairy import quotas and the return of U.S. alcohol to provincial liquor-store shelves. In exchange, Washington could potentially reduce some of its existing tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum. Those were negotiating possibilities rather than an agreed package.</p>
<p>Each issue creates domestic political complications. Dairy farmers and processors have warned Ottawa against making additional concessions affecting Canada’s supply-management system. Alcohol is complicated because provincial governments control much of the purchasing and distribution system, limiting Ottawa’s ability to promise an immediate return of American products on its own. Auto concessions would also land amid a much wider dispute over North American vehicle production. For exporters hoping Trump blinks, that complexity cuts both ways: there are enough issues available to construct a compromise, but also enough political pressure points to prevent one.</p>
<h2>If the Gamble Fails, the Shock Could Arrive Quickly</h2>
<p>If there is no postponement or agreement, the new tariffs are scheduled to apply to covered goods entered into the United States beginning at 12:01 a.m. Eastern Time on August 19. Technically, the tariff is collected from the U.S. importer rather than directly from the Canadian exporter. Economically, however, exporters can still absorb much of the pain as American customers demand lower prices, cancel orders, switch suppliers or pass higher costs along to consumers.</p>
<p>Canada has already seen what a 50% tariff can do to trade volumes. The Bank of Canada reported that Canadian steel exports to the United States fell by roughly half after a separate 50% U.S. steel tariff took effect. Aluminum shipments also fell sharply before partially recovering as U.S. inventories tightened. There is another reason the August threat matters: the Bank of Canada’s July economic projection assumed CUSMA-compliant Canadian goods would continue to receive tariff exemptions. The Section 338 measures were announced afterward. If they take effect in full, they would therefore introduce a new trade shock beyond an important assumption underlying that outlook.</p>
<h2>Even a Deal Would Not Bring Back the Old Certainty</h2>
<p>Whatever happens on August 19, the deeper Canada-U.S. trade relationship has already entered a more uncertain phase. On July 1, the United States declined to renew CUSMA in its current form during the agreement’s formal review process. That decision did not terminate the pact: CUSMA remains in force, and without a new extension the three countries move into annual reviews while the existing agreement can continue until 2036. The North American relationship still encompasses roughly US$1.6 trillion in annual trade, making a wholesale economic separation extraordinarily difficult.</p>
<p>But exporters are increasingly being asked to plan around political risk that did not exist at the same level when CUSMA took effect in 2020. CFIB’s finding that three-quarters of businesses exposed to the new tariff would try to reduce their U.S. dependence points toward the longer-term response. Waiting for Trump to blink may prove sensible over a five-day deadline. Building an export strategy around the assumption that Washington will always blink would be far more dangerous. Even another last-minute deal would leave Canadian businesses with a powerful incentive to find more customers, more markets and more ways to withstand the next deadline.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/food-packaging.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canada-reportedly-joins-mexico-in-push-to-slash-trumps-25-auto-tariff/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Reportedly Joins Mexico in Push to Slash Trump’s 25% Auto Tariff]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:39:15 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canada-reportedly-joins-mexico-in-push-to-slash-trumps-25-auto-tariff/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[North America’s auto trade fight is moving into a new phase. Mexico has proposed sharply reducing the U.S. tariff burden]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>North America’s auto trade fight is moving into a new phase. Mexico has proposed sharply reducing the U.S. tariff burden on vehicles built in the region, and Canadian officials are reportedly backing a similar approach as Ottawa presses Washium U.S. levy on some North American vehicles from 25% to roughly 5% or 10%, while giving Canadian and Mexican content more favourable treatment.</p>
<p>That would mark a significant retreat from the tariff structure President Donald Trump imposed in 2025. But it is far from a settled deal. Washington is simultaneously demanding tougher rules that would force substantially more vehicle content to be made in the United States, leaving negotiators fighting over what “North American” manufacturing should mean in the next version of CUSMA.</p>
<h2>A Joint North American Push Takes Shape</h2>
<p>Mexico’s proposal is designed to soften one of the most disruptive features of Trump’s auto tariffs without simply returning to the old duty-free system. Under the plan reported by The Wall Street Journal, the maximum U.S. tariff on certain North American vehicles could fall to 5% or 10%, instead of the current 25% rate applied to non-U.S. content. Mexican and Canadian content would receive more favourable treatment, while tariffs would focus more heavily on value originating outside North America.</p>
<p>Canada has not announced a formal joint proposal with Mexico, which is an important distinction. However, Canadian officials are reportedly supportive of a similar tariff-reduction framework, and Ottawa has separately discussed applying U.S. duties only to content originating outside North America. That overlap suggests the two countries are moving toward a common negotiating principle: vehicles built through the continent’s integrated supply chain should not be treated like ordinary imports from overseas.</p>
<h2>How the 25% Tariff Actually Works</h2>
<p>The headline 25% rate can sound simpler than the tariff actually is. Trump’s 2025 auto proclamation imposed a 25% levy on imported passenger vehicles and light trucks, but CUSMA-compliant vehicles from Canada and Mexico can receive special treatment. For those vehicles, importers can deduct the value of U.S.-made content, meaning the tariff is charged on the remaining non-U.S. portion rather than on the full sticker value of the vehicle.</p>
<p>That structure matters enormously for Canadian assembly plants. A vehicle assembled in Ontario can contain engines, electronics, steel, seats or other components sourced from U.S. factories before crossing the border again as a finished vehicle. Canadian officials have argued that taxing the non-U.S. share still penalizes a supply chain built around repeated cross-border production. Their preferred direction would go further by recognizing Canadian and Mexican content as part of one North American manufacturing system rather than treating it as foreign value.</p>
<h2>The Fight Over What Counts as North American</h2>
<p>The dispute is ultimately about more than a tariff rate. CUSMA already contains demanding automotive rules of origin. To qualify for preferential treatment, 75% of a passenger vehicle’s value must generally come from North America. The agreement also includes labour-value rules requiring 40% to 45% of auto content to be made by workers earning at least US$16 an hour, while automakers face North American sourcing requirements for steel and aluminum.</p>
<p>Washington wants to tighten that framework considerably. Reuters reported in May that the Trump administration proposed raising the regional-content requirement to 82% and requiring 50% of a vehicle’s value to be produced specifically in the United States. That is a major shift in philosophy. The existing system is designed to strengthen a continental production base. The U.S. proposal would use CUSMA more explicitly to pull investment and parts production into America, potentially at the expense of Canadian and Mexican plants.</p>
<h2>Why Canada Has So Much at Risk</h2>
<p>For Canada, the stakes are unusually concentrated. The federal government says more than 90% of Canadian-made vehicles and about 60% of Canadian-made auto parts are exported to the United States. The sector supports more than 500,000 workers across the broader economy, including roughly 125,000 direct jobs, and contributes more than $16 billion annually to Canadian GDP. Canada produced more than 1.2 million passenger vehicles in 2025.</p>
<p>Those numbers explain why even a partial tariff reduction could matter. Canada’s 2026 State of Trade report said GDP in motor-vehicle and parts manufacturing fell 1.4% in 2025 after a much steeper 10.7% decline in 2024. Employment in the sector also slipped 3.4% in 2025. For communities built around assembly plants and suppliers in southern Ontario, tariff negotiations are therefore not an abstract trade-policy dispute. They influence production schedules, investment decisions and whether future vehicle programs are assigned to Canadian factories across the country.</p>
<h2>Mexico Has Scale — and Growing Pressure</h2>
<p>Mexico arrives at the negotiations with greater scale, but significant exposure to U.S. policy. Reuters reported that Mexican vehicle exports to the United States fell nearly 3% in 2025 after roughly three decades of expansion. Mexico also lost about 60,000 auto-industry jobs that year, according to government data cited by Reuters. The country remains tied to the U.S. market, with total U.S.-Mexico goods trade reaching about US$872.8 billion in 2025.</p>
<p>That combination gives Mexico both leverage and urgency. Its factories are central to the production strategies of automakers, but prolonged tariffs can make those plants less competitive for U.S.-bound models. Mexico’s push for a 5% to 10% ceiling is therefore not simply about protecting exports. It is an attempt to preserve the economics of a regional manufacturing network in which companies decide where to build engines, transmissions, electronics and final vehicles based on continental efficiency rather than a tariff wall.</p>
<h2>Automakers Are Pushing Back Too</h2>
<p>Automakers broadly agree on one point: North America works best as one production platform. In May, seven automotive trade groups urged the Trump administration to extend CUSMA, arguing that the agreement is important to keeping U.S. vehicle manufacturing competitive against Asia and Europe. The organizations represent automakers, dealers and suppliers, including General Motors, Tesla, Toyota, Hyundai and Volkswagen.</p>
<p>Their concern is practical rather than diplomatic. Splitting the agreement into separate bilateral systems, or imposing national-content rules, would add paperwork and make it harder to organize supply chains across three countries. A vehicle may be assembled in one country using major components from the other two, while suppliers operate plants on both sides of a border. Industry groups have warned that dismantling that structure could weaken the efficiencies CUSMA was designed to protect. That gives Canada and Mexico an ally in the debate: companies that also employ large numbers of Americans.</p>
<h2>The Consumer Price Question</h2>
<p>Affordability is why the tariff debate extends past factory gates. Kelley Blue Book data from Cox Automotive put the U.S. new-vehicle transaction price at $49,855 in July 2026, the highest level of the year. Buyers were already shifting toward cheaper vehicles, while automakers have warned that tariffs can make inexpensive models built in Mexico harder to justify in the market.</p>
<p>That creates an awkward trade-off for Washington. Moving more production into the United States could support domestic investment, but forcing rapid changes to established supply chains can also raise costs. Nissan has been a visible example because it relies on Mexican production for smaller, affordable models. Its chief executive has argued that the supply chain is not configured to make every component in the United States. A lower North American tariff could therefore become a compromise: preserve pressure for more regional sourcing without making entry-level vehicles harder to sell profitably.</p>
<h2>A Bigger Trade Deal Is Hanging Over It All</h2>
<p>The auto discussion is unfolding inside the Canada-U.S. trade standoff. Ottawa is seeking relief not only on vehicles but also on U.S. tariffs affecting steel, aluminum, lumber and other sectors. Trump has threatened 50% tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods beginning August 19, and Reuters reported that Canadian officials were unhappy with Washington’s latest offer to reduce some existing duties.</p>
<p>That deadline gives the auto proposal greater strategic significance. Canada has reportedly consulted industry about what level of tariff could be tolerated if U.S. content remains exempt, while Mexico is pressing a more aggressive 5% to 10% framework. But there is still no announced agreement, and Washington has shown no willingness to restore the old tariff-free status quo automatically. The most realistic outcome may therefore be a negotiated middle ground: lower automotive tariffs, stricter sourcing rules and continued pressure on manufacturers to put more production inside North America.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/NAFTA-and-North-American-Integration.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/experts-say-trumps-tariff-strategy-could-pit-canadian-provinces-against-each-other/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Experts Say Trump’s Tariff Strategy Could Pit Canadian Provinces Against Each Other]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:19:01 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/experts-say-trumps-tariff-strategy-could-pit-canadian-provinces-against-each-other/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s latest trade fight with Washington carries a risk that extends beyond the economic damage caused by tariffs. The pressure]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s latest trade fight with Washington carries a risk that extends beyond the economic damage caused by tariffs. The pressure is landing very differently from one province to another.</p>
<p>The Trump administration’s latest measures, scheduled to take effect August 19, would impose 50% tariffs on selected Canadian goods and, unusually, would not spare products simply because they comply with CUSMA. The legal authority being used can also distinguish between regions within a foreign country. That has raised concerns among trade and political experts that Washington could eventually reward some provinces while maintaining pressure on others. With British Columbia, Quebec and Ontario facing considerably greater exposure than Alberta and Saskatchewan, maintaining a single Canadian negotiating position could become increasingly difficult if provincial jobs and industries are placed on the line.</p>
<h2>A Tariff Tool Built for Province-by-Province Pressure</h2>
<p>What makes the latest tariff threat particularly significant is not merely the 50% headline rate. The Trump administration is invoking Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930, an obscure provision that allows the United States to impose additional duties when it believes another country is discriminating against American commerce. The White House announced three proclamations on July 20 covering products ranging from wine and spirits to cement and hockey-related goods, with the measures scheduled to begin August 19. Unlike many of Washington’s earlier Canadian tariffs, covered goods would not automatically escape the duties because they qualify under CUSMA.</p>
<p>The provision contains another feature attracting attention in Canada. University of Calgary trade-policy researchers Carlo Dade and Sharon Zhengyang Sun note that Section 338 allows presidential action to be limited to a political subdivision of another country. In Canada's case, that could theoretically mean individual provinces. Washington has not announced province-specific tariffs, but the authority gives the administration considerably more flexibility than a single nationwide tariff. Researchers warn that selective exemptions or concessions could eventually create an incentive for individual premiers to seek their own relief rather than maintain a common Canadian front.</p>
<h2>The Same 50% Tariff Would Not Feel the Same Across Canada</h2>
<p>A nationwide tariff can sound uniform while producing remarkably uneven consequences. University of Calgary economist Trevor Tombe estimates the latest measures would affect roughly 13.7% of British Columbia’s exports to the United States, compared with 10.8% for Quebec and about 9% for Ontario. In Alberta and Saskatchewan, the share is closer to 1%, largely because major exports such as energy and potash are excluded from this particular round. That disparity means a measure announced in Washington can quickly become a much bigger political emergency in Victoria or Quebec City than in Edmonton or Regina.</p>
<p>The divide becomes even clearer when existing U.S. sectoral tariffs are added to the picture. Earlier University of Calgary research estimated that approximately 58% of Ontario’s U.S.-bound exports and 55% of Quebec’s were exposed to existing or potential Section 232 measures, compared with much lower exposure in several resource-heavy provinces. Those figures refer to a different tariff authority, but they illustrate the broader problem: Canada’s economy is national while its export industries are highly regional. A government protecting auto jobs in Ontario, a mill in British Columbia or an energy producer in Alberta may therefore see the same trade dispute through very different economic lenses.</p>
<h2>British Columbia Has More to Lose From This Round</h2>
<p>British Columbia stands out as the province with the greatest estimated exposure to the new Section 338 measures. Canada West Foundation analysis places the affected share of B.C.’s U.S.-bound exports at roughly 14%, with products such as electrical equipment and various wood and paper products among the areas potentially facing additional pressure. The province already has extensive experience with trade disputes because forest products have repeatedly been caught in Canada-U.S. tensions. B.C. government figures show that nearly three-quarters of the province’s softwood lumber exports went to the United States in 2024, although softwood lumber itself is subject to a separate trade regime rather than simply falling under the new tariff list.</p>
<p>For a large multinational company, an additional tariff may be absorbed across several markets. For a specialized manufacturer in a smaller B.C. community, the choices can be much narrower: accept smaller margins, raise the price charged to an American customer, find a new buyer quickly or reduce production. That helps explain why British Columbia may favour a more aggressive federal response than provinces facing little direct exposure. The province’s vulnerability is not simply about the value of exports; it is about how concentrated jobs can be in particular communities and industries.</p>
<h2>Alberta and Saskatchewan Have Reasons to Guard Their Exemptions</h2>
<p>The situation looks different on the Prairies. Energy and potash are explicitly excluded from the latest Section 338 tariff measures, leaving Alberta and Saskatchewan with only about 1% of their U.S.-bound exports exposed to the new duties, according to current estimates. That exemption is economically significant. Canada exported approximately 4.3 million barrels of crude oil per day in 2025, according to the Canada Energy Regulator, with about 90% going to the United States. Alberta produces the overwhelming majority of Canadian crude, making dependable access to the American market especially important to the province.</p>
<p>That creates a complicated incentive when Ottawa considers retaliation. Ontario or British Columbia could regard energy exports as valuable leverage over Washington. Alberta, however, would bear much of the cost if that leverage involved restricting or taxing oil shipments. Alberta Premier Danielle Smith and Saskatchewan Premier Scott Moe have opposed using energy exports as a bargaining chip, while simultaneously supporting efforts to resolve the broader dispute. Neither position is difficult to understand from a provincial perspective. The danger for Ottawa is that a tariff strategy does not need to damage every province equally to become politically effective; it only needs to make their preferred responses sufficiently different.</p>
<h2>Alcohol Gives Washington a Direct Line Into Provincial Politics</h2>
<p>Alcohol provides perhaps the clearest example of how the Canada-U.S. dispute can move from international diplomacy into provincial politics. Liquor distribution is largely controlled by provincial and territorial governments. After the first major tariff confrontation with Washington in 2025, provinces and territories removed American alcohol from government-controlled distribution systems as part of Canada’s retaliation. Alberta and Saskatchewan subsequently restored U.S. alcohol sales, while restrictions remained elsewhere. The White House says American alcoholic-beverage exports to Canada fell sharply during the dispute, citing a decline of roughly 81% over a 12-month comparison period.</p>
<p>The arrangement matters because Ottawa cannot simply order every provincial liquor board to return American bourbon, wine or beer to store shelves as part of a federal trade settlement. Reuters reported that the issue has consequently become part of negotiations even though the federal government does not control the final provincial decisions. The symbolism can be powerful. A bottle disappearing from a government liquor store may appear trivial compared with an auto plant or oil pipeline, but it gives Washington a policy issue on which Canadian provinces have already made different choices. Selective U.S. concessions could deepen that distinction.</p>
<h2>Ontario’s Auto Economy Creates a Different Set of Stakes</h2>
<p>Few provinces have as much experience with the immediate consequences of U.S. trade policy as Ontario. The provincial government says its auto sector employed nearly 100,000 people in 2025, while the federal government estimates that more than 90% of Canadian-made vehicles are exported to the United States. Canadian vehicle producers have already faced separate American automotive tariffs, meaning the newest measures arrive on top of an existing period of uncertainty for manufacturers, suppliers and communities dependent on cross-border production.</p>
<p>The integrated nature of the industry makes Ontario especially sensitive to policies that interfere with cross-border movement. Parts can cross the Canada-U.S. border multiple times before a finished vehicle reaches a dealership, and decisions made by automakers can affect suppliers far beyond the assembly line. Ontario Premier Doug Ford has repeatedly advocated a tougher response to U.S. tariffs, including reciprocal measures, while some western premiers have been more cautious about retaliation that could affect their own exports. Those differences do not necessarily mean the provinces disagree about the goal of protecting Canadian industry. They illustrate how the economic cost of achieving that goal can fall unevenly depending on where a worker lives and what that province sells.</p>
<h2>Quebec Faces a Threat to Smaller Manufacturing Communities</h2>
<p>Quebec’s estimated exposure to the newest tariff round is approximately 10.8% of its exports to the United States, placing it behind British Columbia but ahead of most of the country. The province is also already heavily exposed to other U.S. sectoral trade measures. University of Calgary research calculated that about 55% of Quebec’s U.S.-bound exports were covered by existing or potential Section 232 tariffs, reflecting its large presence in industries such as aluminum and manufacturing. The newest tariffs therefore risk layering another source of uncertainty onto businesses that have already spent months adjusting to changing U.S. trade rules.</p>
<p>Quebec’s representative on Canada-U.S. trade, Louise Blais, has warned that the consequences can be particularly severe in smaller communities. She has pointed to producers of textiles, cement, wood flooring and furniture among companies worried about their ability to withstand prolonged tariffs. That distinction matters. National statistics may show that only a modest percentage of total Canadian exports is affected, yet a single factory can represent a major share of employment in a smaller town. A business with one primary U.S. customer cannot necessarily replace that market with buyers in Europe or Asia before its cash reserves run out.</p>
<h2>Retaliation Could Divide Canada Almost as Much as the Tariffs</h2>
<p>Washington is not the only side capable of creating uneven regional consequences. Canada’s response can do the same thing. Ontario has pushed for forceful retaliation, while British Columbia Premier David Eby has discussed Canada's critical minerals and other strategic resources as potential sources of leverage. Alberta and Saskatchewan have opposed measures that would restrict energy exports. Each proposal could impose costs on a different part of the country, making the question of retaliation as much a federalism challenge as a trade-policy decision.</p>
<p>That creates a difficult calculation for Prime Minister Mark Carney’s government. A dollar-for-dollar tariff response may demonstrate resolve but can increase costs for Canadian companies importing U.S. products. Restricting strategic commodities could generate stronger pressure in Washington but hurt Canadian producers selling those commodities. Avoiding retaliation could protect some businesses while leaving tariff-hit manufacturers feeling abandoned. Provincial governments are expected to defend the workers and industries that elected them, which is precisely why an uneven U.S. tariff regime can be politically potent. Canada’s negotiating strength ultimately depends not only on how much economic pain it can withstand, but also on whether governments agree about how that pain should be shared.</p>
<h2>A Stronger Internal Market Could Make Canada Harder to Divide</h2>
<p>One of Canada’s best long-term defences may have little to do with Washington. More than $527 billion in goods and services already moves between Canadian provinces and territories each year, representing almost one-fifth of national GDP, according to the federal government. Ottawa has increasingly focused on eliminating internal trade and labour-mobility barriers, while provinces have pursued agreements aimed at making it easier for Canadian businesses to sell across provincial borders. Federal estimates cited in that effort suggest eliminating remaining internal trade barriers could eventually add as much as $210 billion to Canada's economy, although the precise economic payoff depends heavily on how those barriers are measured and removed.</p>
<p>That will not replace the U.S. market quickly. Geography, supply chains and decades of economic integration mean Canadian companies will continue to depend heavily on American customers. But every additional customer in another province—or in Europe, Asia or elsewhere—reduces the leverage created by a single export destination. The immediate challenge is therefore maintaining provincial cooperation through the August tariff confrontation. The longer-term challenge is building an economy in which Washington has fewer regional pressure points to exploit. A tariff may begin as a border tax, but when its costs fall unevenly across a federation, its most consequential effect can eventually become political.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/Increased-Cooperation-Between-Provinces-and-Territories.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadians-paid-more-in-taxes-than-on-food-housing-and-clothing-in-2025/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadians Paid More in Taxes Than on Food, Housing and Clothing in 2025]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:17:15 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadians-paid-more-in-taxes-than-on-food-housing-and-clothing-in-2025/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For many Canadian households, the biggest expense of 2025 was not the mortgage, the grocery bill or a closet full]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For many Canadian households, the biggest expense of 2025 was not the mortgage, the grocery bill or a closet full of new clothes. A new Fraser Institute calculation estimates that the average Canadian family devoted 41.9% of its cash income to taxes—more than the roughly 36% spent on shelter, food and clothing combined.</p>
<p>The finding lands at a time when affordability remains a defining economic concern. But the headline also needs context. The figure is not a Statistics Canada estimate of what a typical household literally wrote in cheques to governments. It is a broad measure that combines visible taxes, payroll charges, property and sales taxes, and taxes the Institute says are ultimately passed from businesses to consumers. That makes the result striking, useful for debate and also methodologically contested.</p>
<h2>The Headline Figure Is Bigger Than Income Tax</h2>
<p>The Fraser Institute’s 2026 Canadian Consumer Tax Index estimates that an average Canadian family had $121,111 in cash income in 2025 and faced a total tax bill of $50,721. That works out to 41.9% of income. The calculation is designed to capture taxation across federal, provincial and local governments rather than simply the amount withheld from wages.</p>
<p>That distinction matters. A salaried worker looking at a T4 would not see a single $50,721 line called “taxes.” The Institute combines personal income taxes with payroll and health taxes, sales and property taxes and a range of smaller levies. It also attributes a share of business taxes to families on the theory that companies ultimately pass those costs along through prices, wages or returns. In other words, the 41.9% figure is best understood as an estimated economy-wide household tax burden, not a universal effective income-tax rate that applies to every Canadian family.</p>
<h2>Taxes Beat Three Core Necessities Combined</h2>
<p>The comparison driving the headline is straightforward: the Institute estimates that the same average family spent about 36% of its income on shelter, food and clothing combined in 2025. Taxes, at 41.9%, were therefore roughly six percentage points higher than those three categories together. That gap is especially attention-grabbing because housing and groceries have been among the most visible cost pressures of recent years.</p>
<p>Official spending data helps explain why the comparison feels counterintuitive. Statistics Canada’s latest detailed Survey of Household Spending, covering 2023, found that shelter was the largest consumption category and that households spent an average of $12,046 on food and $2,739 on clothing and accessories. Homeowners averaged $27,831 in shelter spending, while renters averaged $18,333. Those figures are not directly interchangeable with the Fraser Institute’s 2025 model, but they reinforce a key point: essential living costs are already enormous, making any measure showing taxes above them politically and financially potent.</p>
<h2>Where the Estimated $50,721 Tax Bill Comes From</h2>
<p>Income tax is the largest single component in the Institute’s 2025 estimate, but it accounts for less than one-third of the total. The report puts income taxes at $16,085, or 31.7% of the estimated tax bill. Payroll and health taxes are next at $11,312, followed by profit taxes at $7,182, sales taxes at $6,972 and property taxes at $4,307.</p>
<p>That mix explains why the overall number can look much higher than the tax rate a household believes it pays. CPP and EI contributions appear on paycheques, GST or HST is paid during purchases, property taxes arrive separately for homeowners, and some levies are embedded in prices. The more controversial component is the allocation of business taxes, because those are legally paid by companies rather than households. The Institute argues the economic cost is ultimately borne by people. Critics dispute how much should be assigned to an “average family,” making that assumption central to interpreting the $50,721 figure.</p>
<h2>The Long-Term Reversal Is the Most Dramatic Part</h2>
<p>The Institute’s historical series reaches back to 1961, when it estimates the average Canadian family paid 33.5% of its income in taxes and 56.5% on shelter, food and clothing. By its measure, the relationship has completely reversed. Taxes moved above the three necessities around the early 1980s and have remained the larger share since then.</p>
<p>In nominal dollars, the study says the average family’s total tax bill rose from $1,675 in 1961 to $50,721 in 2025, an increase of 2,928%. Over the same period, it calculates shelter costs rose 2,349%, food 952% and clothing 526%, while the Consumer Price Index increased 946%. Those percentages should not be mistaken for changes in tax rates; they compare dollar amounts across more than six decades of economic and policy change. Even so, the Institute estimates the tax bill increased 189.5% after inflation, making the shift more than a simple story about higher prices.</p>
<h2>2025 Was Not Simply a Year of Tax Hikes</h2>
<p>The broad tax-burden result can obscure an important fact: some major personal tax measures moved in the opposite direction during 2025. Ottawa reduced the lowest federal marginal income-tax rate from 15% to 14% effective July 1. Because the change happened halfway through the year, the applicable rate for the full 2025 tax year was 14.5%. The federal government said the measure would benefit nearly 22 million individual taxpayers.</p>
<p>At the same time, payroll contributions changed as the Canada Pension Plan enhancement continued. The regular CPP earnings ceiling rose to $71,300, and the second earnings ceiling expanded to $81,200. Employees above the first ceiling could pay up to $396 in CPP2 contributions, on top of a maximum regular CPP contribution of $4,034.10. EI premiums were 1.64% outside Quebec, with a maximum employee premium of $1,077.48. So even with an income-tax cut, some workers experienced higher maximum payroll deductions as pension coverage expanded.</p>
<h2>Official Household Data Tells a Different Kind of Story</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada does not publish the Fraser Institute’s “average family tax bill” as an official household statistic. Its household surveys and national accounts measure income, spending, saving and taxes using different definitions. In the latest detailed spending survey, Canadian households spent an average of $76,750 on goods and services in 2023, up 14.3% from 2021, the largest two-year increase recorded since that survey series began in 2010.</p>
<p>The composition matters as much as the total. Shelter represented 32.1% of consumption, while food accounted for 15.7%. Those official figures show why two households with the same income can experience the cost of living differently: a renter in a high-cost city, a mortgage-free retiree and a family renewing a large mortgage do not have comparable shelter burdens. The same is true of taxes. A national average can describe the system, but it cannot replace a household-specific calculation based on income, province, family structure, benefits and consumption.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Close to the OECD Average on a Standard Tax Measure</h2>
<p>An international comparison also tempers the idea that Canada is uniquely taxed. The OECD’s Revenue Statistics put Canada’s total tax revenue at 34.9% of GDP in 2024, only modestly above the OECD-wide average of 34.1%. The OECD’s 2025 economic survey similarly described Canada’s tax revenues as broadly aligned with the OECD average, while noting that Canada relies more heavily on income taxes and less on consumption taxes than many peers.</p>
<p>That does not contradict the Fraser Institute’s 41.9% estimate because the two numbers answer different questions. Tax-to-GDP compares all government tax revenue with the size of the economy. The Consumer Tax Index allocates a broad set of taxes to an average family and compares that burden with family cash income. Both can be valid within their definitions while producing different percentages. The key is not to treat 41.9% as though it were the same statistical concept as Canada’s tax-to-GDP ratio or a household’s average income-tax rate.</p>
<h2>The Methodology Is a Real Part of the Debate</h2>
<p>The Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives has repeatedly criticized the Consumer Tax Index methodology, especially its treatment of corporate taxes, use of averages and inclusion of CPP and EI contributions. Its argument is that business taxes are not necessarily borne evenly by Canadian families, high-income households can pull up a national mean, and CPP and EI are tied to pension or insurance benefits rather than functioning exactly like ordinary general-revenue taxes.</p>
<p>Those objections do not make the Fraser Institute’s calculation meaningless, but they change what the number can reasonably claim. The Institute is estimating the broad economic burden of taxation on families, including indirect costs that are difficult to see. Its critics ask a different question: what does a representative household actually pay after considering who bears each tax and what households receive through transfers and public programs? A balanced reading should keep those questions separate rather than presenting one methodology as the only definition of a family’s tax bill.</p>
<h2>Why the Finding Resonates With Canadian Households</h2>
<p>Whatever methodology is preferred, the headline arrives in an environment where many households still feel financially squeezed. Statistics Canada reported that only 24.1% of Canadians in spring 2025 said it was easy or very easy for their household to meet its financial needs, down from 47.7% in summer 2021. The income gap between the top 40% and bottom 40% also remained at a record high in the second quarter of 2025.</p>
<p>Inflation cooled considerably from its 2022 peak, but prices did not return to old levels. Canada’s annual average CPI rose 2.1% in 2025, while shelter prices increased 3.0%. The household saving rate averaged 4.9% for the year. Against that backdrop, a $50,721 estimated tax burden is likely to resonate even with families whose own circumstances differ. The more useful question is whether Canadians believe the services, transfers, infrastructure and fiscal stability financed by taxes deliver enough value for what households ultimately give up.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/09/taxes-rate-house.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/toronto-home-prices-fall-4-5-as-buyers-stay-on-the-sidelines/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Toronto Home Prices Fall 4.5% as Buyers Stay on the Sidelines]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:14:31 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/toronto-home-prices-fall-4-5-as-buyers-stay-on-the-sidelines/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Toronto’s housing market is sending an unusual message: homes are getting cheaper, but many would-be buyers still are not convinced]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Toronto’s housing market is sending an unusual message: homes are getting cheaper, but many would-be buyers still are not convinced it is time to jump in. Across the Greater Toronto Area, the average selling price fell 4.5% year over year in July 2026 to $1,003,956, while the benchmark price for a typical home was down 4.6%.</p>
<p>Lower prices would normally be expected to draw buyers back quickly. Instead, the recovery remains cautious. Sales have started improving from the weakness seen earlier in the year, but affordability pressures, borrowing costs and uncertainty about the Canadian economy continue to influence major purchasing decisions. At the same time, fewer owners are listing their homes, creating the possibility that Toronto’s long-running buyer-friendly environment could begin tightening before prices fully recover.</p>
<h2>The 4.5% Price Drop Is Significant, but It Needs Context</h2>
<p>The headline decline reflects the Greater Toronto Area rather than the City of Toronto alone. GTA homes sold for an average of $1,003,956 in July, 4.5% below the same month in 2025. TRREB’s MLS Home Price Index Composite benchmark, designed to track changes in the value of a typical property while reducing distortions caused by the mix of homes sold, was down a similar 4.6%. That close relationship suggests the annual decline cannot simply be dismissed as a statistical quirk caused by more inexpensive homes changing hands.</p>
<p>Monthly figures tell a more complicated story. The unadjusted average selling price dropped substantially from June, but average prices can swing when the proportion of expensive detached homes or cheaper condos changes. The benchmark moved far less dramatically. For homeowners, that distinction matters: a 4.5% regional decline does not mean every property suddenly lost 4.5% of its value. Location, housing type and recent comparable sales remain far more important when valuing an individual home.</p>
<h2>Buyers Are Returning, but There Is Still No Stampede</h2>
<p>Toronto housing activity has improved considerably from the difficult opening months of 2026. Seasonally adjusted GTA home sales increased in July for the fifth consecutive month, extending a recovery that began after activity hit a particularly weak patch early in the year. In raw terms, TRREB recorded 5,995 transactions during July, only slightly below the level recorded a year earlier. That is a notable improvement from the large annual sales declines seen during parts of the winter.</p>
<p>Still, improving sales are not the same as a booming housing market. CMHC continues to describe Canadian homebuyers as cautious, with affordability, mortgage costs, income growth and economic uncertainty limiting demand. Toronto illustrates that hesitation clearly. Falling prices have brought some households back, particularly those that had already been financially prepared to purchase, but many others appear willing to keep renting or remain in their existing homes. In a market where the average property still costs roughly $1 million, even modest uncertainty can postpone a decision involving hundreds of thousands of dollars of debt.</p>
<h2>Sellers Are Pulling Back Almost as Much as Buyers</h2>
<p>One of July’s most important developments was not the number of homes sold, but the number entering the market. GTA new listings fell to 14,484, a 17.8% year-over-year decline. That was a much steeper drop than the change in sales, meaning the pool of available homes was no longer expanding as quickly as it had during the softer stages of the housing correction. Active inventory stood at roughly 26,100 properties during the month, also lower than a year earlier.</p>
<p>This creates an interesting dynamic. Buyers are still behaving cautiously, but sellers who are not under pressure to move may also be choosing to wait rather than accept a lower price. Imagine a homeowner who considered selling in the spring but received offers well below expectations: keeping the property for another year may suddenly seem more attractive. When enough sellers make that decision simultaneously, inventory shrinks. That can gradually reduce buyers’ negotiating leverage even without a dramatic increase in demand, which is why falling prices and tightening market conditions can exist at the same time.</p>
<h2>Lower Interest Rates Have Not Solved Toronto’s Affordability Problem</h2>
<p>Borrowing conditions are substantially easier than they were at the height of the Bank of Canada’s monetary tightening cycle, but Toronto homes remain expensive enough that financing continues to constrain demand. The Bank of Canada held its overnight policy rate at 2.25% in July, maintaining the level reached after its 2025 rate reductions. CMHC nevertheless says mortgage rates, slow income growth and uncertainty are keeping many Canadian households from buying even as affordability gradually improves.</p>
<p>The challenge becomes clearer when Toronto prices are viewed in dollar rather than percentage terms. A 4.5% annual decline sounds substantial, but the average GTA home still sold for just over $1 million. A buyer making a traditional 20% down payment on a property near that price would still need roughly $200,000 upfront before closing costs and would finance about $800,000. That leaves monthly payments highly sensitive to mortgage rates. Falling prices therefore help at the margin, but they have not transformed Toronto into an inexpensive market. For many households, waiting remains financially easier than stretching to purchase immediately.</p>
<h2>Detached Homes and Condos Are Moving at Different Speeds</h2>
<p>The regional average also hides major differences between housing categories. GTA detached homes sold for an average of roughly $1.29 million in July, down 5.1% from a year earlier. Semi-detached properties experienced an even larger annual decline of about 7.3%. Freehold townhouses were more resilient, while condominium apartments averaged approximately $636,000, only 2.3% below their July 2025 level. Condos were also the only major category to record an increase in average price from June.</p>
<p>Those differences show just how price-sensitive buyers have become. A household priced out of a detached home may still be capable of purchasing a townhouse or condo, particularly after several years in which mortgage qualification became more difficult. Toronto’s condo sector had previously been among the weakest portions of the market, but lower prices appear to be helping some units find buyers. It does not mean condos have entered another boom. Instead, the July figures suggest demand may be responding first where the purchase price is lowest, while expensive ground-oriented properties remain more exposed to affordability constraints.</p>
<h2>The City of Toronto Is Holding Up Better Than the Wider GTA</h2>
<p>The 4.5% decline commonly associated with Toronto housing is a GTA-wide figure, and conditions within the city were somewhat stronger in July. The average selling price in the City of Toronto was approximately $1.01 million, down about 3.2% from a year earlier. Its benchmark price was approximately $928,000, down 3.8%. The city recorded 2,242 sales, representing a small increase from July 2025, while new listings dropped sharply.</p>
<p>That distinction matters because Toronto is not a single housing market. A downtown condominium, an Etobicoke bungalow and a detached home in York Region can respond very differently to the same economic conditions. In July, the City of Toronto’s supply-demand balance tightened faster than the GTA overall because available listings declined more quickly relative to sales. This does not make Toronto a seller’s market, but it illustrates why broad regional headlines should be treated as directional indicators rather than precise valuations. Buyers searching in neighbourhoods with limited inventory may experience considerably more competition than the GTA-wide price decline would suggest.</p>
<h2>Buyers Still Have Negotiating Power, but Sellers Cannot Ignore the Market</h2>
<p>Despite the decline in listings, Toronto-area sellers have not regained the type of pricing power seen during the housing boom. GTA properties sold for roughly 97% of their asking price in July, while homes took about 32 days on average to sell. Those numbers suggest buyers still have time to evaluate properties, compare alternatives and negotiate rather than routinely competing through unconditional offers and bidding wars.</p>
<p>For sellers, the environment rewards realistic expectations. Pricing a home based on what a neighbour received several years ago can result in weeks of inactivity followed by a reduction. A correctly priced property in a desirable neighbourhood, however, can behave quite differently from the regional average—particularly as the supply of new listings contracts. The result is an increasingly selective market rather than one clearly controlled by either side. Attractive properties priced near recent comparable sales can still move quickly, while overpriced listings may sit. Buyers therefore retain leverage, but the window of exceptionally abundant selection that characterized softer periods of the market may gradually be narrowing.</p>
<h2>Toronto May Be Approaching Stabilization, but a Fast Rebound Is Far From Guaranteed</h2>
<p>TRREB entered 2026 forecasting an average GTA selling price of roughly $1 million to $1.03 million for the year, meaning July’s $1,003,956 result sits near the bottom of that range. The board has argued that declining inventory combined with improving transactions could eventually stabilize prices as more pent-up demand returns. July offers some evidence for that scenario: seasonally adjusted sales increased while new listings contracted sharply, gradually tightening the relationship between supply and demand.</p>
<p>CMHC remains more cautious. Its mid-year outlook expects Ontario to experience continued price weakness during 2026, particularly in expensive urban markets, before a gradual recovery begins in 2027. That disagreement captures the uncertainty surrounding Toronto housing. Prices may stop falling before sales return to historic levels, especially if owners continue withholding listings. But a sustained recovery will likely require more than reduced inventory. Buyers need confidence in employment, household income, borrowing costs and the broader economy. For now, Toronto appears to be moving away from outright deterioration and toward an uneasy period of stabilization—without yet delivering the conditions necessary for another major housing surge.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Bridle-Path.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canada-rejects-trumps-latest-tariff-offer-as-washington-deadline-closes-in/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Rejects Trump’s Latest Tariff Offer as Washington Deadline Closes In]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:10:56 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canada-rejects-trumps-latest-tariff-offer-as-washington-deadline-closes-in/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada and the United States are entering the most consequential stretch yet in their renewed trade confrontation. Canadian officials are]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada and the United States are entering the most consequential stretch yet in their renewed trade confrontation. Canadian officials are reported to be dissatisfied with Washington’s latest proposal to lower some tariffs, leaving negotiations unresolved just days before President Donald Trump’s August 19 deadline for a new 50% levy on a broad range of Canadian goods. The disagreement is no longer simply about one tariff rate. Ottawa wants meaningful relief from existing U.S. duties on sectors such as steel and aluminum, while Washington is pressing Canada over autos, dairy access and provincial restrictions on American alcohol. Although no Canadian official has publicly announced a formal rejection of the U.S. proposal, the offer has not produced the breakthrough both sides need. With exporters already making contingency plans, the next several days could determine whether the dispute de-escalates or expands into another costly phase.</p>
<h2>Latest U.S. Offer Falls Short of What Canada Wanted</h2>
<p>The latest U.S. proposal appears to have moved negotiations, but not far enough for Ottawa. Reuters, citing CBC News, reported that Washington presented Canada with an offer Tuesday that would reduce some tariffs. Canadian officials were dissatisfied because the reductions did not go as far as hoped. Neither U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer nor Canadian trade minister Dominic LeBlanc publicly detailed the proposal, underscoring how sensitive the bargaining has become.</p>
<p>That distinction matters. Canada has not issued a public statement formally declaring the offer rejected, yet it clearly failed to close the gap. Ottawa is seeking relief from existing sectoral tariffs while trying to stop the August 19 duties from taking effect. An offer that leaves too much of the existing burden intact gives Canada little reason to surrender major bargaining chips now. The negotiations therefore remain active, but without the compromise needed for either government to declare a breakthrough.</p>
<h2>A Potential Deal Is Taking Shape, but the Price Is High</h2>
<p>The outline of a possible bargain has become clearer. Canada has discussed removing retaliatory tariffs on U.S. automobiles, accepting Washington’s interpretation of how dairy tariff-rate quotas should be allocated, and encouraging provinces to return American alcohol to store shelves. In exchange, the United States has been considering relief from tariffs already weighing on Canadian steel and aluminum, alongside withdrawal or modification of the new measures due August 19.</p>
<p>That is a politically difficult trade because the concessions touch several constituencies. Auto tariffs are a federal instrument, dairy access reaches into Canada’s supply-managed farm sector, and liquor retailing is largely controlled by provinces. Canada’s counter-tariffs on American steel, aluminum and automobiles also remain in force. Any agreement has to do more than produce a lower headline tariff. It must give Ottawa enough economic value to justify concessions that would be highly visible to workers, farmers, provincial governments and consumers across Canada.</p>
<h2>August 19 Is Now the Deadline Driving Everything</h2>
<p>The pressure comes from three U.S. presidential proclamations signed July 20. They impose additional 50% duties on categories of Canadian goods beginning at 12:01 a.m. Eastern time on August 19. The White House says the measures respond to what it considers discriminatory Canadian treatment of U.S. motor vehicles, dairy products and alcoholic beverages. Unlike earlier measures that left many CUSMA-compliant goods protected, the new Section 338 duties can apply even when products qualify under the continental trade agreement.</p>
<p>The scope is large enough to matter but targeted enough to create uneven pain. Reuters has reported that roughly US$20 billion in Canadian exports are exposed, equal to about 5.2% of Canada’s 2025 exports to the United States. Energy, potash, fish, critical minerals and products already covered by certain Section 232 tariffs are excluded. For affected companies, a 50% border charge can erase the price advantage that made the U.S. market viable.</p>
<h2>Even CUSMA-Compliant Goods Could Be Hit</h2>
<p>The August 19 threat is disruptive because it reaches into trade businesses had assumed would remain protected by CUSMA rules. Qualifying North American content has long allowed manufacturers to build cross-border supply chains without repeatedly paying customs duties. The new U.S. measures break with that expectation by targeting covered Canadian products regardless of their CUSMA status, according to the White House’s description of the proclamations.</p>
<p>That creates different risk than a tariff aimed only at non-compliant imports. A Canadian manufacturer can follow the agreement’s origin rules and face the additional duty if its product appears on the new lists. For factories that price contracts months ahead, that uncertainty is hard to absorb. It can mean renegotiating with U.S. customers, delaying investment or searching for alternative markets. The immediate dispute is about tariffs, but the longer-term issue is whether companies can still rely on continental rules when planning production and sales.</p>
<h2>Steel and Aluminum Remain Canada’s Biggest Bargaining Priority</h2>
<p>Steel and aluminum remain central to Canada’s negotiating position because those sectors carry a heavy tariff burden. Canada’s Trade Commissioner Service says U.S. Section 232 tariffs on steel, aluminum and copper products currently range from 10% to 50%, depending on the product and applicable rules. Canada, meanwhile, continues to levy counter-tariffs on U.S. steel, aluminum and automobiles. Ottawa has made securing relief from existing sectoral tariffs a core objective in the talks.</p>
<p>For affected producers, a partial reduction could matter. These industries operate through integrated North American supply chains, where metal can cross the border as raw material, a component and eventually part of a finished product. Prime Minister Mark Carney has argued that U.S. aluminum tariffs have contributed to higher American aluminum prices. That helps explain Ottawa’s resistance to modest relief: surrendering retaliation without materially improving market access could leave Canadian producers exposed while giving Washington several priority concessions.</p>
<h2>Dairy, Autos and American Alcohol Complicate the Negotiations</h2>
<p>Some of Washington’s demands are harder to deliver than they first appear. The United States wants progress on Canadian dairy market access, an end to retaliatory treatment of American vehicles and the return of U.S. alcohol to Canadian retail shelves. Canada has reportedly shown willingness to negotiate on all three. Yet liquor policy illustrates the complication: provincial governments, not Ottawa alone, control the major public retail systems that removed many American products during the trade fight.</p>
<p>Dairy is equally sensitive. The dispute centres on how Canada allocates tariff-rate quotas that determine which importers can bring volumes of dairy products into the country at preferential tariff rates. Washington has argued that Canada’s allocation system limits access for American exporters. Autos add another layer because Canadian counter-tariffs were designed as a response to U.S. vehicle duties. A package covering all three areas requires coordination across federal policy, provincial decisions and affected industries.</p>
<h2>Small Exporters Are Already Bracing for Major Revenue Losses</h2>
<p>For small exporters, the deadline is affecting decisions before any new tariff is collected. A Canadian Federation of Independent Business study conducted from July 28 to August 6 found that 40% of surveyed exporters to the United States said they sold products affected by the proposed tariffs. Among exporters with affected products, 77% expected revenue losses if the duties were implemented, while 35% anticipated revenue would fall by at least half.</p>
<p>The competitiveness numbers are stark. Seventy-eight per cent of U.S.-exporting respondents said a 50% tariff would make their products uncompetitive in the American market, and 75% said it would push them to reduce dependence on the United States. At the same time, 78% said they were taking a wait-and-see approach. That captures the dilemma: moving customers, production or distribution networks is expensive, but committing new money to a market facing a possible 50% tariff can be harder to justify.</p>
<h2>The Dispute Is Becoming Entangled With CUSMA’s Future</h2>
<p>The confrontation is unfolding alongside debate over CUSMA’s future. The agreement’s first six-year joint review took place July 1, 2026, but the United States did not agree to extend the pact for another 16-year term. That does not terminate CUSMA. The agreement can remain in force until 2036, with annual joint reviews continuing unless the three countries agree on an extension. The absence of an extension adds uncertainty to cross-border investment decisions.</p>
<p>Trump has also publicly said he does not care about renewing or updating the agreement, while U.S. and Mexican officials have pursued discussions on issues including automotive content rules. Canada’s immediate focus has increasingly been tariff relief rather than treating the CUSMA review as a legal exercise. That makes the current standoff more consequential: whatever bargain emerges could influence the terms and political tone of North American trade for years, even if CUSMA itself remains legally in force.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Keeping the Door Open While Preparing for a Fight</h2>
<p>Negotiations will continue as the deadline approaches. LeBlanc, Canada’s chief trade negotiator Janice Charette and Ambassador Mark Wiseman have been updating stakeholders while talks with Washington intensify. Global Affairs Canada says the government is seeking relief from existing sectoral tariffs, protection from the new Section 338 measures and progress toward a modernized CUSMA. Earlier meetings with Greer were described by LeBlanc as constructive and detailed, but the latest U.S. offer shows those talks have not yet produced acceptable terms.</p>
<p>If no agreement is reached, 50% duties are scheduled to begin August 19. Carney has said Canada is prepared to respond if the measures take effect, while arguing that acting before the deadline could undermine negotiations. Ottawa is balancing two goals: preserving room for a deal and demonstrating that Canada will not trade away major leverage for limited relief. The next move from Washington may determine which approach becomes necessary.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/shutterstock_2747572821.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/ontario-ends-social-assistance-for-people-living-in-canada-illegally/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ontario Ends Social Assistance for People Living in Canada Illegally]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 13 Aug 26 11:09:16 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/ontario-ends-social-assistance-for-people-living-in-canada-illegally/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Ontario has redrawn a politically sensitive line around who can access its two main social-assistance programs. Effective August 13, 2026,]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ontario has redrawn a politically sensitive line around who can access its two main social-assistance programs. Effective August 13, 2026, the province says people who are living in Canada without legal immigration status can no longer receive Ontario Works or Ontario Disability Support Program payments. The new regulations also reach some people who are legally in Canada only temporarily, including those on student visas, work permits, and visitor or tourist status. The move follows a tribunal decision involving a man whose temporary work permit expired decades ago but who was still found eligible for Ontario Works under the rules then in force. For the Ford government, the change is about protecting public money and clarifying eligibility. For applicants, caseworkers and legal advocates, the immediate challenge is understanding exactly how the new rule applies across different immigration categories.</p>
<h2>The Rules Changed Immediately</h2>
<p>The province says the regulations took effect immediately, rather than being phased in over months. Ontario amended rules under both the Ontario Works Act, 1997 and the Ontario Disability Support Program Act, 1997, making immigration status a more explicit eligibility test for provincial social assistance. Applicants already had to provide information about residency, income, assets and household circumstances; the government now stresses that citizenship or immigration status must also be demonstrated.</p>
<p>That matters because Ontario Works and ODSP are often the final financial backstop for people with little or no income. Ontario Works helps with basic living and shelter costs while also connecting many recipients with employment services. ODSP provides income and health-related supports to eligible people with disabilities. By changing the regulations governing both programs at once, Ontario has made the new immigration-status restriction apply across the core of the province’s social-assistance system, not simply to one benefit stream.</p>
<h2>A Tribunal Ruling Forced the Issue</h2>
<p>The policy change can be traced to a case that became public in July. The man at the centre of the dispute said he entered Canada in 1997 on a temporary work permit. It expired about four years later, but he remained in the country. After years of informal work, he entered the homeless shelter system and applied for Ontario Works. His application was denied because of his immigration status.</p>
<p>The Social Benefits Tribunal later overturned that denial. Reporting on the decision said the adjudicator concluded the man was not a tourist or visitor given how long he had lived in Canada, and there was no enforceable removal order before the tribunal. Under the wording then in force, legal immigration status was not an absolute prerequisite in his circumstances. Premier Doug Ford responded by saying the regulations would be changed if necessary. A month later, Ontario announced the new rules.</p>
<h2>The Ban Reaches Beyond People Without Status</h2>
<p>The headline focuses on people living in Canada illegally, but the government’s announcement goes further. Ontario also says people authorized to remain in Canada only temporarily are not eligible for Ontario Works or ODSP under the new rules. The province specifically pointed to students, work permit holders, visitors and tourists. A worker or student with a valid federal permit may therefore be legally present in Canada while still being excluded from these benefits.</p>
<p>The announcement does not provide a complete breakdown of every immigration category. Refugee claimants, people with pending permanent-residence applications and other exceptional cases have historically been treated differently under social-assistance rules. Earlier Ontario guidance contained specific exceptions in certain situations. Because the August 13 changes took effect immediately without publicly spelling out every edge case, people in more complicated circumstances will need updated ministry guidance and individual eligibility assessments rather than older summaries of the rules.</p>
<h2>Nearly One Million Ontarians Receive Social Assistance</h2>
<p>The programs affected are substantial, even though the province has not said how many people will lose eligibility because of the new rule. A single person on Ontario Works can receive up to $733 a month for basic needs and shelter, depending on circumstances. A single person on ODSP can receive up to $1,436 a month after a 1.9 per cent inflation-based increase took effect on July 1, 2026. ODSP rates have risen by nearly 23 per cent since September 2022.</p>
<p>The system serves a large population. Maytree’s analysis of Ontario data found an average of 972,979 social-assistance beneficiaries in 2024-25, including about 470,867 Ontario Works beneficiaries and 502,112 ODSP beneficiaries. Those totals are not the number affected by the immigration-status change; the government has not released that figure. Still, they show why an eligibility amendment can carry administrative weight across a system serving close to one million people.</p>
<h2>Taxpayer Protection Is the Government’s Main Argument</h2>
<p>Ontario is presenting the change primarily as a question of program integrity and taxpayer protection. Children, Community and Social Services Minister Michael Parsa said provincial assistance should be reserved for people in financial hardship who are legally authorized to live in Canada. The government also emphasizes that applicants must demonstrate citizenship or immigration status, making documentation central to how the restriction will be administered.</p>
<p>What the province has not provided is equally important. Its August 13 release did not include an estimate of how many current recipients will be removed, how many future applications are expected to be rejected, or how much money the rule is projected to save. That leaves the fiscal impact unclear even though the political message is straightforward. Without a published estimate of the affected population, claims that the change will produce a specific dollar amount in savings would go beyond the evidence currently available.</p>
<h2>Appeals Still Matter Under the New Rules</h2>
<p>The tribunal decision that triggered the change highlights Ontario’s appeal system. People who disagree with a decision about Ontario Works or ODSP have the right to request an internal review. If the dispute is not resolved, many decisions can then be appealed to the Social Benefits Tribunal. Tribunals Ontario says an appeal normally must be filed within 30 days of receiving the internal-review decision, and there is no fee to file.</p>
<p>The new regulations do not eliminate that process. They change the eligibility rule administrators and the tribunal must apply when immigration status is at issue. Appeals may still matter where someone believes their status was classified incorrectly, documents were overlooked or an applicable exception was missed. The original case showed how much can turn on regulatory wording. Ontario says the amendments are intended to provide greater clarity, but individual disputes over status and eligibility may still arise.</p>
<h2>Implementation Will Decide the Real-World Impact</h2>
<p>The central policy is clear, but implementation details will determine its impact. Before the change, Ontario guidance allowed people without permanent status to qualify in specific circumstances. Refugee claimants, permanent-residence applicants and certain people facing removal could be treated differently depending on their situation. Those older rules help explain why the tribunal case did not produce the outcome many observers assumed the law already required.</p>
<p>There is also debate over the adequacy of the benefits being restricted. Ontario Works remains capped at $733 a month for a single adult, the same nominal maximum it has had since 2018. The Income Security Advocacy Centre says Ontario prices have risen roughly 23 per cent since then, while ODSP has been indexed to inflation. That debate is separate from immigration eligibility, but it shapes the stakes: Ontario is tightening access to programs already under pressure over affordability, caseloads and the cost of necessities.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/08/shutterstock_2726446085.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/nearly-half-of-canadian-small-business-owners-have-considered-closing-this-year-survey-finds/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Nearly Half of Canadian Small-Business Owners Have Considered Closing This Year, Survey Finds]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 14:21:05 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/nearly-half-of-canadian-small-business-owners-have-considered-closing-this-year-survey-finds/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[The strain on Canada’s small-business economy is becoming harder to dismiss. New national polling released on August 12 found that]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The strain on Canada’s small-business economy is becoming harder to dismiss. New national polling released on August 12 found that 47% of owners, entrepreneurs and self-employed Canadians had seriously considered permanently closing their businesses at some point in 2026. At the same time, confidence has fallen sharply, operating costs are climbing and many firms have surprisingly little cash available to absorb another setback.</p>
<p>The findings do not mean that nearly half of Canadian small businesses are about to disappear. They do, however, capture how fragile the finances of many owners have become. From a contractor paying more for fuel to a restaurant trying to raise menu prices without driving away customers, pressures that once looked temporary are increasingly shaping everyday business decisions.</p>
<h2>The 47% Figure Is a Warning, Not a Prediction</h2>
<p>The headline number comes from Zensurance’s fifth annual Small Business Confidence Index. The research, conducted by Pollfish between June 5 and June 22, covered 1,000 self-employed Canadians between the ages of 18 and 64. Forty-seven per cent said they had seriously considered permanently closing their business at some point during 2026. British Columbia, Manitoba and Saskatchewan, and Atlantic Canada recorded particularly high levels of concern.</p>
<p>That finding needs to be interpreted carefully. Considering a shutdown is very different from actually closing a company, filing for insolvency or laying off an entire workforce. An owner may contemplate closing during a particularly difficult month and ultimately continue operating. Still, the direction of sentiment is notable. Zensurance's measure of business confidence has fallen from 70% in 2024 to 58% in 2025 and just 49% this year. When almost half of respondents say closure has entered the conversation, it suggests survival has become an active consideration for a substantial portion of the people surveyed.</p>
<h2>Costs Are Rising Faster Than Many Owners Can Comfortably Absorb</h2>
<p>The financial pressure becomes clearer when looking beyond confidence. Seventy-one per cent of respondents said their total operating expenses had increased compared with last year. Another 58% said higher gasoline and fuel costs had negatively affected their bottom line, while 35% identified inflation as their single biggest business concern. Nearly one-quarter said raising prices without losing customers was a major worry.</p>
<p>Revenue is not necessarily keeping pace. Forty-three per cent reported lower revenue than during the first half of 2025, and 59% believed the economy had negatively affected their business since January. Broader government data point in the same direction on costs: Statistics Canada reported that 64.3% of Canadian businesses expected to encounter at least one cost-related obstacle during the second quarter of 2026, up from 58.9% in the first quarter. Consumer inflation was also running at 2.8% year over year in June, meaning businesses remain caught between higher expenses and customers who are themselves watching every dollar.</p>
<h2>Cash Reserves May Be the Most Concerning Number</h2>
<p>Perhaps the most consequential finding has less to do with confidence than with financial breathing room. Four out of five respondents reported operating with three months of cash reserves or less. That leaves relatively little time for a business to recover from a prolonged sales slowdown, an unexpected repair, a major customer failing to pay or another sharp increase in expenses.</p>
<p>Some owners are already reaching beyond conventional business financing. Thirty-nine per cent said they had used personal credit cards or home equity to fund business operations during 2026. For an incorporated business, financial statements can make the company look separate from the household behind it; for the owner, the distinction can become far less meaningful when a personal credit card is paying suppliers. The Bank of Canada has separately reported that financing conditions are somewhat tighter for smaller companies than for large borrowers and that impairments on small-business loans have continued to rise, even while the overall Canadian corporate sector remains in relatively sound financial condition.</p>
<h2>The Pressure Is Not Evenly Distributed Across Canada</h2>
<p>Business owners are feeling the strain differently depending on where they operate. In British Columbia, 57% of respondents said they had seriously considered closing permanently this year, the highest reported provincial or regional figure. The figure was 54% across Manitoba and Saskatchewan, 53% in Atlantic Canada, 43% in Ontario and 39% in Alberta.</p>
<p>The sources of pressure also differed. In Atlantic Canada, 75% cited rising gasoline prices as having a negative impact, compared with 58% nationally. Ontario recorded the largest share naming inflation as the single biggest business concern, at 38%. Those differences matter because a cost increase that barely registers for a home-based professional can be significant for a delivery company, construction contractor, tourism operator or rural business covering large distances. There is no single Canadian small-business experience. A restaurant in Vancouver, an HVAC contractor in Winnipeg and a seasonal tourism business in Nova Scotia can face very different cost structures while arriving at the same question: whether the remaining margin justifies staying open.</p>
<h2>Trade Uncertainty Is Adding Another Layer of Risk</h2>
<p>The domestic squeeze is occurring while Canadian businesses are also navigating an unusually uncertain trading relationship with the United States. In a separate CFIB study conducted between July 28 and August 6, 1,833 Canadian independent business owners were questioned about proposed new U.S. tariffs. Among businesses exporting to the United States, 90% said they were concerned about the potential impact.</p>
<p>The risk becomes greater for companies whose products would actually be caught by the measures. Forty per cent of exporters in the CFIB research said they had affected products. Among that group, 77% expected revenue losses if the proposed tariffs were implemented, while 35% anticipated losing at least half of their revenue. Three-quarters of exporters said the measures would prompt efforts to reduce their dependence on the U.S. market. The Bank of Canada has also described trade-policy uncertainty as an important factor affecting the economy. For a smaller exporter without multiple factories, large cash reserves or operations in several countries, rapidly changing trade rules can make investment and hiring decisions particularly difficult.</p>
<h2>“Buy Canadian” Is Helping, but the Benefits Are Uneven</h2>
<p>One possible counterweight to trade tensions has been the renewed push toward Canadian-made products. Yet the newest findings suggest patriotic purchasing has not translated into a universal financial boost for small firms. Seventeen per cent of respondents said the “Buy Canadian” movement had positively affected revenue or customer demand, including 6% who reported a significant increase in Canadian customers.</p>
<p>Another 38% said the movement had made no difference. That does not necessarily conflict with earlier research showing strong interest in domestic products. CFIB reported in late 2025 that 39% of business owners had experienced increased sales of Canadian or locally made goods, while 43% were actively encouraging customers to buy local or Canadian. The studies measure somewhat different things and were conducted at different times, but together they illustrate an important limitation: a shift in consumer preference does not benefit every business equally. A Canadian manufacturer selling a clearly identifiable domestic product may gain directly, while a service company or retailer dependent on imported inventory may see far less upside.</p>
<h2>Owners Are Also Exposed to Risks That Have Little to Do With Inflation</h2>
<p>While economic conditions dominate the conversation, the research uncovered another vulnerability. Sixty-one per cent of respondents said they operated without business insurance. Zensurance reported that the comparable figure was 33% in 2024, representing a 28-percentage-point increase in two years. Among uninsured respondents, some said they believed their businesses simply did not face the kinds of risks insurance would cover.</p>
<p>At the same time, owners identified several potentially expensive threats. Customer nonpayment for completed work was named the most significant business risk by 29%, followed by cyberattacks or data breaches at 14% and theft or vandalism at 9%. Cyber incidents in particular can impose costs well beyond replacing a laptop. Canada's Cyber Centre says total recovery costs associated with cyber-security incidents reported by Canadian organizations reached $1.2 billion in 2023, double the amount recorded in 2021. For a business already living with a short cash runway, a large unpaid invoice, data breach or operational shutdown can turn a manageable year into a crisis surprisingly quickly.</p>
<h2>Thinking About Closing Is Different From Actually Closing</h2>
<p>One of the easiest mistakes is to read the 47% finding as evidence that Canada is about to lose nearly half of its small businesses. It says nothing of the sort. Statistics Canada uses separate administrative data to measure business openings and closures, and even its definition of a monthly “closure” does not automatically mean a company has permanently disappeared. A business counted as closed can subsequently reopen, while permanent exits require a longer period of observation.</p>
<p>That distinction makes the new findings more useful as a measure of stress than as a forecast of the number of companies that will vanish. Canada has nevertheless been wrestling with weaker business formation. CFIB reported earlier in 2026 that business exits had been outpacing entries for a sustained period, describing the situation as an “entrepreneurial drought.” That broader backdrop helps explain why owners contemplating closure matter even when they ultimately remain open. If fewer entrepreneurs are willing to start companies at the same time existing operators become increasingly reluctant to expand, the consequences can gradually show up in investment, competition, hiring and neighbourhood commercial activity.</p>
<h2>The Stakes Extend Well Beyond Individual Business Owners</h2>
<p>Small businesses are not a marginal part of the Canadian economy. According to Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada, the country had roughly 1.08 million small employer businesses as of December 2024, representing 98.2% of all employer businesses. They employed about 5.8 million people, equivalent to 46.6% of Canada's private-sector labour force. A sustained deterioration in their financial health therefore has implications far beyond the owners themselves.</p>
<p>There are still signs of resilience. CFIB's July Business Barometer showed long-term optimism improving to 58.3, while 15% of firms planned to add full-time employees compared with 11% planning reductions. Importantly, those responses were collected before the latest escalation in U.S. tariff threats. The Bank of Canada, meanwhile, described the economy in July as weak but showing signs of improvement and expects inflation to gradually move back toward 2%. That leaves Canadian entrepreneurs in an unusual position: conditions are not uniformly deteriorating, but many individual businesses have little room left for another shock. The next several months may determine how many thoughts about closing ultimately turn into decisions.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Small-Businesses-Are-Closing-Due-to-Unsustainable-Debt-Costs.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/metrolinx-has-more-than-2400-executives-and-managers-for-4700-frontline-workers-as-ford-orders-review/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Metrolinx Has More Than 2,400 Executives and Managers for 4,700 Frontline Workers as Ford Orders Review]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 11:39:45 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/metrolinx-has-more-than-2400-executives-and-managers-for-4700-frontline-workers-as-ford-orders-review/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Ontario’s massive transit agency is facing a new kind of scrutiny—this time focused not on tracks, tunnels or construction schedules,]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ontario’s massive transit agency is facing a new kind of scrutiny—this time focused not on tracks, tunnels or construction schedules, but on who is managing the organization. Metrolinx finished the 2025-26 fiscal year with 7,176 full-time-equivalent employees, including 2,303 managers and 135 executives. Combined, those categories account for 2,438 positions, or roughly one-third of the workforce.</p>
<p>The numbers are landing at an awkward moment. Premier Doug Ford’s government has launched an efficiency review of Metrolinx and seven other provincial agencies, with administrative spending and leader-to-staff ratios specifically on the agenda. Metrolinx argues its unusually complex mandate requires significant specialized leadership. The government is now examining whether that organizational structure still represents good value for taxpayers.</p>
<h2>The Staffing Numbers Behind the Headline</h2>
<p>Metrolinx’s latest staffing figures help explain why its organizational structure has suddenly become a political issue. The agency reported 7,176 full-time-equivalent employees for 2025-26. Of those, 2,303 were classified as managers and another 135 as executives. Together, that produces 2,438 managerial and executive positions—approximately 34 per cent of the agency’s total workforce. Put differently, there are roughly 1.9 employees outside those categories for every manager or executive.</p>
<p>There is an important distinction in how those numbers should be interpreted. Subtracting managers and executives from the total leaves 4,738 positions, but Metrolinx does not classify every one of those employees as a frontline worker. The remainder can include operations employees, planners, specialists and other non-management staff in addition to employees directly serving passengers. Still, the comparison illustrates the organizational question now confronting Queen’s Park: whether an agency responsible for moving passengers and building transit requires more than 2,400 management and executive positions to carry out that mandate effectively.</p>
<h2>Management Grew Even as the Overall Workforce Shrunk</h2>
<p>The direction of Metrolinx’s staffing numbers may attract as much attention as their absolute size. Overall full-time-equivalent employment fell from 7,222 in 2024-25 to 7,176 in 2025-26, a reduction of 46 positions. During the same period, however, the number of managers increased from 2,224 to 2,303. Executive positions rose from 124 to 135. That means management and executive employment increased by 90 positions while the organization as a whole became slightly smaller.</p>
<p>Metrolinx has attributed its overall workforce decline partly to provincial restrictions on hiring for non-business-critical and non-public-facing roles, along with a broader cap on employment. CEO Michael Lindsay has defended the growth at senior levels, arguing that Metrolinx is simultaneously undertaking an unusually large collection of technically complicated projects. His position is essentially that fewer layers of expertise are not automatically better when the organization is procuring, engineering and overseeing billions of dollars in infrastructure. Critics, however, see the contrasting staffing trends as precisely the reason management should now face closer examination.</p>
<h2>Ford’s Review Is Looking Directly at Leader-to-Staff Ratios</h2>
<p>The staffing debate is no longer confined to opposition criticism or questions directed at Metrolinx executives. Ontario’s government announced in August that eight major provincial agencies will undergo reviews aimed at examining efficiency, productivity and spending. Metrolinx is on the list alongside organizations including the LCBO, Workplace Safety and Insurance Board, Supply Ontario, Legal Aid Ontario and the Alcohol and Gaming Commission of Ontario.</p>
<p>Finance Minister and Treasury Board President Peter Bethlenfalvy said the examinations will include administrative costs, strategic plans and, significantly for Metrolinx, leader-to-staff ratios. He also indicated that staffing reductions and lower taxpayer costs could emerge from the process, saying that everything would be considered. The initiative follows a province-wide effort that began before the latest Metrolinx controversy: Ontario imposed a hiring freeze on government agencies in September 2025 that it says is projected to avoid almost $300 million in costs. The latest review therefore appears to be an extension of a broader push to reduce administrative growth outside the core Ontario Public Service.</p>
<h2>Metrolinx Says Its Mandate Has Become Far More Complicated</h2>
<p>There is another side to the staffing equation. Modern Metrolinx bears little resemblance to an agency focused primarily on operating GO Transit. Its responsibilities now stretch across regional rail operations, PRESTO, major subway construction, light-rail projects, planning, procurement and one of the largest transit expansion programs underway in North America. Ontario says it is investing nearly $70 billion in public transit expansion across the province.</p>
<p>The project list provides some perspective. The 15.6-kilometre Ontario Line is planned with 15 stations through Toronto. The Scarborough Subway Extension will add 7.8 kilometres and three stations to Line 2, while the Yonge North Subway Extension is expected to carry Line 1 nearly eight kilometres farther north with five stations. GO Expansion adds another massive operational and construction challenge. Lindsay has said the organization had to expand quickly to obtain the specialized expertise needed for procurement and project delivery. That does not settle whether 2,438 managers and executives are necessary, but it does explain why simply comparing Metrolinx with a conventional transit operator can be misleading.</p>
<h2>Metrolinx Has Been Cutting Consultants and Bringing Expertise Inside</h2>
<p>One of Lindsay’s major changes since taking control of Metrolinx has been an attempt to reduce reliance on outside consultants. Global News reported in March that more than 400 full-time and part-time consulting contracts had ended during his first year leading the organization. Metrolinx later said changes involving third-party contractors had produced approximately $100 million in savings. Some consulting agreements naturally ended as major projects advanced, while others were deliberately eliminated.</p>
<p>There is a wrinkle, however. Some former consultants have subsequently become permanent Metrolinx employees, including people entering senior leadership positions. Lindsay has argued that converting external expertise into permanent internal capability gives the region more durable knowledge and reduces fragmentation. That strategy may make financial and operational sense if expensive consulting invoices disappear in exchange for lower long-term internal costs. Yet it can also make Metrolinx’s internal management ranks appear larger. The government review will therefore need to distinguish between genuine administrative expansion and positions that may have replaced work previously hidden inside consulting contracts.</p>
<h2>Rising Project Costs Have Made the Staffing Question Harder to Ignore</h2>
<p>Management numbers would likely attract less attention if Metrolinx’s major projects were consistently arriving on schedule and close to their original budgets. Instead, the latest financial disclosures have intensified questions about oversight. Metrolinx reported more than $500 million in signal-system upgrades around Union Station that are being written off because much of the work is incompatible with the redesigned infrastructure required for GO Expansion. Total capital-asset writeoffs reported for the year reached approximately $567 million.</p>
<p>Another number landed just as the government review was beginning. On August 11, Lindsay confirmed that the Ontario Line has reached an estimated cost of about $34 billion. When the Ford government announced the project in 2019, its estimated cost was $10.9 billion. Lindsay noted that the economic environment has changed dramatically, pointing to supply-chain disruptions and trade uncertainty, and the final Ontario Line cost is not yet fixed. Rising construction prices do not automatically indicate management failure, but billion-dollar increases inevitably intensify scrutiny of the organization overseeing procurement and delivery.</p>
<h2>Executive Salaries Have Added Fuel to the Political Debate</h2>
<p>Metrolinx’s management structure has attracted particular attention because many senior positions carry substantial compensation. Ontario’s 2025 public-sector salary disclosures showed 124 Metrolinx employees with “vice-president” somewhere in their title. Global News calculated that their average salary was approximately $248,000, up from about $243,000 in 2024 and $237,000 in 2023. The figure drew criticism from the Ontario NDP and helped turn what might otherwise have been an internal organizational matter into a broader taxpayer debate.</p>
<p>The vice-president count should not be confused with Metrolinx’s separate annual-report classification of 135 executives, since the two datasets use different definitions. Still, both point toward a sizable senior leadership structure. Metrolinx has argued that its vice-presidential ranks include specialized leaders responsible for individual projects and technical disciplines rather than an army of interchangeable administrators. That distinction matters. A vice-president overseeing a multibillion-dollar subway contract may carry responsibilities unlike those associated with a traditional corporate department. The government review will ultimately have to assess roles and responsibilities, rather than judging efficiency from job titles alone.</p>
<h2>The Review Will Test Whether Metrolinx Can Become Leaner Without Losing Expertise</h2>
<p>Ontario has already signalled the philosophy behind its review. The province says it has shifted the core Ontario Public Service from a roughly 50:50 front-office-to-back-office staffing ratio in 2019-20 to approximately 60:40 in 2025-26. It now wants to apply similar cost discipline to agencies, boards and commissions, which the government says have grown faster than the core public service. Metrolinx’s management structure places it squarely within that debate.</p>
<p>What happens next will depend on whether reviewers find duplicated leadership, unnecessary layers of approval or administrative positions that can be consolidated without affecting transit delivery. There is also a risk in cutting indiscriminately. Losing engineers, procurement specialists or experienced project managers could eventually cost taxpayers more if projects are delayed or the organization becomes dependent on consultants again. The central question is therefore more complicated than whether 2,438 managers and executives sounds excessive. Queen’s Park must determine whether those positions are producing faster decisions, better construction oversight and reliable transit—or whether too much money and authority have accumulated between frontline operations and the people ultimately accountable for results.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/GO-Transit-train.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/rcmp-tests-ai-satellites-to-watch-canadas-border-in-near-real-time/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[RCMP Tests AI Satellites to Watch Canada’s Border in Near Real Time]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 11:24:17 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/rcmp-tests-ai-satellites-to-watch-canadas-border-in-near-real-time/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s border may soon be watched from hundreds of kilometres above Earth, with artificial intelligence helping Mounties decide where to]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s border may soon be watched from hundreds of kilometres above Earth, with artificial intelligence helping Mounties decide where to look more closely. The RCMP is participating in a federal research project that combines commercial satellite imagery, automated change detection and geospatial tools to produce near-real-time alerts about activity along the border.</p>
<p>The $2.23-million initiative, led by Vancouver-based EarthDaily Analytics for Defence Research and Development Canada, is called Space-based Monitoring, Alerts and Tactical Awareness Knowledge, or SMATAK. Its goal is not to replace officers with algorithms or create a continuous live feed of the country’s perimeter. Instead, the project is testing whether daily satellite observations can help analysts and field personnel spot potentially important changes faster, especially in remote areas where traditional patrols and fixed sensors face obvious limits.</p>
<h2>A $2.23-Million Test, Not a Full Deployment</h2>
<p>The new system is best understood as a controlled technology trial rather than a nationwide operational rollout. Federal procurement records show that Defence Research and Development Canada awarded EarthDaily Analytics a contract valued at $2,232,852.16 for SMATAK, with the work scheduled to run through March 31, 2027. The stated objective is unusually specific: develop and simulate interfaces that can deliver AI-powered, near-real-time border intelligence derived from daily satellite imagery directly to RCMP personnel.</p>
<p>That distinction matters. The project is designed to test whether the technology is useful enough, accurate enough and practical enough to support real policing workflows. EarthDaily says the work will culminate in a final end-to-end demonstration in 2027, followed by technical recommendations and a feasibility assessment. Only after that evaluation would the RCMP be in a position to consider what, if anything, should be procured or deployed more broadly along Canada’s border in future operational use nationwide.</p>
<h2>How the Satellite-to-Officer System Would Work</h2>
<p>SMATAK is being built as a chain that turns imagery into information an officer could actually use. EarthDaily says the pilot will combine daily satellite data with AI-powered change detection, an analyst Alert Centre, ArcGIS mapping tools and the Tactical Awareness Kit ecosystem. The purpose is to identify changes or activities of interest, then communicate those findings through near-real-time alerts rather than leaving analysts to manually inspect enormous volumes of imagery.</p>
<p>The phrase “near real time” is important. This is not described as a live video stream from space. The underlying system relies on daily Earth-observation imagery, which is processed and compared so that potentially meaningful changes can be surfaced quickly after collection. CanadaBuys says the interfaces are intended for RCMP users at national, regional, analytical and field levels. In practice, the value would come from shortening the path between a satellite observation, analyst assessment and a possible ground response.</p>
<h2>Why Space-Based Monitoring Fits Canada’s Border</h2>
<p>The geography explains much of the appeal. The Canada–United States boundary stretches 8,891 kilometres, or 5,525 miles, making it the world’s longest land boundary between two adjoining countries. It crosses forests, farmland, waterways, mountain terrain and remote northern areas, while also touching densely travelled corridors. The International Boundary Commission maintains more than 8,000 monuments and reference points along that line, a reminder of just how physically extensive the border is.</p>
<p>The RCMP’s federal border-integrity role focuses heavily on areas between official ports of entry, where permanent infrastructure cannot cover every kilometre. Satellite monitoring offers a different kind of reach: broad-area observation from above, repeated over time, without requiring a patrol vehicle, aircraft or tower to be physically present at each location. SMATAK is specifically intended to test whether that wider view can help personnel identify and evaluate activity of interest across geographically isolated areas more efficiently across much wider territory.</p>
<h2>Satellites Would Join Drones, Towers and Helicopters</h2>
<p>The RCMP is not starting entirely fresh. Its current border-surveillance mix already includes helicopters, drones and mobile surveillance towers, all monitored through the Border Integrity Operations Centre. The force has said it procured 60 drones for integrated border-enforcement missions, while the Canadian Armed Forces supplied more than 40 additional secured drones. Three chartered Black Hawk helicopters have also been used to address surveillance and response gaps along the Canada–U.S. boundary.</p>
<p>Those aircraft supplement the RCMP’s existing helicopter fleet. The force has reported nine helicopters in total, six of which support border surveillance and are equipped with thermal-imaging sensors. Satellite intelligence would therefore add another layer rather than replace the tools already in the air or on the ground. A satellite alert could potentially help narrow attention to a specific area, while drones, helicopters or officers provide closer observation and response. That layered model supports Ottawa’s push for round-the-clock border awareness.</p>
<h2>AI’s Job Is to Find Changes, Not Make Arrests</h2>
<p>The artificial-intelligence component is primarily about filtering and prioritizing information. EarthDaily describes the pilot as using automated change detection to identify potential changes or activities of interest in repeated satellite observations. Research in Earth observation has shown why this is useful: modern AI systems can compare imagery over time, highlight areas that appear different and reduce the amount of raw data that human analysts must inspect manually.</p>
<p>That does not mean an algorithm will decide that a crime occurred. The project materials repeatedly frame the output as intelligence for analysts and field users, while the RCMP says new operational technologies must be tied to clear policing objectives, assessed for accuracy and subject to human accountability. Its National Technology Onboarding Program gives artificial-intelligence tools high priority for review because of their potential privacy and ethical implications. Here, AI acts like a digital spotter, flagging where humans may need a closer look.</p>
<h2>EarthDaily’s Constellation Is Built for Repeated Change Detection</h2>
<p>EarthDaily’s technology is designed around frequent, consistent observation rather than occasional one-off images. As of August 2026, the company’s public constellation tracker listed eight active satellites within a planned 10-satellite system. EarthDaily markets the network around daily global observation and change detection, with imagery processed into analysis-ready data so software can compare the same locations repeatedly instead of treating every image as an isolated snapshot.</p>
<p>That consistency matters for automated monitoring. A system looking for meaningful changes must distinguish a new road, vehicle pattern or disturbed area from differences caused by viewing angle, atmosphere or ordinary seasonal variation. EarthDaily says its platform is built to reduce that noise and produce AI-ready information more quickly. SMATAK does not depend solely on one satellite pass or one sensor reading; its concept is to combine repeated Earth-observation data with automated analysis and familiar geospatial tools, then deliver the resulting intelligence into RCMP workflows.</p>
<h2>Privacy and Oversight Will Be Part of the Conversation</h2>
<p>Any expansion of AI-enabled police surveillance is likely to draw scrutiny over privacy, proportionality and accountability, even when the sensors are observing broad geographic areas rather than reading private messages. The RCMP has already created a formal process for reviewing emerging operational technologies. Its National Technology Onboarding Program was established in 2021 after the federal privacy commissioner’s investigation into the force’s use of Clearview AI facial-recognition technology found problems with the collection of personal information.</p>
<p>The RCMP now says technologies involving artificial intelligence or intrusive privacy implications receive the highest priority for review. Its framework calls for lawful data collection, privacy analysis, accuracy safeguards, defined operational purposes, security controls and regular evaluation. The agency also reported completing 10 privacy impact assessments during the 2024–25 reporting period. None of that predetermines how SMATAK will be assessed, but it shows that a future operational rollout would face governance questions alongside technical ones.</p>
<h2>The Trial Fits a Much Larger Border-Security Buildout</h2>
<p>SMATAK is arriving during a much broader expansion of Canadian border enforcement. Ottawa’s $1.3-billion Border Plan has funded additional personnel, technology, intelligence sharing and equipment aimed at cross-border crime, drug trafficking and irregular migration. The federal government says approximately 10,000 frontline personnel are now involved in border protection, while newer capabilities include Black Hawk helicopters, drones, counter-drone technology and mobile surveillance towers.</p>
<p>The government has also committed to hiring 1,000 additional RCMP personnel and 1,000 new CBSA officers as part of its security buildup. Against that backdrop, a $2.23-million satellite demonstration is relatively small financially, but potentially significant operationally. It tests whether a national-scale information layer can help all those people and assets work more selectively. Instead of increasing patrols everywhere, the concept is to use automated observation to identify where attention may be needed, then direct existing resources toward the most relevant locations and emerging patterns much more quickly.</p>
<h2>What Happens Before Any Wider Rollout</h2>
<p>The decisive stage comes in 2027. EarthDaily says SMATAK will conclude with a final end-to-end demonstration, after which the company will provide technical recommendations and a feasibility assessment. CanadaBuys lists the contract expiry as March 31, 2027. Those deliverables are meant to help the RCMP judge whether satellite-derived alerts can reliably complement the information sources officers already use and whether the technology fits national, regional, analytical and field operations.</p>
<p>That leaves several questions unanswered for now, including how accurate alerts will be in real conditions, how often false positives occur, what data would be retained and what a permanent system might cost. The current contract does not establish a nationwide deployment. It establishes a test. If the demonstration proves useful, the RCMP could then consider future procurement or operational strategies. For now, Canada is evaluating whether space-based AI can turn a vast border into a manageable stream of actionable information.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/The-First-Nation-To-Launch-a-Domestic-Geostationary-Communications-Satellite.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/57000-canadians-sign-petition-to-kick-trumps-ambassador-out-of-canada/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[57,000 Canadians Sign Petition to Kick Trump’s Ambassador Out of Canada]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 11:14:26 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/57000-canadians-sign-petition-to-kick-trumps-ambassador-out-of-canada/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[More than 57,000 people have now put their names behind an extraordinary demand: Canada should formally declare U.S. Ambassador Pete]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>More than 57,000 people have now put their names behind an extraordinary demand: Canada should formally declare U.S. Ambassador Pete Hoekstra persona non grata and ask Washington to remove him.</p>
<p>The House of Commons e-petition has transformed from a political protest into a fast-growing diplomatic controversy. It comes after months of friction over Donald Trump’s “51st state” rhetoric, tariffs, Canadian sovereignty and allegations surrounding American contacts with Alberta separatists. Prime Minister Mark Carney has previously rejected calls to expel Hoekstra, arguing that Ottawa must continue dealing with the Trump administration. But with the petition’s validated signature count surging past 57,000, the pressure is becoming harder for Ottawa to dismiss as a fringe complaint.</p>
<h2>The Signature Count Exploded in a Day</h2>
<p>The scale and speed of the petition’s growth are striking. House of Commons petition e-7531 showed 57,070 validated signatures as of August 12, with the total still capable of rising because the petition remains open until November 18. Canadian Press had reported only a day earlier that more than 29,000 people had signed. By Wednesday morning, the figure had already climbed beyond 56,000 before crossing 57,000 on Parliament’s website.</p>
<p>The support is also geographically broad. Ontario accounts for 23,755 signatures, followed by British Columbia with 11,901, Alberta with 6,378 and Quebec with 5,242. Every province and territory is represented, including 98 signatures from Yukon, 78 from the Northwest Territories and 11 from Nunavut. House rules require signatures to be validated before they are added to the published total. Eligible signatories must be Canadian citizens or residents of Canada, meaning the counter is more rigorous than the unverified click totals sometimes associated with informal online campaigns.</p>
<h2>The Petition Goes Far Beyond a Symbolic Rebuke</h2>
<p>The petition, initiated by Calgary resident Leanne Walker, makes three explicit demands. First, it asks the federal government to declare Hoekstra persona non grata and request his removal as U.S. ambassador. Second, it wants Ottawa to raise what the petition describes as a pattern of conduct inconsistent with the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations. Third, it calls for a parliamentary committee to examine possible U.S. diplomatic interference in Canadian domestic affairs.</p>
<p>Green Party Leader Elizabeth May is the MP attached to the petition and is expected to present it in Parliament. That does not necessarily mean May endorses every allegation it contains: House of Commons rules explicitly state that an MP can authorize or present a petition without endorsing its contents. Still, the language represents a significant escalation from an earlier parliamentary petition concerning Hoekstra. That previous effort asked Ottawa to review his conduct and consider diplomatic measures, including seeking his recall. It ultimately collected 27,119 signatures before closing on June 25. The new petition has already attracted more than twice as many.</p>
<h2>Hoekstra Arrived Promising Respect for Canadian Sovereignty</h2>
<p>The controversy is particularly notable because Hoekstra entered the job sounding considerably more conciliatory. During his March 2025 U.S. Senate confirmation hearing, he was directly asked whether Canada was a sovereign country and whether it should be treated as such. He answered affirmatively and emphasized the long history of cooperation between the two countries. The Senate confirmed him the following month by a 60-37 vote.</p>
<p>Hoekstra was hardly new to politics or diplomacy. He previously represented Michigan in the U.S. House of Representatives and served as Trump’s ambassador to the Netherlands during the president’s first administration. Yet his Canadian posting quickly became unusually combative. By September 2025, he was publicly expressing frustration over what he considered anti-American rhetoric in Canada. Speaking in Halifax, he criticized the “elbows up” political mood surrounding the 2025 federal campaign and objected to Canadian politicians describing Washington’s tariff campaign as a trade war. Those remarks helped turn an ambassador who was supposed to manage an unusually sensitive relationship into part of the political dispute himself.</p>
<h2>The 51st-State Rhetoric Became the Breaking Point</h2>
<p>Nothing has fuelled that dispute more consistently than Trump’s repeated references to Canada becoming an American state. The remarks have been rejected across Canada’s political spectrum, but Hoekstra’s handling of them has repeatedly drawn attention. Rather than consistently distancing himself from the rhetoric, he has at times questioned why Canadians remain so upset about it and has defended his responsibility to communicate the president’s position.</p>
<p>The issue flared again in June when Trump posted another reference to Canada as the “51st state.” Hoekstra amplified the president’s message through his official social-media account, prompting reporters to ask Carney whether the ambassador should be asked to leave. Earlier in the summer, Hoekstra also said the possibility of Canadian annexation would make for a “great discussion” between Trump and Carney. The current petition specifically cites his treatment of the 51st-state language as one of the reasons Ottawa should act. For many Canadians signing it, the dispute is therefore less about diplomatic etiquette than about whether rhetoric questioning Canadian sovereignty should carry consequences.</p>
<h2>Alberta Separatism Raises the Stakes</h2>
<p>The most serious allegations in the petition concern Alberta separatism. Its organizers cite contacts between U.S. officials and Canadian separatist groups and ask Parliament to investigate whether those contacts crossed the line from ordinary diplomatic engagement into interference in Canadian domestic politics. The petition specifically points to reports involving the Alberta Prosperity Project and a voter-identification platform used by the separatist-linked Centurion Project.</p>
<p>Some underlying events have been independently reported, but the petition’s conclusions remain allegations rather than established findings. Reuters reported in January that U.S. State Department officials had held three meetings with the Alberta Prosperity Project, which has advocated a referendum on Alberta independence. Carney responded by saying he expected the Trump administration to respect Canadian sovereignty. Hoekstra later rejected suggestions that Washington was strategizing with Alberta separatists, telling Global News that the administration was not working with them on separation. That disagreement is precisely why the petition’s demand for parliamentary scrutiny could become politically significant: rather than asking Canadians to accept either side’s characterization, it calls for elected officials to investigate what contacts occurred and what they involved.</p>
<h2>Carney Has Already Chosen Engagement Over Expulsion</h2>
<p>The biggest obstacle facing the petition is that Carney has already rejected the basic remedy it proposes. When asked in June whether Canada should expel Hoekstra after the ambassador amplified Trump’s latest 51st-state message, Carney said no. His explanation was pragmatic: regardless of the rhetoric coming from Washington, the United States remains Canada’s most important economic and security relationship, and his government has to work with the administration Americans elected.</p>
<p>That calculation is easy to understand from the numbers. Global Affairs Canada says nearly C$3.6 billion worth of goods and services crossed the Canada-U.S. border every day in 2024. Supply chains in automobiles, energy, agriculture and manufacturing operate across the boundary, while the countries cooperate on NORAD, NATO, border enforcement and intelligence. Expelling the president’s ambassador in the middle of tariff and CUSMA disputes would therefore be more than a symbolic rebuke. It could trigger retaliation or make already difficult negotiations harder. Petition supporters, however, are effectively arguing that economic dependence cannot mean accepting unlimited diplomatic provocation without a response.</p>
<h2>What Persona Non Grata Would Actually Mean</h2>
<p>Declaring Hoekstra persona non grata would be a serious diplomatic measure, but it is firmly established in international law. Article 9 of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations allows a receiving country to notify another government that the head or another member of its diplomatic mission is no longer acceptable. The receiving state does not have to provide a reason. The sending country is then expected to recall that diplomat or terminate the person’s diplomatic functions.</p>
<p>Canada has used comparable tools before when relations with foreign governments deteriorated. In May 2023, Ottawa formally declared Chinese diplomat Zhao Wei persona non grata after accusing him of interference in Canadian politics. In October 2024, Canada served expulsion notices on six Indian diplomats and consular officials following an RCMP investigation into alleged violent criminal activity linked to agents of the Indian government. Those situations involved national-security allegations different from the dispute surrounding Hoekstra, so they are not direct precedents. They nevertheless demonstrate that asking a foreign diplomat to leave is a real power available to Ottawa rather than merely rhetorical language contained in a petition.</p>
<h2>The Petition Can Force an Answer, Not an Expulsion</h2>
<p>Even 57,000 signatures do not compel the government to remove an ambassador. Canada’s parliamentary petition system is a mechanism for putting an issue formally before the government, not a referendum whose result becomes binding policy. An electronic petition requires only 500 valid signatures to qualify for certification after its signing period closes. Petition e-7531 has exceeded that requirement more than one hundred times over.</p>
<p>Once a certified petition is presented to the House of Commons, however, the government cannot simply ignore it procedurally. House rules require a formal government response within 45 calendar days of presentation. That means Ottawa will eventually have to state its position on the request and explain, at least politically, whether it believes further action concerning Hoekstra is warranted. The petition remains open until November 18, so its final total could be substantially higher than 57,000. It is also important not to mistake signatures for a scientific measurement of public opinion. Petition signers are self-selected. What the total demonstrates is intensity and mobilization around the issue, not that 57,000 signatures automatically represent the views of Canada as a whole.</p>
<h2>The Anger Reflects a Much Broader Collapse in Trust</h2>
<p>The petition nevertheless fits into a much wider deterioration in Canadian attitudes toward the United States. Pew Research Center surveyed more than 42,000 people across 36 countries between February and May 2026 and found a remarkable change in Canada. In 2022, 83% of Canadians surveyed described the United States as a reliable partner. In 2026, only 35% did. That shift is far larger than anything that can be explained by one ambassador.</p>
<p>Hoekstra has argued that part of his job is to present Trump’s views and has criticized what he regards as excessive anti-American rhetoric in Canada. The U.S. Embassy told Canadian Press it was aware of the new petition but declined additional comment. For Ottawa, the challenge is therefore bigger than deciding what to do with one diplomat. Canada must simultaneously protect a vast economic relationship, negotiate with a confrontational administration and reassure a public increasingly sensitive to perceived attacks on sovereignty. Whether Hoekstra remains in Ottawa or not, 57,000 signatures have turned that tension into a formal question the federal government will eventually have to answer.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/foreign-investment.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadian-building-permits-suddenly-surge-18-5-crushing-expectations/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadian Building Permits Suddenly Surge 18.5%, Crushing Expectations]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 11:12:45 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadian-building-permits-suddenly-surge-18-5-crushing-expectations/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s construction pipeline just delivered one of the biggest economic surprises of the summer. The total value of building permits]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s construction pipeline just delivered one of the biggest economic surprises of the summer. The total value of building permits issued across the country jumped 18.5% in June 2026 to $14.9 billion, dramatically stronger than the roughly 0.8% increase markets had been expecting.</p>
<p>The headline suggests builders suddenly became far more optimistic, but the details tell a more complicated story. A huge increase in institutional projects—particularly in Ontario—powered much of the gain, while residential permits also moved meaningfully higher. The result offers a potentially encouraging signal for future construction after two weaker months, yet permits measure intentions rather than shovels actually entering the ground. Against a backdrop of softer housing starts and difficult development economics, June’s surge is significant precisely because it reveals both the strength and the limitations of Canada’s construction pipeline.</p>
<h2>The 18.5% Jump Was Far Beyond What Markets Expected</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada reported that the total value of building permits issued in June climbed by approximately $2.3 billion from the previous month, reaching $14.9 billion. The 18.5% month-over-month increase easily surpassed the roughly 0.8% market forecast reported ahead of the release. In practical terms, the increase was more than 20 times the expected percentage gain. It also pushed the monthly value of permits to its highest level in more than two years.</p>
<p>The rebound looks particularly striking because it followed weakness in the spring. Statistics Canada said June’s $2.3-billion increase more than offset the dollar-value declines recorded in both April and May. Even after adjusting for changes in construction prices, the improvement remained substantial: the constant-dollar value of permits rose 18.0% from May and was 18.6% higher than a year earlier. That matters because it indicates the surge cannot simply be dismissed as construction inflation making otherwise ordinary projects appear more expensive.</p>
<h2>Non-Residential Construction Did Most of the Heavy Lifting</h2>
<p>Anyone interpreting the 18.5% increase as evidence of an immediate housing-building explosion would miss the biggest part of the story. Non-residential permits accounted for approximately $1.8 billion of the $2.3-billion monthly increase, bringing their total value to $6.8 billion. Residential permits contributed a much smaller—but still significant—$479.7 million.</p>
<p>The difference is important because non-residential permits cover projects such as hospitals, factories, warehouses, offices and other commercial or institutional buildings. A handful of very large developments can therefore have an outsized influence on the national number. June provides a clear example. Institutional permits alone increased by about $1.5 billion to $3.2 billion, explaining the majority of the non-residential surge. Industrial permits added another $268.8 million, while commercial permits increased by $67.9 million. Rather than one uniform construction boom stretching across every part of the economy, June represented a powerful combination of large institutional projects and more moderate gains elsewhere.</p>
<h2>A Major Ontario Medical Project Helped Supercharge the Numbers</h2>
<p>The institutional category was the standout performer, and Ontario was at the centre of it. Institutional building permits increased by approximately $1.5 billion nationally in June, reaching $3.2 billion. Ontario alone contributed roughly $1.3 billion of that increase, with Statistics Canada identifying a large medical development in the Toronto census metropolitan area as an important driver.</p>
<p>That single example demonstrates why monthly permit data can move so dramatically. Hospitals and major medical facilities are extraordinarily expensive projects, meaning one large permit can shift an entire province’s construction statistics. Quebec also contributed to June’s institutional increase, adding about $238.7 million. The strength extended beyond hospitals: industrial permit values rose $268.8 million to approximately $1.2 billion. Saskatchewan accounted for a $189.5-million increase in that category, while Ontario added another $104.2 million. Commercial permits reached roughly $2.4 billion after increasing $67.9 million, with gains recorded across seven provinces. Ontario again made the largest contribution, adding about $106 million.</p>
<h2>Residential Permits Quietly Posted a Strong Month Too</h2>
<p>The spectacular non-residential numbers risk overshadowing an encouraging development for Canada’s housing pipeline. Residential construction intentions increased by $479.7 million, or 6.3%, in June to approximately $8.1 billion. Both major residential categories moved higher rather than one simply compensating for weakness in the other.</p>
<p>Multi-unit residential permits—including apartments, condominiums and other multi-family developments—rose by approximately $283.7 million to $5.3 billion. Single-family permits increased another $196 million, reaching roughly $2.8 billion. That balance makes the residential portion of the report more noteworthy than a headline driven entirely by one giant condominium development would have been. Multi-unit projects still represent substantially more permit value than single-family construction, reflecting the increasingly important role of denser housing in Canada’s construction pipeline. Yet the simultaneous increase in single-family permits suggests June’s improvement was not confined entirely to large urban towers. For developers, contractors and building-material suppliers, that broader residential advance provides a more constructive signal than the national headline alone reveals.</p>
<h2>Quebec and Alberta Emerged as Residential Bright Spots</h2>
<p>The residential gains were not evenly distributed across the country. Quebec produced the biggest dollar increase in multi-unit permits, adding approximately $201.3 million in June. Alberta followed with a $143.4-million increase, while Saskatchewan contributed another $61.4 million. These numbers show that the month’s residential strength extended beyond Canada’s traditionally dominant Toronto and Vancouver development markets.</p>
<p>Alberta was particularly notable when single-family housing was considered. Single-family permit values there increased by approximately $110.8 million, the strongest provincial contribution in that category. Quebec added another $85.4 million. British Columbia moved in the opposite direction, recording a decline of about $30.8 million in single-family permit value. The geographical split is consistent with the increasingly uneven nature of Canadian housing activity: some Prairie and Quebec markets continue to generate new construction intentions even as development conditions remain more difficult elsewhere. It also shows why a national percentage can obscure important local differences. Canada may have recorded an 18.5% overall jump, but builders in Calgary, Montreal, Vancouver and Toronto are operating in very different market environments.</p>
<h2>The Quarterly Numbers Suggest June Was More Than a Tiny Bounce</h2>
<p>Looking beyond a single month helps put the surprise into perspective. During the second quarter of 2026, the total value of building permits issued in Canada increased by approximately $1.4 billion from the first quarter, reaching $40.4 billion. That represented quarter-over-quarter growth of 3.7%.</p>
<p>June therefore did more than merely produce an eye-catching monthly percentage. Its $14.9-billion permit total helped turn what had been a softer spring into a positive quarter overall. The pattern remains volatile: Canada recorded substantial monthly movements in both directions earlier in 2026, demonstrating how quickly large developments can alter the national figures. Still, the constant-dollar data strengthen the case that June represented genuine improvement. After adjusting for price changes, permit values were 18.0% higher than in May and 18.6% above their year-earlier level. For economists watching construction as a forward-looking component of economic activity, the quarterly increase provides somewhat firmer evidence than the 18.5% monthly jump viewed entirely on its own.</p>
<h2>Permits Are Rising While Actual Housing Starts Remain Under Pressure</h2>
<p>There is one major reason to resist declaring a Canadian construction boom: obtaining a building permit and beginning construction are different stages of the development process. Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation reported that the seasonally adjusted annual rate of housing starts fell 6% in June to 238,971 units, down from 253,083 in May. Actual starts in population centres of 10,000 or more were also 13% lower than in June 2025.</p>
<p>Even more revealing is the number of homes already approved but waiting to begin construction. CMHC counted 137,324 units with approved building permits that had not yet started in centres with at least 50,000 people in June. Ontario alone accounted for 29,595 of those units, while British Columbia had 40,866 and Quebec had 33,376. Developers can have municipal permission and still delay construction because financing is expensive, presales are insufficient, costs have risen or expected returns no longer justify immediately proceeding. June’s permit surge therefore expands the potential construction pipeline, but converting that pipeline into finished homes remains the harder challenge.</p>
<h2>Building-Permit Data Can Swing Sharply From Month to Month</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada designed the Building Permits Survey to measure construction intentions, not completed buildings. The survey covers municipalities across Canada and historically has represented roughly 95% of the national population. That makes it an important early indicator because a permit generally appears before construction activity is captured in later investment, starts and completion data.</p>
<p>Its forward-looking nature also makes the numbers inherently noisy. One hospital, apartment complex, factory or office development worth hundreds of millions of dollars can substantially change a province’s monthly result. Statistics agencies and housing analysts therefore tend to look beyond one month when identifying genuine trends. CMHC makes a similar point about housing starts, noting that multi-unit construction can produce significant monthly swings and that trend measures help provide a clearer picture. The distinction matters in June: an 18.5% national permit increase is economically meaningful, but it should not be interpreted as construction activity itself suddenly rising by 18.5%. The permits represent projects developers and institutions intend to build.</p>
<h2>The Next Data Will Show Whether June Was a Turning Point</h2>
<p>June has unquestionably improved the near-term picture for Canadian construction intentions. Permit values reached $14.9 billion, residential intentions rose 6.3%, both single-family and multi-unit permits increased, and the second quarter finished 3.7% ahead of the first. For a country struggling to expand housing and infrastructure supply, those are encouraging signals.</p>
<p>The tougher test now is whether the strength survives beyond one unusually powerful institutional month. CMHC has warned that uncertainty, high development costs, weaker housing demand and unsold inventory are weighing on actual new-home construction. Its July housing-start figures are scheduled for August 18, offering an earlier indication of whether physical construction activity is stabilizing. Statistics Canada is scheduled to release July building-permit data on September 16. If residential permits remain strong and starts begin following them higher, June could eventually look like an early turning point. If permits fall sharply once the large institutional projects disappear from the comparison, the 18.5% surge will instead serve as another reminder of how volatile Canada’s construction pipeline can be.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Construction-Costs-Rising-Due-to-Market-Imbalance.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/trumps-50-tariff-could-wipe-out-half-the-revenue-of-thousands-of-canadian-exporters/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Trump’s 50% Tariff Could Wipe Out Half the Revenue of Thousands of Canadian Exporters]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 26 10:59:02 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/trumps-50-tariff-could-wipe-out-half-the-revenue-of-thousands-of-canadian-exporters/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For thousands of Canadian businesses, the next major shock in the trade war may be only days away. President Donald]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For thousands of Canadian businesses, the next major shock in the trade war may be only days away. President Donald Trump’s administration is preparing to impose 50% tariffs on roughly US$20 billion worth of Canadian goods on August 19, reaching products that have continued to move tariff-free under CUSMA.</p>
<p>A new Canadian Federation of Independent Business study suggests the consequences could be severe. Among exporters selling products covered by the tariffs, 77% expect revenue losses and 35% believe their revenues could fall by at least half. The risk is particularly significant for smaller companies that built their businesses around easy access to the U.S. market and have few realistic alternatives that can replace American customers quickly.</p>
<h2>A 50% Tariff Is Set to Hit on August 19</h2>
<p>The Trump administration announced the new duties through three proclamations using Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930. Unlike earlier measures that left most CUSMA-compliant Canadian products protected, these tariffs are designed to apply even when affected goods satisfy the North American trade agreement’s rules. The U.S. Trade Representative estimates that nearly US$20 billion of Canadian imports are covered, equivalent to roughly 5.2% of the US$383 billion in goods the United States imported from Canada in 2025.</p>
<p>That percentage can make the measure look relatively contained at the national level, but it hides how concentrated the damage could become. The affected lists stretch across dairy products, alcoholic beverages, electronics, furniture, building materials, plastics, apparel, machinery, sporting goods and agricultural products. Wine, hockey sticks and cement are among the examples highlighted by the White House. Energy, potash, fish, critical minerals and goods already covered by certain Section 232 tariffs are excluded. For an individual company whose main product appears on the list, however, the national exemptions offer little comfort.</p>
<h2>More Than One-Third of Exposed Exporters Fear Their Revenue Could Be Cut in Half</h2>
<p>The clearest warning comes from a CFIB study conducted between July 28 and August 6. The organization collected responses from 1,833 owners of independent Canadian businesses across regions and industries. Among exporters to the United States, 40% reported selling at least one product that would be caught by the incoming 50% tariffs. Of those exposed exporters, 77% expect their businesses to lose revenue if the duties take effect.</p>
<p>The size of the anticipated losses is what makes the findings particularly striking. Thirty-five per cent of businesses with affected exports said their revenues could decline by at least 50%. Another 78% of exporters said the tariff would make their products uncompetitive in the U.S., while 75% said it would push them toward reducing their dependence on American customers. Yet businesses cannot necessarily change markets overnight. CFIB found that 78% of exporters remained in a wait-and-see position as the deadline approached, reflecting the difficulty of making major investment, staffing and supply-chain decisions while negotiations are still underway.</p>
<h2>The Numbers Suggest Thousands of Canadian Companies Could Be at Serious Risk</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada counted 47,948 Canadian enterprises exporting goods in 2025. The United States remains by far the most common destination. There were 41,171 Canadian enterprises exporting goods to the U.S. in 2024, and Statistics Canada reported that the number fell by another 542 in 2025. That puts the latest total at roughly 40,600 businesses. Small and medium-sized firms make up much of that exporter base rather than the landscape being dominated entirely by multinational corporations.</p>
<p>Applying the CFIB findings to the entire exporter population should be treated as an illustration rather than an official forecast, because CFIB surveyed its own membership. But the exercise demonstrates the potential scale. If roughly 40% of 40,600 U.S. exporters were exposed and 35% of that group experienced revenue declines of at least half, the implied number would approach 5,700 companies. The dependence is also deeply entrenched: Statistics Canada found that in 2024 the United States was the only foreign market served by 65.9% of Canadian goods exporters. For many businesses, therefore, losing U.S. orders does not mean simply redirecting a shipment elsewhere.</p>
<h2>This Tariff Reaches Far Beyond Canada’s Biggest Industrial Names</h2>
<p>Trade disputes between Canada and the United States often bring steel mills, aluminum smelters, automakers and oil producers to mind. The August 19 tariffs are different because the covered products reach much deeper into the small-business economy. The White House lists separate measures connected to dairy, alcohol and motor-vehicle-related grievances, but one of the product lists extends across a surprisingly wide collection of industries. It includes items such as telecommunications equipment, furniture, plywood, doors, cement, packaging, clothing, footwear, luggage, toys, sporting goods, machinery, cosmetics, flowers and seeds.</p>
<p>That creates an unusual vulnerability for companies that believed complying with CUSMA gave them a predictable route into the American market. Consider a Canadian manufacturer that has spent years building relationships with U.S. distributors, configuring packaging for American customers and organizing transportation around a nearby border crossing. A European or Asian market may theoretically offer another customer base, but reaching it requires new distributors, certifications, logistics and marketing. Geography itself has been a Canadian competitive advantage in the United States. A sudden 50% tariff can erase much of that advantage before a replacement market can be developed.</p>
<h2>A 50% Tariff Does Not Mean Canada Simply Writes Washington a Cheque</h2>
<p>There is an important distinction behind the alarming revenue projections. U.S. tariffs are collected from the American importer when goods enter the United States. A Canadian exporter does not automatically hand over 50% of its sales revenue to the U.S. government. Instead, the commercial damage occurs through negotiations between buyers and sellers. An American customer may accept some of the additional cost, demand a lower Canadian price, increase its own prices, reduce orders or find a supplier in another country.</p>
<p>Economic research from previous U.S. tariff rounds shows why the outcome can vary substantially. Studies of the 2018–2019 trade war found that American importers and consumers ultimately carried much of the tariff burden through higher prices. More recent research examining the 2025 tariff increases estimated pass-through to U.S. import prices at about 92%. That does not eliminate the threat to Canadian exporters. If an American distributor concludes that a Canadian product has become too expensive, even a tariff technically paid in the United States can translate into cancelled orders north of the border. The CFIB revenue warning is therefore primarily about collapsing sales and competitiveness, not a literal 50% deduction from every Canadian invoice.</p>
<h2>Businesses Are Already Cutting Spending and Delaying Hiring</h2>
<p>The economic effects can begin before a tariff is actually collected. Companies facing an uncertain order book tend to preserve cash, delay expansion and become cautious about adding workers. A separate Canadian small-business study cited by Global News found that 55% of respondents had already cut spending, while 25% had delayed hiring. Roughly one-quarter had raised consumer prices. More than six in 10 of the businesses surveyed reported at least some dependence on the United States, while 13% described the relationship as core to their operations.</p>
<p>Those decisions can spread beyond the exporter itself. A manufacturer receiving fewer American orders may purchase less packaging, transportation, advertising or professional services at home. The Bank of Canada has already incorporated trade disruption into its outlook. Its July Monetary Policy Report said Canadian exports remain on a lower trajectory than before U.S. tariffs were introduced and that business investment remains below the path it would otherwise have followed. The economy has shown signs of improvement, but another tariff shock concentrated among smaller exporters risks interrupting that adjustment just as some firms had begun regaining confidence.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Trying to Diversify, but Replacing the U.S. Takes Time</h2>
<p>Ottawa has made trade diversification one of its central economic objectives, with the federal government targeting a doubling of non-U.S. exports over the next decade and roughly $300 billion in additional trade. Programs are also available to businesses dealing with tariff disruption. Federal support includes the Regional Tariff Response Initiative for small and medium-sized enterprises, the Strategic Response Fund and financing programs aimed at companies affected by tariffs. CanExport SMEs continues to provide funding intended to help eligible businesses develop markets abroad.</p>
<p>There are signs that diversification is occurring. Statistics Canada reported that while the number of enterprises exporting to the United States fell in 2025, the number selling to non-U.S. destinations increased for the first time since 2019, including gains in Africa, the Middle East and Europe. Still, diversification is better understood as a long-term risk-management strategy than an emergency substitute for the American market. Canada shares a border, integrated transportation infrastructure and decades of supply-chain relationships with the world’s largest consumer economy. For a small company accustomed to delivering to Michigan or New York, building comparable business in Europe or Asia can take years rather than weeks.</p>
<h2>The Next Seven Days Could Determine Whether the Damage Materializes</h2>
<p>Canadian officials are still attempting to prevent the tariffs from taking effect. Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc and Chief Trade Negotiator Janice Charette met U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer on August 11, marking LeBlanc’s third round of meetings with U.S. trade officials in three weeks. Negotiations remain active as the August 19 deadline approaches, leaving open the possibility that the measures could be cancelled, reduced or altered before importers actually begin paying them.</p>
<p>Reuters has reported that Canada and the United States have also discussed a potential package of concessions. According to a source familiar with those negotiations, possible Canadian moves have included changes involving tariffs on U.S. automobiles, dairy quota administration and the return of American alcohol to provincial shelves, potentially in exchange for U.S. relief on tariffs affecting Canadian steel and aluminum. No final agreement has been announced. That leaves exporters facing an uncomfortable choice: restructure businesses now for tariffs that could still disappear, or wait and risk being unprepared if a 50% wall suddenly goes up. For companies that depend heavily on U.S. customers, August 19 is becoming less of a trade-policy date and more of a survival deadline.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/shutterstock_2747572821.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/ontario-new-home-sales-surge-130-after-hst-rebate-builders-say/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ontario New-Home Sales Surge 130% After HST Rebate, Builders Say]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Aug 26 12:42:26 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/ontario-new-home-sales-surge-130-after-hst-rebate-builders-say/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Ontario’s new-home market has suddenly found a pulse. Builders say sales across the province jumped 130% year over year in]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ontario’s new-home market has suddenly found a pulse. Builders say sales across the province jumped 130% year over year in the second quarter of 2026, coinciding with the launch of a temporary enhanced HST rebate designed to cut the cost of newly built homes.</p>
<p>The rebound is striking because it follows an exceptionally weak 2025, when affordability pressures and buyer hesitation pushed new-home activity to historic lows in parts of the province. The latest figures suggest tax relief has brought some purchasers back, particularly in the low-rise market. But the recovery is uneven: condominium sales remain deeply depressed, and national housing forecasters still expect Ontario construction to struggle through 2026.</p>
<h2>Ontario’s Q2 Sales Jumped From 3,645 to 8,410</h2>
<p>The headline number is hard to ignore. Data released by the Building Industry and Land Development Association and the Ontario Home Builders’ Association show 8,410 new homes were sold across Ontario in the second quarter of 2026, compared with 3,645 during the same period a year earlier. That works out to roughly a 130% year-over-year increase, a dramatic reversal from 2025’s depressed level.</p>
<p>Industry analysis prepared using BILD, OHBA and Altus Group sales data estimates that 4,765 of those Q2 transactions were incremental sales associated with the HST relief. That distinction matters: the figure is an estimate of the program’s impact, not a count of buyers who individually reported purchasing because of the rebate. Even so, the timing is notable. The enhanced program took effect for qualifying agreements beginning April 1, placing the entire second quarter inside the new incentive window and giving builders a full quarter to measure the response.</p>
<h2>What the HST Rebate Is Worth</h2>
<p>The incentive is unusually large by Canadian housing-tax standards. Under the Ontario Enhanced New Housing Rebate, eligible buyers can recover the full 8% provincial portion of HST on a qualifying new home valued at up to $1 million, with provincial relief capped at $80,000. Ontario also provides additional relief equivalent to as much as the 5% federal portion, bringing total potential relief to as much as $130,000.</p>
<p>For homes priced between $1 million and $1.5 million, the provincial rebate remains a flat $80,000, while the additional top-up can preserve substantial savings depending on eligibility. The temporary measure generally applies to qualifying purchase agreements signed from April 1, 2026, through March 31, 2027. That limited window gives buyers a clear financial reason to move sooner rather than later, especially when six-figure tax relief can materially change the amount that must be financed and the mortgage a household must carry.</p>
<h2>Low-Rise Homes Are Leading the Recovery</h2>
<p>The strongest response has come from buyers shopping for detached houses, semis and townhomes rather than high-rise condos. In the GTA, BILD reported 902 single-family new-home sales in June, 36% above the 10-year average for that month. It was the third consecutive month in which low-rise sales outperformed their historical average after the rebate was introduced.</p>
<p>Price movement has reinforced the effect. BILD said the GTA benchmark price for a new single-family home was $1,275,458 in June, down 15.5% from a year earlier before accounting for any HST rebate. That combination — lower benchmark pricing plus a potentially large tax benefit — created a noticeably different affordability equation than buyers faced a year ago. For a household that had been watching from the sidelines, the gap between “not quite workable” and “possible” can shrink quickly when both the purchase price and tax burden move in the same direction.</p>
<h2>Condos Are Still Deep in a Slump</h2>
<p>The condo side of the market tells a much less celebratory story. BILD reported just 273 new condominium apartment sales in the GTA in June. That was an improvement from June 2025, but it remained 85% below the 10-year average. In May, only 193 condo units sold, leaving that month 89% below its 10-year norm.</p>
<p>Builders and Altus Group point to structural reasons the rebate has not translated as cleanly into high-rise sales. Much of the existing condo inventory was launched under older cost structures, limiting how aggressively projects can reprice. New towers also face longer construction timelines, and industry representatives argue that the rebate’s required start and completion dates are difficult for many high-rise projects to meet. The result is a two-speed recovery: low-rise buyers are responding quickly, while the condo pipeline that normally supplies a large share of Ontario’s future ownership housing remains under pressure and may recover more slowly.</p>
<h2>Builders Point to Jobs and GDP</h2>
<p>Builders are framing the sales rebound as more than a retail story. Industry analysis tied to the Q2 release estimates that the additional activity helped protect about 17,300 construction-related jobs during the first three months of the program, while preserving roughly $2.8 billion in GDP and about $1.4 billion in gross government revenues. Those figures are economic estimates, not observed payroll or tax receipts, but they show why presales matter.</p>
<p>Earlier modelling by Altus Group warned that weak sales could translate into fewer construction starts, lost employment and lower public revenues later in the decade. Its February analysis estimated that a combined package of HST relief and lower development charges could induce 18,000 to 23,000 net new sales per year. The strong Q2 result gives builders evidence that affordability incentives can unlock demand, although it remains too early to know whether the pace will continue after the first wave of buyers acts.</p>
<h2>Why 130% Does Not Mean “Back to Normal”</h2>
<p>A 130% increase can sound like a boom, but the comparison point was exceptionally weak. Ontario recorded only 3,645 new-home sales in Q2 2025, and the GTA spent much of early 2026 recovering from historic monthly lows. Even after the rebate began lifting demand, total GTA new-home sales in June were still 52% below the 10-year average because condo activity remained so soft.</p>
<p>That base effect is essential context. A market can post triple-digit year-over-year growth and still operate below normal levels if the previous year was unusually depressed. The low-rise segment has clearly improved, but the broader market has not fully normalized. CMHC’s summer outlook still expects Ontario to face historically weak housing activity in 2026, with construction especially constrained in the condominium sector. The Q2 surge therefore looks more like a sharp rebound from the floor than proof that Ontario’s housing slowdown has ended or construction has returned to normal.</p>
<h2>Development-Charge Cuts Could Be the Next Catalyst</h2>
<p>The next policy test is development charges. Ontario and Ottawa have also been pushing municipalities to lower fees applied to new construction, which builders say are another major housing cost. In Toronto, the governments announced $1.5 billion in support tied to reducing development charges by roughly 40% to 60%, depending on the housing type and program terms.</p>
<p>That initiative arrived late in the second quarter, meaning builders argue its full effect is not yet visible in the latest provincial sales figures. OHBA chief executive Scott Andison said details of the development-charge program were only beginning to take shape as Q2 ended, with Toronto’s announcement coming June 23. If similar reductions spread to other municipalities, the industry expects another layer of cost relief. Whether those savings translate into lower prices, more project launches or stronger builder margins will be closely watched as projects move from approvals to sales and construction.</p>
<h2>The Rebound Still Faces a Difficult 2026 Outlook</h2>
<p>The rebound does not erase Ontario’s housing risks. CMHC’s July outlook says high borrowing costs, slower population growth, economic uncertainty and weak buyer confidence are still weighing on demand. It expects historically low levels of construction to be especially visible in Ontario and British Columbia, with the condominium market particularly weak. That creates tension between stronger low-rise sales today and the longer-term pipeline of homes still waiting to be financed and built.</p>
<p>There is also a deadline for buyers. The Ontario enhanced rebate is temporary, and eligibility depends on specific conditions rather than simply buying any new property. The Canada Revenue Agency says buyers are responsible for making sure they qualify; if a builder credits a rebate at closing and the buyer is later found ineligible, the amount may have to be repaid. For purchasers, the opportunity is significant, but the paperwork, timing and eligibility rules matter almost as much as the headline savings.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Shift-Toward-Condos-and-Townhomes.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/a-cheaper-canadian-ozempic-alternative-is-nearing-the-market/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[A Cheaper Canadian Ozempic Alternative Is Nearing the Market]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Aug 26 11:16:43 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/a-cheaper-canadian-ozempic-alternative-is-nearing-the-market/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s closely watched semaglutide market has entered a new era. After years in which Novo Nordisk’s Ozempic dominated the conversation]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s closely watched semaglutide market has entered a new era. After years in which Novo Nordisk’s Ozempic dominated the conversation around the medication, Health Canada has begun clearing generic competitors, including one from Canadian-based pharmaceutical company Apotex.</p>
<p>The development matters because semaglutide has become one of the most commercially important medicines in the country, while affordability has remained a major concern for patients and drug plans. What was initially expected to be a future wave of competition has moved quickly: Canada became the first G7 country to approve generic semaglutide in April 2026, Apotex followed days later and launched its version in May. By late June, regulators had also authorized Canada’s first generic semaglutide specifically referencing Wegovy for chronic weight management. The result is a market changing much faster than many patients, insurers and pharmaceutical companies anticipated.</p>
<h2>Canada Became the First G7 Country to Approve Generic Semaglutide</h2>
<p>The turning point arrived on April 28, 2026, when Health Canada authorized a semaglutide injection from Dr. Reddy’s Laboratories as a generic version of Ozempic. The decision made Canada the first G7 country to approve generic semaglutide. At the time, the regulator said another eight generic semaglutide submissions from different companies were already under review, signalling that the first approval was unlikely to remain an isolated event.</p>
<p>Just three days later, the competitive field widened again. On May 1, Health Canada approved a second generic semaglutide injection, this time from Canadian-based Apotex. The initial products were authorized for adults with type 2 diabetes, matching the principal Canadian indication associated with Ozempic. Health Canada emphasized that the submissions underwent regulatory review for safety, efficacy and quality. For a pharmaceutical market accustomed to seeing major drugs remain protected from generic competition for years, two approvals within days represented an unusually rapid shift—and placed Canada at the centre of a much larger global debate over GLP-1 drug prices and competition.</p>
<h2>An Unusual Patent Story Helped Open the Canadian Market</h2>
<p>Canada reached this point earlier than several other major pharmaceutical markets partly because of an unusual intellectual-property history. Novo Nordisk had obtained Canadian patent protection connected to semaglutide, but reporting in The BMJ found that an important patent eventually lapsed after the company stopped paying a required annual maintenance fee. The fee at issue was only a few hundred Canadian dollars, making the episode particularly striking given semaglutide’s enormous commercial value.</p>
<p>That lapse did not immediately allow generic competitors onto Canadian shelves. A separate period of regulatory data protection continued to prevent generic submissions from moving forward until early 2026. Once the remaining protection expired, manufacturers that had spent years developing semaglutide alternatives suddenly had a clearer path to authorization. The result placed Canada ahead of markets where Novo Nordisk’s intellectual-property protections remain in force considerably longer. What might otherwise have been a routine patent-administration issue became a consequential pharmaceutical-market event, opening a major developed economy to generic semaglutide competition years earlier than many observers once expected.</p>
<h2>Apotex Quickly Turned Its Approval Into a Commercial Launch</h2>
<p>Apotex’s approval attracted particular attention because the company is Canadian-based and one of the country’s best-known generic pharmaceutical manufacturers. Health Canada authorized its Apo-Semaglutide Injection on May 1. Regulatory records subsequently listed May 14, 2026, as the product’s original market date, and Apotex announced the commercial launch that same day. That means the cheaper Canadian alternative described as “nearing the market” earlier in the year has, by August, already crossed that threshold.</p>
<p>The speed of the rollout illustrates how prepared generic manufacturers were for the opening of Canada’s semaglutide market. Apotex was not starting development after the patent situation changed; it was positioned to move once the regulatory barriers disappeared. Dr. Reddy’s was similarly ready, securing Canada’s first generic approval days before Apotex. For pharmacies, insurers and public drug programs, this creates something that did not exist at the start of 2026: multiple authorized manufacturers competing around one of the most prominent prescription medicines of the decade. More competition could become increasingly important as additional submissions work their way through Health Canada.</p>
<h2>“Generic” Does Not Mean an Unreviewed Copy</h2>
<p>The word “generic” can sometimes give the impression that a medicine is simply a cheaper imitation, but Canada’s regulatory definition is much stricter. Health Canada requires a generic medicine to contain the same medicinal ingredient in the same amount and a similar dosage form as its Canadian reference product. Manufacturers must also provide evidence demonstrating that differences in non-medicinal ingredients or manufacturing do not compromise the product’s safety, effectiveness or quality.</p>
<p>Health Canada describes approved generic drugs as pharmaceutically equivalent to their reference products and requires evidence supporting bioequivalence where applicable. That regulatory process is important in the semaglutide market because these are considerably more complex products than many familiar generic tablets. Health Canada specifically described generic semaglutide injections as complex synthetic products and said its review is designed to establish that manufacturing differences do not produce clinically meaningful differences in quality, safety or efficacy. The regulator also continues monitoring approved products after authorization, just as it does with other prescription medicines sold in Canada.</p>
<h2>Lower Costs Could Become the Biggest Consequence</h2>
<p>The most closely watched effect of generic competition is not the name printed on the package but what happens to spending. Health Canada says many generic medicines in Canada eventually cost 45% to 90% less than their brand-name counterparts. The actual reduction for any particular medicine depends on factors including the number of competitors, provincial reimbursement systems, negotiated agreements and the way the product is distributed.</p>
<p>Canada also uses a pan-Canadian tiered pricing framework under which generic drug pricing can change as market competition increases. That makes the growing list of semaglutide manufacturers especially significant. Instead of one company competing mainly against other patented GLP-1 medicines, several manufacturers may increasingly compete around the same medicinal ingredient. For someone who requires long-term prescription treatment, even modest reductions can become meaningful when accumulated over months or years. Public and private drug plans have similar incentives: a widely prescribed medicine becoming less expensive can produce savings far beyond those associated with a niche generic. The eventual financial impact will depend on competition, coverage decisions and how quickly additional products actually reach the market.</p>
<h2>The Story Is Bigger Than Weight-Loss Headlines</h2>
<p>Much of semaglutide’s public profile has been built around the extraordinary interest in GLP-1 medicines for weight management. However, the first Canadian generic Ozempic equivalents approved in April and May were authorized for adults with type 2 diabetes. That distinction matters. Diabetes is already one of Canada’s most common chronic diseases, with federal public-health data estimating that approximately 3.9 million people in the country live with diagnosed diabetes.</p>
<p>More recent surveillance data put the age-standardized prevalence of diagnosed diabetes at roughly 9.4% in 2023–24. Those numbers help explain why semaglutide pricing has implications beyond celebrity weight-loss trends or social-media discussion. Diabetes treatment is a long-term health-system issue affecting millions of households, physicians, pharmacies, insurers and provincial budgets. Statistics Canada has also previously found that nearly three-quarters of Canadians with diabetes reported using medication to manage their condition. Generic competition involving a heavily used diabetes medicine can therefore create consequences at a scale that is easy to underestimate when the discussion focuses mainly on the cultural popularity of GLP-1 drugs.</p>
<h2>Canada Now Has a Separate Generic Semaglutide Option for Weight Management</h2>
<p>Another major regulatory milestone followed on June 29, when Health Canada authorized Sevmia, an Apotex semaglutide product referencing Novo Nordisk’s Wegovy. It became the first generic semaglutide product in Canada authorized specifically for chronic weight management. Health Canada described it as the third generic semaglutide product it had approved overall and said six other generic semaglutide submissions were still being reviewed at the time.</p>
<p>The distinction between the two Apotex products is important because Ozempic and Wegovy are separate brand-name medicines with different Health Canada indications even though both contain semaglutide. The arrival of Sevmia showed that generic competition was expanding beyond the diabetes market into another part of the rapidly growing GLP-1 sector. It also demonstrated how quickly the regulatory landscape was evolving: Canada moved from its first generic semaglutide approval in late April to a separate generic weight-management authorization only two months later. Health Canada has stressed that these remain prescription medicines subject to the same regulatory oversight and post-market monitoring applied to other authorized drugs.</p>
<h2>More Competition Is Coming, but Supply Could Complicate the Rollout</h2>
<p>Canada’s generic semaglutide story is still developing. In July, Aspen Pharmacare announced that Health Canada had authorized Aspen-Semaglutide for type 2 diabetes, adding another manufacturer to an increasingly crowded field. Reuters reported, however, that Aspen’s eventual launch timing depended partly on supplies of the semaglutide active pharmaceutical ingredient from Dr. Reddy’s Laboratories, illustrating how regulatory approval does not automatically guarantee an immediate or uninterrupted commercial rollout.</p>
<p>That supply-chain issue is worth watching because semaglutide is more technically demanding to manufacture than many conventional generic medicines. Intense worldwide demand has already made manufacturing capacity a strategic issue throughout the GLP-1 industry. More approved suppliers should theoretically increase competition, but the market’s ability to deliver consistent volumes will determine how quickly that competition translates into broader savings. Canada is therefore becoming something of a real-world test case. Pharmaceutical companies and analysts around the world can now watch what happens when several generic manufacturers enter a large, wealthy market for a drug class that generated extraordinary demand while still under patent protection elsewhere.</p>
<h2>Canada Could Offer an Early Look at the Future of GLP-1 Drugs</h2>
<p>The Canadian market is significant beyond the country’s borders because semaglutide patent protection remains stronger in several other major economies. Reuters has reported that industry analysts are closely watching Canada to understand how aggressively generic manufacturers can compete with established branded peptide medicines. The outcome could offer an early indication of how the global GLP-1 business changes as additional patents expire over the coming years.</p>
<p>There are several possibilities. Generic competition could substantially reduce prices and increase pressure on established manufacturers, while supply constraints and strong brand recognition could slow that transition. Novo Nordisk and its rivals are also continuing to develop newer medicines, meaning the market itself will not stand still while semaglutide becomes more widely genericized. What is already clear is that Canada moved unusually early. In only a few months, the country went from a largely brand-dominated semaglutide market to multiple regulatory approvals, commercial launches and additional competitors waiting in the pipeline. For one of the pharmaceutical industry’s biggest modern success stories, that represents a consequential new chapter.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Weight-Loss-Pills-drug.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/government-corporate-subsidies-hit-87-7-billion-up-142-since-2019-fraser-institute/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Government Corporate Subsidies Hit $87.7 Billion, Up 142% Since 2019: Fraser Institute]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Aug 26 10:17:13 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/government-corporate-subsidies-hit-87-7-billion-up-142-since-2019-fraser-institute/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Government support for businesses in Canada has expanded dramatically since the final year before the pandemic, adding new fuel to]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Government support for businesses in Canada has expanded dramatically since the final year before the pandemic, adding new fuel to a long-running debate over how governments should promote investment and economic growth. A new Fraser Institute study estimates that federal and provincial business subsidies reached $87.7 billion in 2024, measured in inflation-adjusted 2025 dollars—about 142% higher than in 2019.</p>
<p>The increase extends beyond emergency pandemic programs. According to the study, subsidy spending continued rising in 2022, 2023 and 2024, with Ottawa and the provinces increasingly using grants, capital transfers and production incentives to attract investment. Supporters argue these tools can secure factories, jobs and strategic industries. Critics question whether governments are spending too much picking individual winners when Canada continues to struggle with weak productivity and business investment.</p>
<h2>The $87.7 Billion Figure Is Much Broader Than a Few High-Profile Deals</h2>
<p>The Fraser Institute calculates the $87.7 billion total using Statistics Canada government-accounting data, combining federal and provincial subsidies with capital transfers to businesses. The figures are adjusted into 2025 dollars so spending across different years can be compared more fairly. The study defines these transfers as government support provided without the government directly purchasing an equivalent good or service, meaning ordinary government procurement is not included.</p>
<p>That distinction matters because the phrase “corporate subsidies” can evoke images of individual cheques being handed to large corporations. The underlying data capture a much broader range of business support. The study estimates spending rose from approximately $36.2 billion in 2019 to $87.7 billion in 2024, producing the headline 142% increase. Looking further back, governments spent an estimated $787.3 billion between 2007 and 2024—$312.9 billion federally and $474.4 billion provincially. Even after accounting for inflation and population growth, the study finds subsidy spending has increased substantially.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Accounted for Roughly Half of the 2024 Total</h2>
<p>The federal government was responsible for a particularly large share of the most recent increase. Fraser Institute calculations put federal subsidies and capital transfers at approximately $44.7 billion in 2024, compared with roughly $43 billion from all 10 provinces combined. Before the pandemic, federal spending was considerably lower: between 2007 and 2019 it generally ranged from roughly $5.8 billion to $9.5 billion annually in inflation-adjusted terms.</p>
<p>Provincial governments have nevertheless expanded their own programs. Combined provincial business subsidies increased from approximately $19.3 billion in 2015 to $43 billion in 2024. There is an important caveat when interpreting 2024 as a permanent new baseline. The Fraser Institute's table shows federal support falling to roughly $12.1 billion in 2025, although comparable 2025 provincial figures were not yet available. Government support can fluctuate sharply when major capital projects, temporary programs or production incentives enter the accounts, making several years of data more informative than any single year.</p>
<h2>The Pandemic Explains the Biggest Spike—but Not the Entire Trend</h2>
<p>Nothing in the recent data compares with the extraordinary intervention during COVID-19. Federal business subsidies climbed to approximately $96.1 billion in 2020 and remained around $51 billion in 2021, according to the Fraser Institute's inflation-adjusted calculations. Programs such as the Canada Emergency Wage Subsidy were specifically designed to prevent layoffs and business closures when public-health restrictions disrupted normal commercial activity. The Canada Revenue Agency has reported that roughly $100 billion in CEWS funding was ultimately disbursed.</p>
<p>Those emergency years therefore require caution when making historical comparisons. Statistics Canada research subsequently found that businesses using CEWS were associated with lower closure rates and stronger employment outcomes, particularly in sectors heavily affected by restrictions. The Fraser Institute largely treats 2020 and 2021 as exceptional years for the same reason. What concerns its researchers more is what happened afterward: total subsidy spending rose again through 2022, 2023 and 2024, rather than returning to the substantially lower levels common before the pandemic.</p>
<h2>Ontario Has Recorded One of the Most Dramatic Long-Term Increases</h2>
<p>The provincial numbers reveal significant differences across Canada. Ontario recorded approximately $19.9 billion in business subsidies in 2024, by far the largest dollar total among the provinces, while Quebec spent about $10.7 billion and British Columbia roughly $4.2 billion. Saskatchewan and Alberta spent approximately $2.3 billion and $3.7 billion respectively. Smaller provinces naturally register lower total-dollar figures, making population-adjusted comparisons useful as well.</p>
<p>Using three-year averages to smooth annual fluctuations, the Fraser Institute estimates Ontario's provincial subsidy spending during 2022–2024 was 8.35 times its 2007–2009 level, the largest increase among the provinces. Quebec recorded the smallest proportional increase, at about 1.45 times. Per-capita figures tell another story: in 2024, provincial subsidies amounted to roughly $1,860 per Saskatchewan resident, $1,642 in Prince Edward Island, $1,232 in Ontario and $1,191 in Quebec. The differences demonstrate why the national total cannot simply be understood as an Ottawa spending story; provincial industrial and economic-development strategies are increasingly important.</p>
<h2>Canada’s EV Strategy Shows Why Governments Are Spending So Much</h2>
<p>Few policies illustrate the new approach better than Canada's effort to establish a domestic electric-vehicle supply chain. Ottawa and provincial governments have offered substantial incentives to attract battery plants and related manufacturing, arguing that Canada risks losing investment to the United States, Europe and Asia if it does not compete with their industrial policies. The Parliamentary Budget Officer estimated in 2024 that 13 announced EV-related investment groupings worth $46.1 billion could be associated with government support of up to $52.5 billion, including capital support, production incentives and investment tax credits.</p>
<p>Those figures should not be directly added to the Fraser Institute's $87.7 billion annual total because the measures use different definitions and can be spread over many years. They nevertheless show the scale of modern subsidy competition. Volkswagen and Stellantis-LG alone were offered performance incentives potentially worth billions. Honda's proposed $15-billion Ontario EV supply chain was expected to qualify for up to $2.5 billion in federal tax support, although Honda later postponed the project for roughly two years as EV-market conditions weakened.</p>
<h2>Whether Subsidies “Work” Depends Heavily on What Is Being Measured</h2>
<p>The Fraser Institute argues that targeted subsidies generally provide poor value because governments may subsidize investment that companies would have made anyway, shift economic activity from one region to another or give supported firms an artificial advantage over competitors. International research provides reasons for similar caution. Recent OECD analysis found industrial subsidies can increase recipient firms' market share and influence global production patterns, meaning the benefits enjoyed by supported companies can come partly at the expense of unsubsidized competitors.</p>
<p>That does not mean every subsidy produces the same result. Some government support is designed around objectives other than maximizing near-term GDP, including national security, emissions reduction, supply-chain resilience or preserving capacity during emergencies. OECD research has found that some industrial support can encourage additional production capacity. Canada's pandemic wage subsidy offers another example: Statistics Canada found meaningful associations between CEWS participation, business survival and employment. The harder policy question is therefore not whether every subsidy is automatically beneficial or wasteful, but whether the measurable public benefits of a particular program exceed its cost and economic distortions.</p>
<h2>The Spending Surge Comes During Canada’s Productivity Problem</h2>
<p>The debate is particularly significant because Canada has simultaneously been confronting weak productivity and investment. The OECD reported that Canadian workers generated about US$74.70 of output per hour worked on a purchasing-power-adjusted basis in 2023, compared with approximately US$97 in the United States. Business research and development spending is also relatively low, at roughly 1% of GDP compared with an OECD average near 2%. The OECD has identified sluggish business investment as one of the main factors behind Canada's productivity weakness.</p>
<p>Governments increasingly view strategic subsidies and investment tax credits as one way to change that trajectory by encouraging companies to build new factories, commercialize technology and deepen domestic supply chains. Critics see the same productivity problem and reach the opposite conclusion: they argue capital would be allocated more efficiently if taxes, regulatory obstacles and internal trade barriers were reduced for all businesses instead. For an entrepreneur financing expansion from retained earnings while a major corporation receives government incentives, that difference in approach is more than an abstract economic argument—it affects the competitive landscape directly.</p>
<h2>Fraser Institute Wants Subsidies Replaced With Broad Corporate Tax Relief</h2>
<p>Rather than simply reducing government spending, the Fraser Institute proposes redirecting subsidy savings toward broader business tax reductions. Its calculations compare subsidies with corporate income-tax collections to illustrate the potential scale. Federal and provincial governments collected approximately $139.7 billion in corporate income tax in 2024, up from roughly $55.2 billion in 2007. At the federal level alone, 2024 subsidies were equivalent to approximately 50.6% of federal corporate income-tax revenue.</p>
<p>The Institute calculates that during 2020–2024, subsidies averaged the equivalent of roughly 81.2% of corporate income-tax collections across the federal government and 10 provinces, although the percentages vary sharply by jurisdiction. Its analysis is explicitly static: it does not attempt to predict how eliminating subsidies or cutting taxes would change investment, corporate behaviour or future tax revenues. Canada currently applies a 15% general federal corporate tax rate, with a 9% federal small-business rate for eligible Canadian-controlled private corporations. The broader debate is therefore becoming one of allocation—whether increasingly scarce public dollars produce more growth through targeted incentives or through a less selective business environment.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/subsidy.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadians-return-to-u-s-travel-in-bigger-numbers-as-cross-border-trips-jump-10-2-statcan/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadians Return to U.S. Travel in Bigger Numbers as Cross-Border Trips Jump 10.2%: StatCan]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 11 Aug 26 09:56:44 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadians-return-to-u-s-travel-in-bigger-numbers-as-cross-border-trips-jump-10-2-statcan/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canadian travel to the United States is showing its clearest signs of recovery since cross-border traffic plunged last year. In]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canadian travel to the United States is showing its clearest signs of recovery since cross-border traffic plunged last year. In July 2026, Canadian residents returned from 2.3 million trips to the United States, a 10.2% increase from July 2025 and the fourth consecutive month of year-over-year growth.</p>
<p>The headline marks a notable change after more than a year of sharply weaker U.S.-bound travel. Yet the comeback remains uneven. Canadians are increasingly getting back in their cars and crossing the border, while air travel has yet to follow. More importantly, both remain dramatically below the levels recorded before the 2025 downturn. The latest numbers therefore point to a partial return—not a complete reversal—of one of the most striking changes in Canadian travel behaviour in decades.</p>
<h2>July Delivers the Strongest Rebound of 2026</h2>
<p>The 10.2% increase in July represents another significant step in a recovery that began quietly in the spring. Canadian-resident return trips from the United States recorded their first year-over-year increase in more than a year in April. Final StatCan data put the April increase at 1.8%, followed by a much larger 9.9% gain in May. Preliminary data showed another 3.2% increase in June before growth accelerated to 10.2% in July.</p>
<p>That makes July the fourth consecutive month in which Canadian trips home from the United States exceeded the same month a year earlier. For border communities accustomed to watching traffic disappear throughout much of 2025, the sequence matters as much as any single percentage. A family driving to Buffalo for shopping or a weekend away is a small decision individually, but millions of those decisions determine whether hotels, restaurants, outlet malls and attractions near the Canadian border feel the difference.</p>
<h2>Road Trips Are Doing Most of the Heavy Lifting</h2>
<p>The rebound becomes much more revealing when travel is separated by transportation type. Canadian-resident return trips from the United States by automobile increased 12.8% in July compared with July 2025. Air travel moved in the opposite direction: Canadian return trips from the United States by air declined 1.4% year over year.</p>
<p>That divide suggests Canadians are becoming more willing to make relatively accessible cross-border trips without yet returning to U.S. air travel at the same pace. Driving offers considerably more flexibility for people living near the border. A trip from southern Ontario into New York or Michigan can be changed with little notice, while a flight to Florida, California or Nevada usually requires more planning and financial commitment. StatCan also observed during the 2025 downturn that automobile travel reacted more sharply than air travel, in part because driving plans are easier to change. The same flexibility now appears important as traffic begins moving upward again.</p>
<h2>The Comparison With 2024 Tells a Very Different Story</h2>
<p>A 10.2% increase sounds like a substantial comeback until July 2026 is compared with the period before the collapse in U.S. travel. Canadian automobile returns from the United States were still 28.9% below their July 2024 level. Return trips by air were 26.8% lower than two years earlier.</p>
<p>For context, Canadians recorded about 2.7 million automobile return trips from the United States in July 2024 alone. That month came before the dramatic deterioration in Canada-U.S. political relations that reshaped travel patterns during 2025. The latest numbers therefore show that Canadians are travelling south more often than they did during last summer's unusually weak period, but nowhere near as often as they did two summers ago. It is the difference between a rebound and a full recovery. For U.S. destinations that historically relied heavily on Canadian visitors, recovering the lost 2024 traffic remains a considerably larger challenge than simply posting positive year-over-year growth.</p>
<h2>Last Year's Collapse Created an Exceptionally Low Starting Point</h2>
<p>The strength of July's percentage gain is partly explained by just how dramatic the downturn became in 2025. Canadians recorded 39 million return border crossings from the United States in 2024, representing roughly three-quarters of all Canadian-resident return crossings from abroad. In 2025, that number dropped to 29.1 million, a decline of 25.4% in only one year.</p>
<p>July 2025 was particularly weak. StatCan's year-in-review analysis found that the decline intensified as 2025 progressed, with U.S. return crossings reaching their low point in July at almost one-third below the previous year's volume. The agency described the period as an exceptionally deep and sustained decline in the historical border-crossing record. That weak comparison matters when interpreting July 2026. A traveller returning this year who skipped the same trip last summer contributes to strong year-over-year growth, even though overall traffic can still remain well below what was normal in 2024.</p>
<h2>Billions in Canadian Travel Spending Were Redirected</h2>
<p>The drop in U.S. travel did not mean Canadians simply stopped taking vacations. StatCan's National Travel Survey indicates that travel spending shifted considerably during 2025. Canadian spending on visits to the United States fell by $3.3 billion to $18.8 billion. Using the National Travel Survey's trip methodology, Canadian residents made 23.1 million trips that included a U.S. visit during the year, down 23.5% from 2024.</p>
<p>Other destinations benefited. Canadian-resident overseas visits reached 14.3 million in 2025, up 10.2%, while overseas travel spending climbed 17.5% to $31.3 billion. Domestic tourism also remained substantial, with Canadians making 342 million domestic visits during the year and spending $81.3 billion. Those numbers help explain why the U.S. tourism downturn became economically important. The issue was not merely that Canadians were travelling less south of the border; a meaningful share of their travel activity and spending was being directed toward Canadian and overseas destinations instead.</p>
<h2>Overseas Travel Is Now Showing Its Own Signs of Cooling</h2>
<p>One of the more interesting details in July's preliminary numbers is that the surge toward alternative international destinations did not continue everywhere. Canadian-resident return trips by air from overseas countries totalled approximately 988,900 in July 2026, down 1.4% compared with July 2025.</p>
<p>That is a sharp contrast with the broader pattern recorded during 2025, when overseas travel increased as U.S. travel declined. It would be premature, however, to conclude that Canadians are abandoning Europe, Mexico, the Caribbean or other destinations and returning en masse to the United States. July represents only one month, and the strongest improvement in U.S. travel is concentrated among people travelling by automobile. U.S.-bound air traffic remains weaker than it was even last summer. The numbers instead suggest that Canada's travel market is becoming less one-directional: the dramatic shift away from the United States seen in 2025 may be moderating, while destination choices remain considerably more diversified than they were before the disruption.</p>
<h2>Americans Are Also Crossing Into Canada More Often</h2>
<p>Traffic is improving in the opposite direction as well. StatCan's July leading indicator showed U.S. residents making approximately 1.9 million automobile trips into Canada, an increase of 7.2% from July 2025. Another 749,000 U.S. residents arrived by air, up 4.8% year over year.</p>
<p>That two-way improvement is important for communities whose local economies effectively straddle the border. Cross-border tourism supports hotels, restaurants, retail stores, entertainment businesses and transportation services on both sides. The travel relationship had become unusually lopsided and unpredictable during the political and economic tensions of 2025, when Canadian travel south fell much faster than many historical patterns would have suggested. July's numbers show Canadians and Americans increasing at least some forms of cross-border movement at the same time. Still, Canada's recovery in travel to the United States has much further to go because the Canadian pullback in 2025 was substantially larger than an ordinary seasonal fluctuation.</p>
<h2>The Boycott-Era Travel Shift Is Fading—but It Has Not Disappeared</h2>
<p>The direction of travel has clearly changed. Four consecutive months of year-over-year increases are more persuasive than a single positive month, and July's 10.2% rise indicates that the recovery gained momentum as the summer travel season progressed. The large increase in automobile traffic is especially significant because driving accounted for much of the initial collapse in Canadian trips south.</p>
<p>Still, the evidence does not support declaring a return to the old cross-border normal. Automobile travel remains 28.9% below July 2024, while air travel remains 26.8% lower. StatCan's July numbers are also an early indicator based on preliminary automobile and air-arrival data, with more complete travel statistics released later. The clearest conclusion for now is narrower but significant: Canadians are crossing into the United States in noticeably greater numbers than they were a year ago, but the extraordinary travel shift that began in 2025 has left a gap large enough that even double-digit growth has not erased it.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Canada-Travel.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/cusma-breakdown-would-cost-102000-canadian-jobs-and-214000-u-s-jobs-new-analysis-warns/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[CUSMA Breakdown Would Cost 102,000 Canadian Jobs and 214,000 U.S. Jobs, New Analysis Warns]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 12:41:53 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/cusma-breakdown-would-cost-102000-canadian-jobs-and-214000-u-s-jobs-new-analysis-warns/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A trade agreement can feel like legal architecture until its failure is translated into paycheques. A new analysis released by]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A trade agreement can feel like legal architecture until its failure is translated into paycheques. A new analysis released by the Canadian American Business Council on August 10 says a breakdown of CUSMA—the agreement known as USMCA in the United States—would be accompanied by 102,000 fewer Canadian jobs and 214,000 fewer U.S. jobs compared with the status quo. The report draws on quantitative analysis and research from Oxford Economics and also finds that a successful renegotiation could push employment in the opposite direction in 2027.</p>
<p>The warning arrives at an unusually fragile moment. Washington declined on July 1 to extend the pact in its current form for another 16 years, but that did not terminate it. CUSMA remains in force and has moved into annual reviews, leaving businesses to operate under existing rules while governments negotiate what comes next.</p>
<h2>The Headline Job Losses Are a Scenario, Not a Forecast</h2>
<p>The most important detail in the new analysis is the comparison being made. The 102,000 Canadian jobs and 214,000 U.S. jobs are not positions that have already disappeared, nor does the report say the losses are inevitable. The Canadian American Business Council says the figures measure a CUSMA “breakdown” against a status-quo baseline. In other words, the analysis is designed to show how employment could differ if the trade framework deteriorates rather than continues broadly as it is. That distinction matters because economic scenario models are counterfactual exercises: they estimate how businesses, consumers, prices and production could respond under different policy settings. Oxford Economics has separately used scenario modelling in its 2026 work on the North American trade pact, including a worst-case path in which one or more countries ultimately backs away from CUSMA.</p>
<p>The scale is still notable. Together, the headline estimates amount to more than 300,000 fewer jobs across Canada and the United States compared with the status quo. The CABC summary says manufacturing is the industry group most affected across the scenarios it examined, reflecting how deeply production has been organized around predictable cross-border access. The warning is therefore less about an overnight disappearance of hundreds of thousands of positions and more about the economic path that could emerge if prolonged uncertainty turns into a lasting rupture. That distinction makes the findings more useful: they provide a measure of what could be at stake without presenting a hypothetical outcome as something that has already happened.</p>
<h2>Canada Has Fewer Jobs at Risk, but Far Greater U.S. Exposure</h2>
<p>At first glance, the U.S. number looks more severe: 214,000 fewer jobs compared with 102,000 in Canada. But the raw totals do not capture the relative importance of the relationship to each economy. Statistics Canada reported that 75.9% of Canadian merchandise exports went to the United States in 2024, while 62.2% of merchandise imports came from there. More than 85% of Canadian enterprises that exported goods in 2024 sold into the U.S. market. For thousands of firms, the border is not simply one sales route among many; it is the main commercial artery linking factories, distributors and customers.</p>
<p>That concentration helps explain why prolonged trade friction can become a national economic problem quickly. A machine shop in southern Ontario, a food processor in Quebec or an energy supplier in Alberta may sell entirely different products, yet all can depend heavily on U.S. buyers, suppliers or transportation networks. Canadian companies have increasingly looked for opportunities beyond the American market as trade tensions have intensified, but replacing decades of integration is difficult. Geography, infrastructure, regulatory compatibility and established customer relationships have made the United States unusually hard to substitute. The 102,000-job estimate therefore sits inside a larger vulnerability: Canada's smaller economy has built a considerable share of its goods trade around a single neighbouring market, meaning even disruptions smaller than a complete CUSMA breakdown can have outsized effects.</p>
<h2>Manufacturing Would Be the First Major Pressure Point</h2>
<p>The CABC analysis identifies manufacturing as the most affected industry group across the scenarios it examined, and the reason is visible on factory floors. North American production frequently operates as a regional system rather than as three separate national systems. The automotive industry alone accounts for roughly 22% of trade under CUSMA, according to analysis published by Rice University's Baker Institute. Industry groups also emphasize that vehicles and components routinely cross national borders multiple times before final assembly. A transmission, seat, metal stamping or electronic module can accumulate value in more than one country before a completed vehicle reaches a dealership. When border costs rise, manufacturers therefore do not necessarily pay a new expense just once; disruptions can reverberate through suppliers, inventories, production schedules and future investment.</p>
<p>Ontario offers a useful illustration of how manufacturing shocks can spread. In a separate tariff scenario published in 2025—not the same model behind the new CABC numbers—the province's Financial Accountability Office estimated that Ontario could have 119,200 fewer jobs in 2026 than under a no-tariff outlook, including 57,700 fewer manufacturing jobs. The FAO also warned that weaker manufacturing would spill into industries such as trade, transportation and professional services. That is why a CUSMA breakdown would not end at assembly lines. Reduced factory output can eventually mean fewer trucking loads, smaller warehouse volumes, weaker demand for engineering services and less spending in communities whose household incomes depend on industrial employment.</p>
<h2>Why the United States Could Lose More Jobs in Raw Numbers</h2>
<p>The 214,000 U.S. figure challenges the idea that dismantling preferential trade with Canada would primarily hurt Canadian workers. The United States has a much larger labour market, so a larger absolute job estimate does not mean it is more dependent on Canada than Canada is on the United States. It does, however, underscore how many American companies sell into Canada or participate in cross-border supply chains. U.S. government data show that more than 88,000 American small and medium-sized businesses exported over $74 billion in goods to Canada in 2023. Those exporters range from specialized manufacturers to agricultural suppliers and equipment producers, many of which treat Canada as part of their regular commercial territory rather than a distant foreign market.</p>
<p>The supply-chain relationship also runs both ways. American manufacturers use Canadian materials and components, while Canadian companies purchase U.S.-made machinery, equipment, parts and services. If preferential trade deteriorates, an American firm can face two pressures at once: imported inputs may become more expensive while Canadian customers face stronger incentives to reduce U.S. purchases. That mechanism helps explain why a trade breakdown can produce U.S. job losses even when Washington's objective is to encourage more domestic manufacturing. Some individual plants could benefit from greater protection while exporters, downstream manufacturers and suppliers elsewhere lose business. The CABC estimate highlights the difference between protecting a particular industry and improving employment across an economy as a whole.</p>
<h2>Higher Tariffs Can Raise Costs Before They Create New Factories</h2>
<p>The new CABC release makes one of its strongest conclusions on tariffs: its analysis says tariffs ultimately do not expand the U.S. manufacturing sector or shrink the U.S. trade deficit. That finding cuts to the central economic argument surrounding a potential CUSMA breakdown. A tariff can make an imported product more expensive and potentially give a competing domestic producer an advantage. But manufacturers themselves are major consumers of imported products, including metals, machinery and intermediate components. In an integrated production system, a policy designed to protect one stage of manufacturing can raise costs for another company farther down the supply chain, reducing the competitiveness of the finished product.</p>
<p>Bank of Canada modelling has demonstrated the same basic transmission channel from another angle. In a hypothetical broad tariff-and-retaliation scenario published in 2025, the Bank found that U.S. import tariffs would increase prices paid by American consumers, while retaliation by trading partners would reduce demand for U.S. exports and slow U.S. economic growth. Businesses could initially absorb some costs through smaller profit margins before passing more into prices. For Canada, weaker U.S. demand would weigh on exports, while retaliation and higher import costs would hurt businesses and consumers at home. Those interconnected effects help explain why a deterioration in CUSMA can reduce employment on both sides of the border even when each government is trying to protect its own workers.</p>
<h2>The Damage Can Start Before CUSMA Actually Breaks</h2>
<p>Trade agreements influence investment partly because they give companies greater confidence about the rules that will apply years into the future. That matters enormously for manufacturing, where building a plant, installing a production line or developing specialized tooling can require large upfront investments that take years to recover. Canadian Manufacturers & Exporters found in June that 73% of surveyed manufacturers expected failure to secure a full 16-year CUSMA renewal to hurt their businesses to a moderate or great extent. Among manufacturers affected by changes to U.S. metal tariffs, 30% said they were delaying, reducing or cancelling investment in Canada, while 25% reported reducing employment, hours or shifts.</p>
<p>The human consequences can already be seen in communities closely tied to cross-border manufacturing. Reuters reported earlier this year that businesses in Windsor, Ontario, had paused investments, delayed production and cut jobs during periods of intense tariff uncertainty. One local homebuilder told Reuters that 13 of 21 employees had been laid off as confidence and housing activity weakened, although some workers were later rehired. It illustrates how trade anxiety can move from a factory order book into household decisions, real estate and local stores. A formal treaty collapse is therefore not required for economic costs to emerge. If companies believe future market access is uncertain, they can defer investments and hiring decisions today rather than gamble millions of dollars on rules that may change tomorrow.</p>
<h2>CUSMA Is Still in Force, but the Review Has Become a Longer Negotiation</h2>
<p>The July 1 review produced a consequential outcome, but it did not mean the immediate end of North American free trade. The United States declined to extend CUSMA in its current form for another 16 years. Under the agreement's review mechanism, however, the pact remains in force while the three countries conduct annual reviews, with its current expiry date still set for July 1, 2036 unless the governments agree to extend it. Existing CUSMA rules therefore continue to matter today. For a company planning a cross-border shipment, the agreement has not vanished; the uncertainty concerns how its rules may eventually be rewritten and whether all three governments can find terms they are prepared to extend.</p>
<p>That process could take considerable time. U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer said in July that Washington hoped to reach interim arrangements with Canada and Mexico before the end of 2026 while pushing some of the more difficult CUSMA changes into 2027. Reuters identified automotive rules of origin, labour provisions and environmental standards among the complicated issues still being negotiated. Washington has also pushed for higher North American—and under some proposals specifically American—content requirements in vehicles. For businesses, the realistic near-term risk is therefore not one dramatic expiration date. It is an extended period in which tariffs, sourcing requirements and expectations about future market access can keep changing, making long-term investment decisions considerably harder.</p>
<h2>A Successful Renegotiation Could Reverse the Job Math</h2>
<p>The same CABC analysis that produces the alarming downside also models a considerably more positive outcome. According to the report's release, a successful CUSMA renegotiation would be associated with 137,000 additional U.S. jobs and 98,000 additional Canadian jobs in 2027 compared with the status quo. The contrast with the breakdown scenario is striking, leaving a difference of hundreds of thousands of positions between the two possible economic paths. That does not mean signing a revised agreement would automatically create every modeled job. Rather, the result indicates that the model associates a successful trade outcome with substantially stronger employment than a deterioration of the existing framework.</p>
<p>That upside is also why the 2026 CUSMA fight is about more than preserving the precise text negotiated six years ago. Governments are debating tariffs, market access, rules of origin and the future structure of North American production while corporations are deciding where their next factories, supply contracts and investments will go. The CABC argues that collaboration and predictability are central to regional competitiveness. Its analysis is a business-group-sponsored contribution to the policy debate rather than an official government forecast, so its estimates should be understood as modeled scenarios rather than certainties. Still, its broad warning is consistent with government, central-bank and industry research: unwinding decades of North American economic integration would create costs on both sides of the border. The central question is increasingly not which country would escape the damage, but how much each would lose if cooperation gives way to economic separation.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Successful-NAFTA-USMCA-Negotiations.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadians-sour-on-americans-while-79-of-americans-still-view-canadians-favourably-poll/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadians Sour on Americans While 79% of Americans Still View Canadians Favourably: Poll]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 12:39:40 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadians-sour-on-americans-while-79-of-americans-still-view-canadians-favourably-poll/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[One of the world’s closest cross-border relationships is becoming noticeably less warm from the Canadian side. Fresh Angus Reid Institute]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the world’s closest cross-border relationships is becoming noticeably less warm from the Canadian side. Fresh Angus Reid Institute findings show 48% of Canadians now hold an unfavourable view of the American people, narrowly exceeding the 45% who remain favourable. South of the border, the mood could hardly be more different: 79% of Americans still view Canadians favourably.</p>
<p>The imbalance comes after months of tariff battles, threats against Canadian trade and heightened political friction with Washington. Yet the numbers also reveal something more complicated than simple anti-American sentiment. Canadians appear to distinguish sharply between Americans themselves and the administration governing them, while age and political affiliation are increasingly shaping how the relationship is perceived.</p>
<h2>A Cross-Border Friendship With Two Different Temperatures</h2>
<p>The headline numbers show a relationship that feels strikingly different depending on which side of the border is answering. Among Canadians, 45% have a favourable view of the American people while 48% have an unfavourable one, leaving the country almost evenly divided. Only 13% describe their opinion as “very favourable.” By comparison, 79% of Americans have a favourable opinion of Canadians, including 39% who say their feelings are very favourable. Just 7% of Americans hold an unfavourable view.</p>
<p>That warmth is not unique to the Angus Reid findings. Gallup reported earlier in 2026 that 80% of Americans viewed Canada favourably. Remarkably, that was considered a weak result by historical standards: Gallup said it was the lowest rating for Canada in its long-running measurements, after years in which Canadian favourability frequently hovered around 90%. In other words, American enthusiasm for Canada has softened somewhat, but it remains substantially stronger than Canadian feelings travelling in the opposite direction.</p>
<h2>Trump Is Far Less Popular Than the American People</h2>
<p>The distinction between Americans and their government becomes especially clear when President Donald Trump is added to the equation. Angus Reid found 79% of Canadians have an unfavourable opinion of Trump, including 69% whose opinion is “very unfavourable.” That is dramatically more negative than Canadians’ assessment of Americans themselves, where 19% fall into the very unfavourable category. The difference suggests much of the anger generated by the current dispute remains concentrated on Washington rather than being applied universally to individual Americans.</p>
<p>Other research points in the same direction. Pew Research Center found only 33% of Canadians held a favourable view of the United States as a country in 2026, down from 57% in 2023. China, at 44%, actually received a higher favourable rating among Canadians than the U.S. in Pew’s latest international research. Those numbers measure countries rather than their citizens, an important distinction. Taken together, however, the findings indicate that political trust and affection for the United States have deteriorated faster than Canadians’ feelings toward ordinary Americans.</p>
<h2>Political Affiliation Is Reshaping Canadian Attitudes</h2>
<p>There is no single Canadian opinion of Americans anymore. Angus Reid found a particularly large partisan divide, with 70% of Canadians who voted Conservative in the 2025 federal election holding a favourable view of the American people. Among Liberal voters, that figure falls to 30%. It is even lower among NDP voters at 28% and Bloc Québécois voters at 27%. Conservatives are therefore more than twice as likely as supporters of several other major parties to view Americans positively.</p>
<p>Age creates another revealing divide. Among Canadians aged 55 and older, 52% view Americans favourably, making them the only age group where positive feelings clearly outweigh negative ones. Among those aged 18 to 34, favourable opinion drops to just 31%, while 60% hold an unfavourable view. Canadians aged 35 to 54 are almost perfectly divided, with 46% favourable and 46% unfavourable. What was once largely treated as a stable national relationship is increasingly being filtered through generation, domestic politics and attitudes toward the Trump administration.</p>
<h2>Americans Remain Positive Across Party Lines</h2>
<p>American politics produces divisions over Canada, but not enough to erase broad affection for Canadians. Democrats are overwhelmingly positive, with 92% holding a favourable view of Canadian people. Among Republicans who do not identify with the MAGA movement, 73% are favourable. Even among self-described MAGA Republicans — the political group most aligned with Trump’s approach — 69% view Canadians positively while just 17% view them unfavourably.</p>
<p>Age makes relatively little difference to the overall conclusion. Favourable opinion of Canadians stands at 71% among Americans aged 18 to 34, rises to 79% among those aged 35 to 54 and reaches 85% among people 55 and older. Gallup has detected more political erosion when Americans are asked about Canada as a country: Republican favourability fell to 62% in early 2026 from 85% a year earlier, while Democratic favourability remained at 95%. Even after that steep Republican decline, however, a clear majority remained positive toward Canada. Political disagreements have therefore weakened the relationship without producing widespread American hostility toward Canadians.</p>
<h2>Canadians Increasingly See the U.S. as a Potential Threat</h2>
<p>The biggest change may not be personal affection at all, but the way Canadians believe Ottawa should deal with Washington. In February 2023, 73% said the Canadian government should approach the United States either on friendly terms or as a valued partner and ally. Only 7% considered the U.S. an enemy or potential threat. By July 2026, just 26% favoured the friendly-or-partner approach, while 42% placed the United States in the enemy-or-potential-threat category. Another 29% said Ottawa should proceed cautiously.</p>
<p>The American perspective is almost the mirror image. Angus Reid found 78% of Americans believe their government should approach Canada either as a valued partner or on friendly terms. Pew has documented a similar collapse in Canadian institutional trust: 83% of Canadians regarded the United States as a reliable partner in 2022, compared with only 35% in 2026. That shift matters because it goes beyond whether Canadians like American culture, cities or neighbours. It reflects growing doubts about the predictability of the bilateral relationship itself.</p>
<h2>The Tariff Fight Matters Much More to Canadians</h2>
<p>One reason for the asymmetry is simple: Canadians are paying considerably more attention to the trade confrontation. Angus Reid found 54% of Canadians were following the latest tariff threats closely and another 37% had heard at least something about them. Combined, 91% were aware of the issue. Among Americans, only 23% were following closely and 46% had heard a little, while one-quarter said they had not heard about the latest threats at all.</p>
<p>That attention gap is understandable given Canada’s economic dependence on cross-border commerce. Ottawa’s preparations for the 2026 CUSMA review have drawn thousands of submissions from businesses, industry groups, workers, governments and individuals concerned about maintaining predictable North American market access. Integrated industries including autos, agriculture, energy and manufacturing can feel trade disruptions quickly. For many Americans, the Canada dispute competes with a much larger range of domestic and international issues. For Canadian businesses and communities dependent on U.S. customers, however, another tariff announcement can have immediate consequences for orders, investment decisions and jobs.</p>
<h2>Americans Can Like Canadians While Supporting Tougher Trade Policies</h2>
<p>Positive feelings toward Canadians do not automatically translate into agreement over trade. Overall, 59% of Americans opposed Trump’s latest threatened tariffs on Canadian goods, compared with 24% who supported them. But partisan differences were enormous. Among MAGA Republicans, 71% supported the tariff measures. Non-MAGA Republicans were much more divided, with 34% supporting and 40% opposing them, while 89% of Democrats were opposed.</p>
<p>There was also considerable uncertainty about whether the latest threats would actually become policy. Forty-two per cent of Canadians believed Trump was serious and would follow through, compared with 32% who thought he was bluffing. Americans were almost evenly divided: 37% expected him to follow through and 33% expected a bluff, while 30% were unsure. As the Angus Reid findings were released on August 10, Canada and the United States were still discussing possible concessions ahead of an August 19 tariff deadline. Reuters reported that negotiations included Canadian and American trade demands, with officials continuing discussions but no guarantee of an agreement.</p>
<h2>The Political Chill Has Already Changed Travel Behaviour</h2>
<p>Public opinion is not the only indication that the relationship has changed. Statistics Canada found Canadian-resident return border crossings from the United States fell 25.4% in 2025 compared with 2024. Excluding the pandemic period, the 11-month streak of year-over-year declines was the deepest and most sustained on record since digital border-crossing records began in 1972. Canadian spending on U.S. trips also declined by $3.3 billion to $18.8 billion during 2025, while Canadians increasingly redirected leisure travel toward domestic and overseas destinations.</p>
<p>There are signs of stabilization rather than an endless decline. Preliminary Statistics Canada figures showed 1.75 million Canadian-resident return trips from the U.S. by automobile and air in June 2026, up 3.2% from a year earlier. Meanwhile, U.S.-resident trips to Canada reached 2.2 million that month, up 5.1% and marking a fifth consecutive year-over-year increase. The Angus Reid results, based on 2,199 Canadian adults and 1,000 American adults, therefore capture a relationship in transition: people-to-people goodwill remains substantial, especially in the United States, but Canadian trust in the broader relationship has become considerably more fragile.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Canadians.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/700000-pc-optimum-points-stolen-in-minutes-loblaw-says-compromised-email-was-behind-it/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[700,000 PC Optimum Points Stolen in Minutes; Loblaw Says Compromised Email Was Behind It]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 11:51:14 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/700000-pc-optimum-points-stolen-in-minutes-loblaw-says-compromised-email-was-behind-it/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[It took nearly a year for an Ontario woman to build a PC Optimum balance worth hundreds of dollars. According]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It took nearly a year for an Ontario woman to build a PC Optimum balance worth hundreds of dollars. According to a new report, it took only minutes for someone else to drain it.</p>
<p>Mandy Campbell of Kincardine discovered in late July that more than 700,000 points had been redeemed at a Shoppers Drug Mart in Oakville, roughly three hours from where she lived. The transactions immediately raised questions about how someone had gained access to her rewards account, particularly after Loblaw disclosed a separate customer-data breach earlier in 2026. Loblaw, however, says its investigation reached a different conclusion: Campbell’s personal email account had been accessed without authorization, and the March breach was not responsible. The case shows how a loyalty balance accumulated purchase by purchase can become a meaningful target once an online account is compromised.</p>
<h2>Nearly a Year of Points Disappeared Within Minutes</h2>
<p>Campbell had spent roughly nine months accumulating hundreds of thousands of PC Optimum points before discovering they had suddenly been redeemed. CityNews reported that her account history showed the transactions taking place at a Shoppers Drug Mart in Oakville. The timestamps indicated the points were used within a short period, while Campbell said she was nowhere near the store. Kincardine and Oakville are separated by a significant drive, making the location of the redemptions an immediate warning sign.</p>
<p>The scale of the transactions made the incident more than an irritating account problem. CityNews reported that the person responsible obtained more than $1,000 worth of products using Campbell’s points. She believed the digital barcode associated with her PC Optimum account had been used during the redemptions. For someone who had spent months deliberately building a balance, the experience was similar to opening a savings envelope and discovering that someone had emptied it while she was somewhere else entirely.</p>
<h2>Loblaw Says the Customer’s Email Account Was Compromised</h2>
<p>The most important finding came from Loblaw after it reviewed Campbell’s case. The company said the unauthorized redemption was associated with unauthorized access to her personal email account rather than a breach of Loblaw’s own systems. That distinction matters because Campbell had initially questioned whether a cybersecurity incident disclosed by Loblaw earlier in the year might have played a role. The company explicitly rejected that connection after examining what happened.</p>
<p>A compromised email account can create problems far beyond the inbox itself. Email addresses are commonly used as usernames and as part of account-recovery processes across online services. Canada’s Centre for Cyber Security therefore recommends protecting email accounts with unique passwords and multi-factor authentication whenever possible. Its guidance notes that MFA can help prevent unauthorized entry even when a password has already been compromised. Campbell’s experience is a reminder that protecting a loyalty account can depend partly on protecting the email account connected to it.</p>
<h2>Loblaw Had Disclosed a Separate Data Breach in March</h2>
<p>Campbell’s concern about Loblaw’s systems did not emerge in a vacuum. On March 10, 2026, Loblaw disclosed that a criminal third party had accessed a contained, non-critical portion of its IT network. The company said some basic customer information—including names, phone numbers and email addresses—was exposed. As part of its response, Loblaw refreshed active customer sessions, meaning customers had to sign back into affected Loblaw digital services.</p>
<p>The company said its investigation indicated that passwords, health information and payment-card information were not compromised. It also said PC Financial was not affected. When Campbell’s case surfaced months later, Loblaw reiterated those findings and said the March incident had not caused her unauthorized points redemption. That does not make the earlier breach irrelevant to customers concerned about digital privacy, but the available evidence does not establish a connection between the two events. In Campbell’s specific case, Loblaw maintains that unauthorized access began outside its network, with her email.</p>
<h2>700,000 Points Represent a Meaningful Store Balance</h2>
<p>PC Optimum points may not look like conventional currency, but a large balance has considerable purchasing power. Under the program’s standard redemption structure, 10,000 points are worth $10 in rewards at participating stores. On that basis, 700,000 points ordinarily represent $700 in base redemption value. The program allows members to spend points across participating Loblaw businesses, turning balances accumulated gradually on groceries, pharmacy purchases and promotional offers into future purchasing power.</p>
<p>CityNews nevertheless reported that more than $1,000 worth of products were obtained during the unauthorized redemptions in Campbell’s case. The report did not provide enough transaction detail to fully reconcile that retail value with the program’s standard points conversion, so it would be inappropriate to assume exactly how the total was reached. What is clear is the size of the account involved. The federal Privacy Commissioner has described PC Optimum as a program with more than 17 million members across Canada, making security around loyalty balances relevant to a substantial portion of Canadian households.</p>
<h2>PC Optimum Accounts Have Been Targeted Before</h2>
<p>The idea of criminals targeting loyalty points is not new. In 2017, before the current PC Optimum program was created, Loblaw acknowledged unauthorized access to PC Plus accounts after usernames and passwords obtained elsewhere were used against its website. The incident was an early example of credential stuffing, where attackers test previously exposed login combinations against different services in hopes that customers reused the same credentials.</p>
<p>Security concerns continued after PC Optimum launched in February 2018. An Alberta privacy regulator later documented automated attacks against Loblaw web properties, including PC Optimum, in which bots attempted to authenticate customer login credentials. There have also been individual complaints about missing or improperly redeemed points since then. In 2023, CityNews reported that one Ontario customer spent more than six months trying to have 30,000 points restored after they were mistakenly redeemed through an account issue in another province. These incidents differ technically, but together they demonstrate why accumulated loyalty points should not be treated as inconsequential.</p>
<h2>Campbell’s Points Were Eventually Restored</h2>
<p>Campbell reported the fraudulent transactions to Loblaw quickly, but the resolution was not immediate. When she initially contacted CityNews, Loblaw was still investigating and the missing points had not been returned. She worried that recovering a balance that had taken months to build could turn into a lengthy series of calls and emails, particularly because the transaction records already showed redemptions occurring far from where she was located.</p>
<p>The situation changed after CityNews’s Speakers Corner contacted Loblaw. Within hours of that outreach, Campbell’s missing points were restored to her account. She also filed a police report because the transactions involved more than $1,000 worth of merchandise, and CityNews reported that the police investigation remained underway when its story was published on August 10. Restoration of the points removed the immediate financial impact for Campbell, but it did not erase the larger concern: a digital rewards account she had spent most of a year building had apparently been accessed and drained before she could stop it.</p>
<h2>One App Setting Can Reduce the Redemption Risk</h2>
<p>Campbell has since highlighted a PC Optimum feature that can make a stolen account less useful to someone attempting to spend its points. The app allows members to disable redemption while continuing to collect points. Redemption can then be turned back on when the legitimate account holder is ready to use the balance. In practical terms, it creates an additional barrier between an accumulated points balance and an unauthorized checkout transaction.</p>
<p>There are broader precautions worth taking as well. Canada’s Centre for Cyber Security recommends using different passwords for different accounts rather than recycling the same credentials. A reputable password manager can make unique passwords easier to maintain. More importantly in a case involving alleged email compromise, multi-factor authentication should be activated on the email account whenever the provider supports it. Customers with large loyalty balances can also review transaction activity periodically instead of discovering unauthorized redemptions much later. None of these measures guarantees that fraud will never occur, but each removes an easy opportunity an attacker might otherwise exploit.</p>
<h2>The Bigger Issue Is Confidence in Digital Loyalty Programs</h2>
<p>PC Optimum operates on a massive scale. The Office of the Privacy Commissioner of Canada reported in March that the program had more than 17 million members, meaning even unusual account problems can attract attention because so many Canadians use the platform. The same federal investigation was separate from Campbell’s theft and dealt with account deletion and data retention, but it found that Loblaw had taken an unreasonable amount of time to address some deletion requests and privacy inquiries. Loblaw subsequently made procedural improvements and agreed to additional measures concerning retained information.</p>
<p>That privacy finding, Loblaw’s March cybersecurity disclosure and Campbell’s later points theft involve different issues and should not be conflated. Together, however, they illustrate the increasingly important role digital trust plays in loyalty programs. Customers are no longer storing only coupons on plastic cards. They are accumulating balances potentially worth hundreds or thousands of dollars inside accounts connected to personal information, purchase histories and digital identities. Campbell got her points back. The lesson from how quickly they disappeared may last considerably longer.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/pc-optimum.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/refugee-health-costs-near-1b-as-asylum-backlog-tops-300000-each-extra-month-adds-72m-analysis/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Refugee Health Costs Near $1B as Asylum Backlog Tops 300,000—Each Extra Month Adds $72M: Analysis]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 11:31:57 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/refugee-health-costs-near-1b-as-asylum-backlog-tops-300000-each-extra-month-adds-72m-analysis/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s federal health program for refugees and asylum seekers has grown into a nearly $1-billion annual expense, driven by a]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s federal health program for refugees and asylum seekers has grown into a nearly $1-billion annual expense, driven by a much larger eligible population and the length of time many claimants remain in the immigration system. Parliamentary Budget Officer estimates show spending climbing from $211 million in 2020-21 to about $896 million in 2024-25, with costs approaching $1 billion in 2025-26.</p>
<p>The asylum backlog is closely connected to that spending. More than 300,000 refugee claims were pending around the end of 2025, although newer Immigration and Refugee Board data show the inventory falling to 276,649 by June 2026. A separate PBO calculation found that adding 30 days to average processing times could increase annual federal health costs by roughly $72 million in 2026-27—illustrating how administrative delays can translate directly into higher program expenses.</p>
<h2>The Near-$1 Billion Price Tag Followed Years of Rapid Growth</h2>
<p>The Interim Federal Health Program, or IFHP, has expanded dramatically alongside Canada’s asylum system. Federal spending on the program rose from $211 million in 2020-21 to approximately $896.5 million in 2024-25. The Parliamentary Budget Officer initially projected costs of roughly $989 million for 2025-26 before later updating its baseline to approximately $975 million. Without policy changes, spending was projected to continue rising beyond $1 billion annually as the number of people receiving coverage and their time in the program increased.</p>
<p>Those totals cover more than asylum seekers alone. The IFHP also serves resettled refugees and certain other eligible groups who temporarily lack provincial or territorial health coverage. In 2024-25, approximately 623,000 people were eligible for IFHP benefits, including more than 440,000 asylum claimants. That distinction matters because calling the entire amount “refugee health spending” can obscure the program’s broader mandate. Still, asylum claimants represent its largest beneficiary group and are a major factor behind the recent increase in expenditures.</p>
<h2>What Canada’s Refugee Health Program Actually Covers</h2>
<p>The IFHP is designed as temporary health protection rather than a replacement for provincial medicare. Eligible beneficiaries can receive basic services such as hospital treatment, physician and nursing care, laboratory testing, diagnostic services, ambulance transportation and prenatal and postnatal care. Supplemental benefits can include prescription medication, urgent dental treatment, vision services, mental-health counselling, physiotherapy, assistive devices and some home-care services.</p>
<p>Ottawa changed the cost structure on May 1, 2026. Basic medical services remain fully covered, but beneficiaries now pay $4 for each eligible prescription fill or refill and 30 per cent of the cost of covered supplemental services. A $200 eligible urgent dental treatment, for example, would leave the patient responsible for $60 while the federal program pays $140. The government presented the change as a way to preserve essential coverage while controlling rapidly rising expenses. The PBO estimates the new cost-sharing measures could reduce federal IFHP spending by about $162 million in 2026-27, with annual savings potentially reaching $217 million by 2029-30.</p>
<h2>The Backlog Crossed 300,000—But Has Recently Started Falling</h2>
<p>The size of Canada’s asylum inventory became especially significant in late 2025. The PBO found that more than 300,000 refugee claims were awaiting decisions in December, with roughly 65 per cent having already been pending for more than a year. Its underlying data put the inventory at approximately 304,000 claims, while the IRB’s subsequently published monthly series recorded 300,151 pending Refugee Protection Division claims for December 2025. Differences of that size can occur because of reporting dates and data revisions, but both datasets show the same basic picture: an historically large queue.</p>
<p>More recent figures provide an important update. The IRB reported 299,973 pending claims in January 2026, 295,502 in March, 286,940 in May and 276,649 by June. June was particularly notable because the Refugee Protection Division finalized 12,985 cases while receiving just 2,679 new claims. The backlog therefore remains enormous, but describing it as currently above 300,000 would no longer reflect the latest published monthly data. The 300,000 threshold is better understood as the recent peak that helped drive federal cost projections.</p>
<h2>The $72 Million Figure Shows How Expensive Delays Can Become</h2>
<p>The most striking number in the PBO analysis is also one that requires careful interpretation. The budget watchdog estimated what would happen if the average processing time for asylum claims increased by 30 days. Under its model, that additional month would raise annual IFHP expenditures by approximately $71.8 million in 2025-26 and $72.2 million in 2026-27. By 2029-30, the same 30-day increase could add about $92.2 million annually because the projected beneficiary population and health costs would be larger.</p>
<p>That does not mean Ottawa receives a new $72-million bill every calendar month simply because the backlog still exists. Instead, it measures the financial effect of keeping claimants eligible for the health program an average of one month longer. The mechanism is straightforward: when a case takes longer to resolve, many claimants remain covered by the IFHP for longer as well. With hundreds of thousands of cases in the system, even a relatively small increase in average processing time can create tens of millions of dollars in additional annual expenses.</p>
<h2>Some Claimants Remain Covered for Years While Cases Move Through the System</h2>
<p>The length of time people spend eligible for IFHP coverage helps explain why processing speed matters so much. According to the PBO, asylum claimants were remaining covered for approximately four years on average by 2024-25, compared with roughly three years several years earlier. The figure can extend well beyond the time needed for an initial hearing because a claim may move through appeals, reviews or removal processes before a person leaves Canada or obtains another form of health coverage.</p>
<p>For cases finalized in 2025, the PBO found an average IRB processing time of approximately 19 months. Cases involving appeals generally took an additional six to 12 months compared with those without an appeal. The downstream system adds another layer: at the end of 2025, nearly 74,000 failed refugee claimants were in the Canada Border Services Agency’s removals inventory. Some were subject to stays or circumstances preventing removal, some had active removal proceedings and others were listed as wanted. Depending on status, certain individuals can remain eligible for federal health benefits until departure, meaning immigration-processing delays can continue affecting costs even after an initial decision.</p>
<h2>Urgent Dental Care Has Become One of the Biggest Spending Drivers</h2>
<p>The rise in IFHP costs is not simply the result of more doctor visits. Supplemental health benefits accounted for more than half of program expenditures examined by the PBO, with urgent dental treatment emerging as an especially large category. Federal spending on urgent dental benefits increased from roughly $30 million in 2019-20 to approximately $257 million in 2024-25—an increase of more than eightfold in five years.</p>
<p>Urgent dental care represented approximately 56 per cent of supplemental-benefit spending in 2024-25, while dental treatment and prescription drugs together accounted for nearly 80 per cent. The average cost of dental claims also increased by roughly 7 per cent annually between 2019-20 and 2024-25. Mental-health counselling has become more significant as well, rising from less than 1 per cent of supplemental expenditures in 2016 to about 11 per cent by 2025. Those figures help explain why Ottawa targeted supplemental services for its new 30-per-cent co-payment while continuing to fully cover core physician and hospital services.</p>
<h2>Ontario and Quebec Account for Nearly Nine-Tenths of Spending</h2>
<p>IFHP expenditures are also heavily concentrated geographically. Based on where health services were delivered in 2024-25, Ontario accounted for approximately 59.8 per cent of spending and Quebec another 29 per cent. Combined, the two provinces represented almost 89 per cent of federal IFHP health expenditures. Alberta accounted for roughly 7 per cent and British Columbia about 2.8 per cent, with the remaining provinces and territories making up a comparatively small share.</p>
<p>That distribution largely mirrors where many asylum claimants enter the system, settle temporarily or access services. Toronto and Montreal, in particular, have long been major destinations for newcomers and asylum seekers. The PBO cautioned that the location where a medical service is billed does not necessarily represent a beneficiary’s permanent residence, so the numbers should not automatically be treated as a measure of provincial population shares. Nor did its work attempt to quantify the effect on individual hospitals or clinics. What the data clearly show, however, is that the federal program’s rapid growth has not been evenly distributed across the country.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Trying to Reduce Costs, but Faster Decisions Could Matter More</h2>
<p>The federal government has already taken several steps aimed at limiting future IFHP growth. The May 2026 co-payment system is expected to save about $162 million in its first full fiscal year and potentially more than $217 million annually by 2029-30. Ottawa has also tightened asylum eligibility through Bill C-12, which received royal assent on March 26, 2026. Among its provisions, certain claims made more than one year after a person first entered Canada and some claims made after irregular entry from the United States are no longer referred to the IRB, although affected individuals can generally still seek a pre-removal risk assessment.</p>
<p>The PBO modelled an illustrative scenario in which the changes reduced the number of newly eligible asylum claimants by 26 per cent. Under that assumption, federal IFHP spending could be about $220 million lower by 2029-30, although the watchdog stressed that actual savings could be smaller because some affected people may remain eligible through other processes. Policy analysts at the C.D. Howe Institute have argued that reducing processing delays may offer a more durable solution than shifting costs to claimants. The broader lesson from the federal data is that health spending cannot be separated from the speed and efficiency of the asylum system itself.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/The-First-Universal-Healthcare-System-Covering-All-Residents.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/carney-leads-poilievre-on-every-major-issue-tested-including-immigration-pipelines-and-trump-talks-leger/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Carney Leads Poilievre on Every Major Issue Tested—including Immigration, Pipelines and Trump Talks: Léger]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 11:27:20 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/carney-leads-poilievre-on-every-major-issue-tested-including-immigration-pipelines-and-trump-talks-leger/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Mark Carney’s political advantage is no longer confined to handling Donald Trump or managing the economy. New Léger polling finds]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Mark Carney’s political advantage is no longer confined to handling Donald Trump or managing the economy. New Léger polling finds the prime minister ahead of Conservative Leader Pierre Poilievre across all six major policy comparisons highlighted by the firm, including immigration, pipelines, defence and Canada-U.S. trade negotiations.</p>
<p>The result is especially striking because Léger presented respondents with essentially the same policy positions and changed the leader attached to them. Carney came out ahead every time, with advantages ranging from nine to 14 percentage points. The Aug. 1–3 polling of 1,514 Canadians arrives with the Liberals at 46% among decided voters, compared with 34% for the Conservatives, while Carney maintains a 55% approval rating. That makes the findings as much a test of political credibility as ideology.</p>
<h2>Major Projects Give Carney a 13-Point Advantage</h2>
<p>One of Poilievre’s most consistent political arguments has been that Canada needs to build faster, yet Léger found Carney holding the stronger hand when that broad objective was tested. Sixty-four per cent of respondents asked about Carney trusted him on dramatically speeding up major infrastructure and energy projects, compared with 51% of those asked about Poilievre. That 13-point difference is significant because the proposition itself is hardly traditional left-versus-right territory: both leaders were attached to the same pro-development statement.</p>
<p>Carney also has something tangible behind that perception. His government created the Major Projects Office to coordinate large nation-building investments and streamline federal decision-making. By May, Ottawa said the office was advancing 22 projects and broader strategies representing more than $126 billion in potential investment, spanning nuclear power, LNG, critical minerals and transportation. For businesses waiting years for permits or communities hoping a mine, port or transmission line finally moves forward, that turns an abstract argument about “getting things built” into a measurable political test. The challenge for Poilievre is that a message long associated with Conservatives is currently generating more trust when Carney delivers it.</p>
<h2>Carney Even Leads on Pipelines and Expanding Oil Production</h2>
<p>The pipeline result may be the most politically uncomfortable finding for Conservatives. Léger asked whether Canada should increase energy production and build new pipelines so more oil and natural gas can reach markets beyond the United States. Carney drew 62% trust, compared with 51% for Poilievre—an 11-point advantage on an issue that traditionally gives Conservatives an opportunity to attack Liberal energy policy.</p>
<p>The political environment has changed substantially. Ottawa and Alberta are now advancing a proposed west coast oil pipeline that would be capable of carrying roughly one million barrels per day from the Edmonton region to a deepwater port in British Columbia, with Asian export markets a central objective. The proposal remains at an early stage and still faces consultation and regulatory steps, but its existence gives Carney greater room to present himself as both pro-development and pro-diversification. Ottawa has tied that effort to the Pathways carbon-capture project and a broader emissions-reduction agreement with Alberta’s oil sands producers. In practical terms, Carney is attempting to occupy territory once considered almost automatically Conservative: more production, more pipelines and less dependence on the U.S. market.</p>
<h2>Immigration Produces Carney’s Strongest Trust Rating</h2>
<p>Immigration produced Carney’s highest score of the six comparisons. Léger found 69% trusted him when presented with a policy of allowing fewer immigrants into Canada to reduce pressure on health care and housing. Poilievre received 56% on the identical proposition. That 13-point advantage is notable because immigration levels became one of the Trudeau government’s biggest political vulnerabilities and helped fuel Conservative criticism of Ottawa’s handling of housing and public services.</p>
<p>Carney has inherited that record, but federal policy has moved sharply toward lower intake. Canada’s current plan targets 380,000 permanent residents in 2026, while the target for new temporary workers and students has been cut to 385,000. Ottawa is also aiming to reduce temporary residents to less than 5% of Canada’s population by the end of 2027. The change is already visible in demographic data: Statistics Canada estimated 2.68 million non-permanent residents at the beginning of 2026, down from a peak above 3.1 million in October 2024. For families confronting expensive housing or crowded services, the distinction between promises and actual population flows will ultimately matter more than polling. For now, however, Carney is winning the credibility contest.</p>
<h2>Trump-Era Trade Talks Are Carney’s Weakest Issue—and He Still Leads</h2>
<p>Canada-U.S. negotiations produced the weakest scores for both leaders. Léger asked whether Canada should negotiate a trade agreement with the United States even if Ottawa has to make concessions. Only 50% trusted Carney on that approach, but Poilievre performed considerably worse at 38%. Carney therefore maintained a 12-point advantage even on the file where half of those asked about him withheld their trust.</p>
<p>The wording matters. Léger was not simply asking which politician Canadians trust to confront Donald Trump. It tested acceptance of the harder political reality that an agreement with Washington might require Canada to give something up. That question has become increasingly relevant. Canadian and U.S. officials are engaged in intensive negotiations ahead of an Aug. 19 deadline for additional American tariffs, while Ottawa is seeking relief from existing sectoral duties and progress toward a modernized CUSMA. Reuters has reported that possible concessions under discussion include autos and dairy-related issues in exchange for tariff relief. That leaves Carney balancing two conflicting demands: reaching an economically useful agreement without appearing to surrender Canadian interests.</p>
<h2>Defence and the Arctic Give Carney His Biggest Lead</h2>
<p>Carney’s largest advantage comes on military spending and Arctic security. Sixty per cent trusted him when presented with the argument that Canada needs to spend significantly more on defence to meet NATO commitments and strengthen its Arctic presence. Poilievre received 46%, producing a 14-point gap—the widest of the six comparisons examined by Léger.</p>
<p>That advantage arrives after one of the fastest shifts in Canadian defence policy in decades. Ottawa announced more than $9 billion in additional defence investment for 2025-26, and the Department of National Defence confirmed in March that Canada had reached NATO’s benchmark of spending 2% of GDP on defence. The alliance has since moved toward a much larger long-term commitment: NATO members agreed to work toward total defence and security-related investment equal to 5% of GDP by 2035, including at least 3.5% for core defence requirements. Canada has also put more attention on Arctic surveillance, infrastructure and military capabilities. These are expensive commitments, but they have transformed defence from a perennial Canadian weakness into one of Carney’s strongest leadership files in the Léger numbers.</p>
<h2>Carney Also Wins the Energy-versus-Climate Balancing Act</h2>
<p>The smallest gap between the leaders still favours Carney. Léger tested whether Canada can expand its energy sector while continuing to make meaningful progress on climate commitments by working with industry on technologies such as carbon capture and storage. Carney received 56% trust against Poilievre’s 47%, a nine-point advantage. It is a revealing result because the proposition attempts to bridge two constituencies that Canadian politics has frequently treated as opponents: voters who want stronger energy development and those who want emissions reductions.</p>
<p>Carney’s emerging energy strategy is built around that same bargain. Ottawa’s agreement with Alberta and major oil sands producers calls for expanded production and market access alongside a shared objective of cutting annual emissions by 16 million tonnes through the Pathways strategy and other measures. Federal policy also provides substantial tax support for carbon capture investment. The stakes remain enormous: Canada emitted 685 megatonnes of greenhouse gases in 2024, about 10% below 2005 levels, while its 2030 target requires a 40% to 45% reduction below 2005. Whether technology can reconcile those goals with growing production remains contested. Politically, however, Léger finds more Canadians willing to trust Carney with the balancing act.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Election.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/ottawa-puts-100m-behind-canadian-steel-as-trump-tariff-fight-squeezes-producers/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa Puts $100M Behind Canadian Steel as Trump Tariff Fight Squeezes Producers]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 10 Aug 26 10:32:12 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/ottawa-puts-100m-behind-canadian-steel-as-trump-tariff-fight-squeezes-producers/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s steel industry is being pushed into a rapid rewiring of a business model built around easy access to the]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s steel industry is being pushed into a rapid rewiring of a business model built around easy access to the United States. Ottawa is now putting $100 million behind that shift, offering manufacturers rebates covering half the cost of moving eligible Canadian steel across the country by rail or ship.</p>
<p>The measure arrives as U.S. tariffs continue to restrict one of Canadian steelmakers’ most important markets, forcing producers to find customers closer to home. For Ottawa, the challenge is no longer simply cushioning companies against a trade dispute. It is creating enough Canadian demand, infrastructure spending and competitive transportation options to keep mills running while negotiations with Washington remain uncertain. Recent financial results from major producers show why the government believes time matters.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Cutting the Cost of Moving Canadian Steel</h2>
<p>The new federal program will reimburse manufacturers for 50% of eligible freight costs when Canadian-origin steel is transported by rail or marine shipping to another destination in Canada. Ottawa has committed $100 million to the initiative, which opened for applications on August 10 and is scheduled to operate until next summer or until the available funding is exhausted.</p>
<p>Individual recipients can receive as much as $50 million cumulatively, making the program potentially significant for companies moving large quantities of steel over Canada’s vast distances. The underlying idea is straightforward: a manufacturer in one province should have a stronger financial incentive to source steel from another Canadian province instead of purchasing foreign material. Ottawa had promised reduced interprovincial freight rates months earlier, but the new rebate puts concrete funding behind that strategy as steelmakers increasingly search for domestic customers.</p>
<h2>Trump’s Tariffs Have Rewritten the Industry’s Economics</h2>
<p>The pressure behind Ottawa’s move can be traced directly to Washington. President Donald Trump’s administration raised Section 232 tariffs on major steel and aluminum imports to 50% in 2025 and subsequently strengthened the metals tariff system. Core steel products entering the United States can still face duties of 50%, while different rates apply to certain derivative products depending on their classification.</p>
<p>For Canadian producers accustomed to treating the border almost like an internal supply route, that has dramatically changed the economics of shipping south. A steel order that once moved into an integrated North American market can become far less competitive after a large duty is added at the border. The result is not simply reduced exports. Companies must redirect production, renegotiate customer relationships and potentially operate plants below their preferred capacity while searching for replacement demand in Canada or other international markets.</p>
<h2>Canada’s Steel Industry Has a Lot Riding on the Fight</h2>
<p>Steel may appear to be one industrial sector among many, but its footprint extends well beyond the mills themselves. Federal figures put direct Canadian steel employment at roughly 23,000 jobs, while the industry feeds into the much larger fabricated-metals sector and supplies construction, transportation, manufacturing, infrastructure, energy and defence projects across the country.</p>
<p>Its dependence on the American market made the tariff shock particularly difficult. Before the latest trade disruptions, Canadian producers exported slightly more than half of their annual steel output, and industry figures indicate that more than 90% of those exports went to U.S. buyers in 2024. That concentration made commercial sense when cross-border trade was relatively open. Under a 50% tariff environment, however, the same integration becomes a vulnerability. Ottawa is effectively trying to replace part of that lost north-south trade with more east-west Canadian commerce.</p>
<h2>Algoma Shows What the Tariff Squeeze Looks Like</h2>
<p>Few examples illustrate the disruption more clearly than Algoma Steel in Sault Ste. Marie. The company reported a $96 million net loss for its second quarter of 2026, although that was an improvement from the $110.6 million loss recorded during the same period a year earlier. Algoma also reported $18.7 million in direct tariff costs during the quarter.</p>
<p>More revealing was where its steel was going. Quarterly shipments fell to roughly 181,500 tons from about 472,000 tons a year earlier as Algoma transitioned its operations and redirected its business. U.S. shipments represented only 23% of the total, down from 54% one year earlier and well below the company’s historical range. Management has increasingly emphasized a Canada-focused strategy built around steel plate for infrastructure, construction and defence. That is precisely the type of domestic pivot Ottawa’s freight rebates are designed to support.</p>
<h2>Freight Costs Can Decide Whether Domestic Steel Wins</h2>
<p>Canada’s geography creates an unusual problem for a policy built around replacing imports with domestic production. Steel made in Ontario or Quebec may have to travel hundreds or thousands of kilometres to reach construction sites, fabricators and manufacturers elsewhere in the country. Even when Canadian steel is available, transportation costs can influence whether a buyer chooses it over imported alternatives arriving through established supply chains.</p>
<p>Ottawa originally proposed working with major railways to provide a 50% freight-rate reduction on interprovincial steel and lumber shipments. That approach drew criticism from maritime interests that argued marine transportation should not be excluded. The program announced in August includes eligible shipments by both rail and ship. That broader approach matters for heavy commodities such as steel, where transportation can represent a meaningful component of the delivered price. The rebate therefore operates less like a traditional bailout and more like an incentive to reconfigure Canadian supply chains.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Also Trying to Create Buyers at Home</h2>
<p>Cheaper transportation alone will not solve the industry’s problem if there are not enough domestic orders. That is why the freight program sits alongside Ottawa’s Buy Canadian procurement strategy. Federal rules introduced in late 2025 gave Canadian businesses and Canadian content priority in major government purchasing while imposing specific domestic-material requirements for certain large construction and defence projects.</p>
<p>Steel is central to that policy. Where the rules apply and Canadian supply is available, qualifying projects can be required to use steel manufactured or processed in Canada rather than material that is merely sold by a Canadian distributor. The government is effectively using its purchasing power to create a larger guaranteed market for domestic production. Bridges, defence equipment, public buildings and major infrastructure can consume enormous quantities of metal. Combining that demand with reduced transportation costs gives steelmakers another route to replace at least part of the business lost across the U.S. border.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Trying to Prevent Foreign Steel From Filling the Gap</h2>
<p>There is another complication. When the United States restricts imported steel, material that might otherwise have entered the American market can be redirected elsewhere. Ottawa has repeatedly warned that global excess capacity and changing trade flows could leave Canadian producers competing against a surge of foreign steel at the same moment their own U.S. sales are declining.</p>
<p>Canada has responded by tightening tariff-rate quotas. For countries without a Canadian free-trade agreement, current quota levels are based on 20% of 2024 import volumes. For most free-trade partners outside CUSMA, the level is 75%. Steel arriving beyond those limits can face a 50% surtax, while the United States and Mexico remain exempt from the quota system under existing CUSMA arrangements. Ottawa has also imposed tariffs on selected steel derivative products. Together, the measures are intended to reserve more Canadian demand for domestic mills while discouraging trade diversion.</p>
<h2>The Bigger Prize Is Still a Deal With Washington</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s $100 million freight program can improve domestic competitiveness, but it cannot recreate the enormous American market. That makes negotiations with Washington the most important variable hanging over the industry. Canadian and U.S. officials have been holding intensive talks as the Trump administration prepares another round of 50% tariffs on additional Canadian products scheduled for August 19.</p>
<p>Recent negotiations have included the possibility of reducing existing U.S. tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum in exchange for Canadian movement on American trade demands. Reported issues include automobiles, dairy market access and the return of U.S. alcohol to provincial store shelves. None of those potential concessions guarantees an agreement, and some involve provincial as well as federal decisions. Until Washington provides durable tariff relief, Ottawa appears to be preparing Canadian steelmakers for a world in which relying overwhelmingly on U.S. customers is no longer considered a safe strategy.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/08/shutterstock_2726446085.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/taste-of-the-danforth-draws-huge-crowds-despite-heightened-security-fears/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Taste of the Danforth Draws Huge Crowds Despite Heightened Security Fears]]></title>
      <pubDate>Sun, 09 Aug 26 11:00:18 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/taste-of-the-danforth-draws-huge-crowds-despite-heightened-security-fears/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Bianca]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <description><![CDATA[Toronto’s Danforth was crowded again Saturday with the familiar signs of a major summer weekend: long food lines, packed sidewalks,]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Toronto’s Danforth was crowded again Saturday with the familiar signs of a major summer weekend: long food lines, packed sidewalks, live music and families moving between vendors. Yet the return of Taste of the Danforth carried an unusual undercurrent. A deadly shooting at another Toronto street festival less than a month earlier had heightened anxiety around large public gatherings and prompted organizers and police to strengthen security arrangements.</p>
<p>Despite those concerns, thousands poured into Greektown on August 8. Officers, firefighters, paramedics and private security personnel were visible throughout the festival area. The turnout suggested that safety fears had not erased Toronto’s appetite for one of its best-known cultural celebrations, even as both organizers and attendees acknowledged that crowded events now demand greater vigilance.</p>
<h2>Crowds Return to a Festival Toronto Had Been Missing</h2>
<p>Saturday offered the clearest indication that Taste of the Danforth had retained its drawing power after a two-year absence. Thousands filled Danforth Avenue on the festival’s second day, with visitors forming substantial lines at food stands and gathering around stages for music and dance performances. The atmosphere resembled the bustling summer weekends that established the event as one of Toronto’s largest street celebrations.</p>
<p>The scale matters because the festival had not operated in 2024 or 2025. Organizers have said historic editions attracted more than 1.5 million attendees over a weekend, while Toronto police projected approximately 1.6 million visitors for the 2026 edition. Those figures remain forecasts or historical benchmarks rather than a confirmed final total for this year. Still, Saturday’s observed crowds showed that the long break had not eliminated demand. For businesses along the Danforth, the sight of packed pedestrian traffic represented a particularly important comeback.</p>
<h2>Another Festival’s Deadly Shooting Changed the Mood</h2>
<p>The heightened concern surrounding Taste of the Danforth did not emerge in isolation. On July 11, gunfire erupted during Toronto’s Salsa on St. Clair festival, where thousands had gathered for an evening of music, food and community celebrations. Seven people were shot. Shaquan Quashie, 25, and Cesar Vernaza, 20, died, while five other victims survived, some with injuries police described as life-altering.</p>
<p>Toronto police announced a major development on August 7, the opening day of Taste of the Danforth. Two 18-year-old Toronto men had been arrested and each charged with two counts of first-degree murder and five counts of attempted murder, among other allegations. Police said investigators believe the July attack was targeted. The timing inevitably placed public-event security back in the spotlight just as crowds were arriving in Greektown. For festivalgoers, the issue was no longer an abstract possibility but something Toronto had experienced only weeks earlier.</p>
<h2>Security Became Far More Visible Along the Danforth</h2>
<p>Organizers responded with a security operation involving Toronto police, emergency services and private personnel. Festival representatives said preparations included crowd-management planning and coordination among agencies responsible for keeping the large pedestrian zone functioning safely. Toronto police separately announced that an increased police presence would remain in place throughout the weekend and encouraged visitors with concerns to approach officers.</p>
<p>That presence was visible Saturday. Police officers, Toronto Fire and paramedic personnel and private security guards patrolled the stretch of Danforth Avenue between Broadview and Jones avenues. The arrangement reflected the challenges of protecting an event where extremely large numbers of people can be concentrated inside a relatively narrow commercial corridor. Security at such gatherings is not limited to preventing intentional violence; organizers also have to consider emergency access, crowd movement and the ability of first responders to reach people quickly. The result was heightened protection without turning the festival into a closed or heavily restricted event.</p>
<h2>Visitors Balanced Caution With a Desire to Participate</h2>
<p>For some attendees, the recent violence was impossible to ignore. Festivalgoer Shaleena Clements told The Canadian Press that the Salsa on St. Clair shooting had made her more conscious of her surroundings at crowded events. She said she was paying attention to what was happening around her in a way she might not have before, but did not want fear to take away the enjoyment of participating in a public celebration.</p>
<p>Others expressed similar confidence. Dadir Yusuf, who travelled from Oshawa with his girlfriend, said the security question had crossed his mind, yet the lively atmosphere helped him feel comfortable. Another attendee, Saqeeb Hassan, said he continued to feel safe attending large events. The crowd even included people travelling specifically for the festival, including visitors from Midland, Ontario. Their presence illustrated an important part of Saturday’s story: concern remained real, but for many people it did not outweigh the desire to gather, eat and celebrate.</p>
<h2>The Comeback Required Government Help</h2>
<p>Taste of the Danforth’s return was not guaranteed. After the long-running celebration disappeared from Toronto’s summer calendar for two years, public funding became an important part of bringing it back. The City of Toronto and Ontario government each committed $200,000 to the 2026 festival, providing a combined $400,000 aimed at supporting the event and the businesses, tourism operators and neighbourhood activity surrounding it.</p>
<p>Federal support followed shortly before opening weekend. On August 5, Canadian Heritage announced up to another $100,000 through the Multiculturalism and Anti-Racism Program, bringing announced federal, provincial and municipal commitments to as much as $500,000. The government support highlighted how complicated major street festivals have become to operate. Beyond entertainment and food vendors, organizers must cover infrastructure, public-safety measures, logistics and other rising costs. For Greektown businesses, the investment was therefore about more than staging a three-day celebration; it helped restore one of the neighbourhood’s most important annual opportunities to attract customers from across the region.</p>
<h2>Managing More Than a Million Potential Visitors Is a Major Operation</h2>
<p>Police preparations reflected the extraordinary scale associated with the festival. Toronto police said approximately 1.6 million people were expected across the August 7–9 weekend. Earlier, the City of Toronto had used a more conservative projection of at least one million visitors. Neither figure should be confused with an audited 2026 attendance total, but both illustrate why transportation and crowd-management planning were central to preparations.</p>
<p>Danforth Avenue was closed to vehicle traffic between Broadview and Jones avenues beginning at 10 a.m. Friday, with the closure scheduled to remain until 3 a.m. Monday. Police also warned motorists about delays, while TTC routes serving the area faced diversions. The official festival schedule ran from Friday evening through Sunday night. Transforming a major Toronto roadway into a dense pedestrian festival for that length of time requires space for vendors and stages while maintaining routes for emergency response. This year, those logistical demands carried additional significance because public safety was already at the forefront of visitors’ minds.</p>
<h2>Greek Traditions Remain Central, but the Menu Has Expanded</h2>
<p>Food remained the strongest magnet. Festival spokesperson Howard Litchman said more than 100 restaurants were offering food representing 24 different ethnic cuisines during the three-day event. Traditional Greek favourites such as souvlaki and spanakopita remained prominent, but the broader range reflected how both the Danforth and Toronto have changed during the festival’s three-decade history.</p>
<p>The GreekTown on the Danforth BIA describes Greek heritage as the celebration’s foundation while emphasizing its increasingly multicultural identity. Beyond food, the 2026 program included live music, cultural performances, family activities, sports zones and free entertainment. That mixture helps explain why the festival can attract people who have no direct connection to the neighbourhood’s Greek community. For longtime residents, the weekend remains a celebration of a community that helped shape the Danforth. For newer visitors, it functions as something wider: an accessible Toronto street festival where food provides the entry point to several cultures sharing the same stretch of pavement.</p>
<h2>The Weekend Is Becoming a Test of Toronto’s Festival Resilience</h2>
<p>Taste of the Danforth’s comeback carries significance beyond one neighbourhood. Toronto says nearly 300 festivals take place across the city annually, supporting restaurants, retailers, artists and cultural workers. Large gatherings are therefore part of the city’s cultural identity as well as its visitor economy. The July shooting demonstrated how quickly violence at one event can affect perceptions surrounding other celebrations weeks later.</p>
<p>Saturday’s turnout showed another side of that equation. Crowds returned even with more officers on the street and recent violence still fresh in public memory. That does not mean the safety concerns disappeared, nor does a busy weekend guarantee that future festivals will face fewer challenges. Instead, Taste of the Danforth demonstrated the increasingly difficult balance event organizers must strike: maintain the open, spontaneous atmosphere that makes a street festival appealing while preparing seriously for emergencies. On the Danforth, at least through Saturday night, heightened vigilance and public enthusiasm were able to exist side by side.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/08/Danforth-Avenue-in-the-Greektown-district-of-Toronto-during-the-Toronto-24th-annual-Taste-of-the-Danforth-street-festival-.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canada-weighs-ending-u-s-booze-bans-as-ottawa-hunts-for-trump-tariff-relief/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Weighs Ending U.S. Booze Bans as Ottawa Hunts for Trump Tariff Relief]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 26 15:29:34 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canada-weighs-ending-u-s-booze-bans-as-ottawa-hunts-for-trump-tariff-relief/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s politically charged boycott of American alcohol may be turning into something more valuable to Ottawa: a bargaining chip. Canadian]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s politically charged boycott of American alcohol may be turning into something more valuable to Ottawa: a bargaining chip.</p>
<p>Canadian and U.S. negotiators are discussing a possible package that could see Ottawa and the provinces address several long-running American complaints—including restrictions on U.S. alcohol—in exchange for relief from a new round of Trump administration tariffs. The talks remain fluid, and no agreement has been reached. But the discussion represents a significant shift after more than a year in which bottles of American wine, bourbon and other products disappeared from liquor-store shelves across much of Canada. What began as retaliation for U.S. tariffs is now sitting directly inside a much larger negotiation involving automobiles, government purchasing rules, dairy access and billions of dollars in cross-border trade.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Exploring a Concession-for-Tariff-Relief Deal</h2>
<p>Canada and the United States have moved beyond broad political statements and into more detailed bargaining. According to reporting on the negotiations, officials have exchanged written positions and discussed a potential arrangement under which Canada would address several American trade complaints while Washington provided at least partial tariff relief. Canadian officials described an August 6 meeting with U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer in Washington as constructive and detailed.</p>
<p>The potential concessions reportedly include removing Canadian retaliatory tariffs on some U.S. goods, addressing restrictions keeping American alcohol out of provincial distribution systems, easing procurement measures that disadvantage U.S. companies and resolving disagreements involving dairy import quotas. Canada, meanwhile, is pushing Washington to eliminate its newly announced 50% duties on approximately US$20 billion worth of Canadian imports and provide relief from other sectoral tariffs. Prime Minister Mark Carney’s government has signalled that it wants a broader agreement rather than a collection of small deals that leave major industries exposed.</p>
<h2>The Booze Boycott Has Become a Surprisingly Powerful Pressure Point</h2>
<p>American alcohol was initially pulled from Canadian shelves as a highly visible response to U.S. tariffs. The economic impact turned out to be substantial. According to the U.S. government, Canadian imports of American alcoholic beverages fell by approximately 81% when comparing March 2025 through February 2026 with the same period one year earlier. The value dropped from roughly US$718 million to US$137 million—a decline of about US$582 million.</p>
<p>Ontario demonstrates why the measure carried so much weight. When the LCBO stopped buying American products in March 2025, it said its system previously handled as much as C$965 million in annual U.S. alcohol sales and listed more than 3,600 products originating from 35 states. Because the LCBO also serves as a major wholesaler, the restrictions reached beyond government liquor stores. Restaurants, grocery stores and other licensed retailers could no longer order new American inventory through the provincial system. That transformed a consumer boycott into an unusually concentrated form of trade pressure.</p>
<h2>Trump’s New 50% Tariffs Have Raised the Cost of the Standoff</h2>
<p>The urgency increased dramatically on July 20, when President Donald Trump invoked Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930 to announce additional 50% duties on a collection of Canadian products. The measures are scheduled to take effect August 19 and cover approximately US$20 billion in Canadian imports. Washington specifically cited Canadian treatment of American automobiles, alcohol and dairy products when explaining the action.</p>
<p>That matters because the latest duties are not simply another chapter in the original tariff dispute. The White House has explicitly connected its new trade penalties to measures Canada itself adopted in response to earlier American tariffs. In effect, retaliation has created another justification for retaliation. Canadian officials are therefore trying to break a cycle in which each new countermeasure gives the other government another reason to escalate. Alcohol is particularly useful in that negotiation because reversing liquor restrictions could provide Washington with a visible win without requiring Ottawa to immediately dismantle more politically sensitive Canadian industries.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Cannot Simply Put American Bottles Back on Every Shelf</h2>
<p>There is a complication sitting at the centre of the negotiations: much of Canada’s alcohol distribution system is controlled provincially. Federal trade negotiators can negotiate with Washington, but provincial governments and their liquor agencies ultimately exercise enormous influence over which products are purchased and distributed within their jurisdictions.</p>
<p>Federal law itself reflects that structure. Canada’s Importation of Intoxicating Liquors Act generally requires alcohol imported into a province to be purchased or received through the provincial government or an authorized provincial agency. That means Ottawa would likely need cooperation from premiers if restoring U.S. products became part of a larger trade settlement. The situation also varies across Canada. Alberta and Saskatchewan moved earlier than most jurisdictions to reopen access to American alcohol, while restrictions remained elsewhere. As a result, a Canadian promise made at the negotiating table would need to translate into several provincial decisions before American producers actually regained broad access to the Canadian market.</p>
<h2>Doug Ford Could Become One of the Hardest Premiers to Bring Onside</h2>
<p>Ontario is particularly important because of the scale of the LCBO and Premier Doug Ford’s increasingly firm position on the dispute. Even after the White House cited Canadian alcohol restrictions when announcing its latest tariff action, Ford said in July that Ontario would not simply restore American products while U.S. tariffs remained in place. His position has effectively been that Washington must move first—or at minimum provide something substantial in return.</p>
<p>That creates an interesting political tension for Ottawa. Carney has previously indicated that liquor restrictions could be resolved quickly if the United States made progress on Canadian concerns such as tariffs affecting steel, aluminum, automobiles and forestry products. Ford’s position is not necessarily incompatible with that approach, because both governments are demanding reciprocal action. But the premier has invested significant political capital in portraying the alcohol restrictions as leverage. Asking Ontario to give them up for modest tariff relief rather than a meaningful agreement could therefore generate resistance, especially if major manufacturing industries remain exposed afterward.</p>
<h2>Alcohol Is Only One Piece of a Much Larger American Wish List</h2>
<p>Even if the liquor dispute were settled tomorrow, several harder problems would remain. Canada continues to impose 25% retaliatory tariffs on certain U.S.-made automobiles. Those measures date to April 2025 and apply to non-CUSMA-compliant vehicles as well as the non-Canadian and non-Mexican content of qualifying U.S.-assembled vehicles. Washington wants those counter-tariffs addressed as part of the negotiations.</p>
<p>Government procurement is another source of friction. Ontario’s current Buy Ontario rules restrict access by many U.S. businesses to provincial public-sector contracts while prioritizing Ontario and Canadian suppliers. Ottawa has also strengthened federal Buy Canadian procurement policies. Dairy remains even more politically sensitive. The United States has repeatedly challenged Canada’s administration of tariff-rate quotas under the continental trade agreement and argues that American producers do not receive adequate market access. Canada, meanwhile, has historically treated its supply-management system as a major domestic policy priority. Alcohol may therefore be among the easier concessions in a package filled with significantly tougher decisions.</p>
<h2>American Producers Have Already Paid a Price for Losing Canada</h2>
<p>The dispute has left measurable damage on the American beverage industry. The Distilled Spirits Council of the United States reported that total U.S. spirits exports declined 3.8% in 2025 to US$2.37 billion, pointing to lost Canadian business as one of the major factors. Earlier trade data showed particularly steep reductions after provincial restrictions began, while American producers suddenly found themselves locked out of what had been one of their closest and most dependable export markets.</p>
<p>Canadian shelves did not simply stay empty. Products from Canada and other countries moved into space previously occupied by American brands. U.S. government data indicate that alcohol imports from countries including Chile, Japan, Argentina, Ireland, New Zealand and Australia increased during the period in which American imports collapsed. That creates a longer-term challenge even if governments reach a deal. Distribution relationships change, retailers discover substitutes and suppliers compete for newly available shelf space. Restoring legal access to the Canadian market would therefore not automatically restore the sales volumes American companies enjoyed before the trade confrontation began.</p>
<h2>A Booze Deal Could Reveal Whether a Bigger Canada-U.S. Agreement Is Possible</h2>
<p>The alcohol dispute has become a useful test of whether Canada and the United States can move from confrontation to reciprocal concessions. Carney has previously said issues such as which alcohol appears on Canadian shelves could be dealt with quickly if progress occurs elsewhere. Recent talks suggest negotiators are now examining exactly that type of exchange.</p>
<p>The stakes extend far beyond liquor stores. Canadian merchandise exports to the United States were worth about C$564.6 billion in 2025 despite declining 5.3% from the previous year. The two economies remain deeply connected through manufacturing, energy, agriculture and integrated supply chains. A settlement over American alcohol would therefore matter less because of the bottles themselves than because of what it could signal: Washington accepting meaningful Canadian concessions in return for measurable tariff relief. If negotiators can establish that formula before the new duties take effect on August 19, it could provide a framework for tackling automobiles and other sectoral disputes. If they cannot, one of North America’s largest trading relationships could remain trapped in another round of escalation.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Low-Alcohol-fruit-drink.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/doug-ford-presses-carney-to-make-10%c2%a2-federal-gas-tax-cut-permanent-before-labour-day/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Doug Ford Presses Carney to Make 10¢ Federal Gas Tax Cut Permanent Before Labour Day]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 26 14:43:57 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/doug-ford-presses-carney-to-make-10%c2%a2-federal-gas-tax-cut-permanent-before-labour-day/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[With Labour Day now only a month away, a temporary break at Canadian gas pumps is turning into a fresh]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>With Labour Day now only a month away, a temporary break at Canadian gas pumps is turning into a fresh federal-provincial affordability fight. Ontario Premier Doug Ford is urging Prime Minister Mark Carney to extend Ottawa’s suspension of the federal fuel excise tax until at least January 1, 2027, or make the relief permanent. The measure currently removes 10 cents per litre from the federal excise tax on gasoline and four cents per litre from diesel, but it is scheduled to expire after September 7.</p>
<p>Ford is framing the decision as a test of whether governments will keep costs down while families and businesses absorb high fuel prices, inflation pressures and uncertainty from U.S. tariffs. Ottawa, meanwhile, designed the tax holiday as temporary emergency relief rather than a permanent rewrite of federal fuel taxation.</p>
<h2>Ford Puts a Clear Deadline in Front of Carney</h2>
<p>Ford’s request puts a clear deadline in front of the Carney government. In a letter released August 7, the Ontario premier argued that the tax suspension has offered meaningful relief during a period of elevated living costs and trade uncertainty. His immediate proposal is not necessarily permanent abolition: Ford asked Ottawa to keep the suspension in place until at least January 1, 2027. But he also went further, saying the federal government could follow Ontario’s lead and remove the tax indefinitely. That makes the dispute about more than the price posted on gas-station signs. It is also about whether a crisis measure should become a lasting affordability policy.</p>
<p>The timing gives the request political force. The federal suspension runs through Labour Day, September 7, meaning the statutory tax is set to return the next day unless Ottawa changes the law again. For a driver, the issue is easy to understand because the tax is charged by the litre. For governments, the calculation is harder: extending the holiday means keeping billions of dollars of projected tax relief in place, while ending it would restore a highly visible charge just as Canadians return to work and school after summer.</p>
<h2>What the 10-Cent Federal Tax Actually Is</h2>
<p>The federal tax at the centre of Ford’s demand is the fuel excise tax, not the consumer carbon tax that Ottawa set to zero in 2025. Under the Excise Tax Act, the normal federal rate is 10 cents per litre on unleaded gasoline and four cents per litre on diesel. The levy is generally paid earlier in the supply chain by a manufacturer, producer, wholesaler or importer, but it is embedded in the retail price consumers see at the pump. That structure is why suspending the tax can translate quickly into a lower per-litre cost even though motorists do not pay a separate “excise tax” line on a receipt.</p>
<p>Parliament has already legislated the current break. Bill C-30, which received royal assent on June 19, temporarily sets the applicable rates to zero for fuel delivered or imported after April 19 and before September 8, 2026. The federal government estimated the measure would provide more than $2.4 billion in relief. Unless Ottawa acts again, the full 10-cent gasoline rate and four-cent diesel rate return on September 8, creating a clean before-and-after date that makes the policy unusually visible to households and businesses.</p>
<h2>Carney Introduced the Cut During an Energy Shock</h2>
<p>Carney originally presented the tax holiday as an emergency bridge through a global energy shock, not as a permanent tax philosophy. When the suspension was announced in April, Ottawa pointed to conflict and supply disruptions in the Middle East as the reason gasoline and diesel costs were climbing. The government said the temporary measure would help households while also lowering operating costs for trucking, agriculture, food, housing, construction and delivery businesses. It also suspended the excise tax on aviation fuels during the same period, underscoring that the policy was designed around a broad fuel-price shock rather than just commuter frustration.</p>
<p>The inflation data show why Ottawa felt pressure to act. Statistics Canada reported that gasoline prices were 33.2% higher in May 2026 than a year earlier, with uncertainty around the Strait of Hormuz contributing to the increase. By June, gasoline prices were still 20.5% above year-earlier levels even after falling sharply from May. Headline inflation eased to 2.8% in June from 3.2% in May, but gasoline remained one of the most volatile items in the consumer basket. That backdrop strengthens Ford’s affordability argument, while also raising the question of whether a temporary shock still justifies permanent tax relief.</p>
<h2>Ontario Has Already Made Its Own Gas Tax Cut Permanent</h2>
<p>Ford’s strongest political argument is that Ontario has already done what he is asking Ottawa to consider. The province first cut its gasoline tax by 5.7 cents per litre and its diesel tax by 5.3 cents per litre on July 1, 2022. After extending those reductions several times, Ontario made them permanent effective July 1, 2025. The provincial gasoline and diesel tax rates are now both nine cents per litre. In practical terms, Ontario motorists entered the 2026 federal tax holiday with a provincial fuel-tax reduction already locked in, giving Ford a concrete example to point to rather than a hypothetical promise.</p>
<p>Ontario’s 2026 budget says the provincial reductions have delivered about $2.1 billion in gasoline and fuel-tax relief since 2022 and save households roughly $115 per year on average. Those are provincial government estimates, but they show the scale of the policy Ford has embraced. They also explain his language about Ottawa “matching” Ontario’s ambition. If the federal suspension ends, Ontario’s nine-cent provincial rate remains in place. If Ottawa makes its own 10-cent gasoline suspension permanent, drivers in Ontario would effectively keep both the provincial and federal reductions that have shaped pump prices over the past year.</p>
<h2>What 10 Cents a Litre Means for a Driver</h2>
<p>For households, the appeal of a 10-cent-per-litre cut is its simplicity. A 50-litre fill-up carries a $5 difference before considering the sales-tax interaction; 60 litres translates into $6. A household buying 1,000 litres of gasoline over a year would see a $100 difference from the federal excise tax alone if the full amount is reflected in pump prices. That may not transform a family budget, but the savings are immediate, recurring and easy to notice. Unlike an annual tax credit, the benefit appears every time fuel is purchased, which helps explain why fuel-tax changes attract outsized political attention.</p>
<p>There is also a tax-on-tax effect. Natural Resources Canada notes that GST or HST is applied to the federal excise tax and provincial road taxes as part of the taxable price of fuel. In Ontario, where the HST rate is 13%, the return of a 10-cent excise tax would therefore raise the tax-inclusive pump price by slightly more than 10 cents per litre if the underlying tax is fully passed through. Actual retail prices can still move by much more on any given day because crude costs, refining conditions, wholesale margins and retail margins fluctuate independently. The tax change sets one component of the price; it does not freeze the rest.</p>
<h2>Businesses Can Feel the Cut Differently</h2>
<p>The case for extending the holiday is not only about private vehicles. Ottawa’s own rationale in April emphasized businesses that burn large quantities of fuel, including truckers and companies in agriculture, construction, food distribution and delivery. The diesel suspension is smaller at four cents per litre, but high-volume commercial users can still see meaningful dollar savings. A fleet purchasing 1,000 litres of diesel avoids $40 in federal excise tax during the suspension; at 10,000 litres, the arithmetic becomes $400. For a single business those figures may be modest beside payroll, insurance and equipment costs, but across the economy they accumulate quickly.</p>
<p>That is why the federal government costed the overall temporary measure at more than $2.4 billion. Lower fuel costs can also matter indirectly because transportation is embedded in the price of moving groceries, building materials and other goods. Still, the size of any downstream price effect is much harder to isolate than the direct pump saving. Freight contracts, wages, vehicle efficiency, competition and commodity prices all influence what ultimately reaches consumers. Ford’s argument is strongest on the immediate tax reduction itself; broader claims that the policy will substantially lower the price of everything require more caution.</p>
<h2>Tax Cuts Do Not Control the Entire Pump Price</h2>
<p>One important question is whether the full tax cut actually reaches motorists. International evidence suggests that fuel-tax reductions can be passed through substantially, but not always uniformly. A 2023 Energy Economics study of Germany’s three-month 2022 fuel-tax reduction found the gasoline cut was fully passed on to consumers in its preferred estimates, while diesel showed at least partial pass-through and weakened later in the program. Other research using detailed station-level data has found high but incomplete average pass-through, with results varying across regions and over time.</p>
<p>That matters because governments can control the tax rate but not the entire retail price. If global oil prices rise at the same time a tax is cut, motorists may barely notice the relief even if the tax change is technically reflected in the pump price. The reverse is also true when commodity prices fall. Canada’s own 2026 experience has included unusually large swings in gasoline prices linked to geopolitical events, making simple before-and-after comparisons risky. The most defensible conclusion is that removing a 10-cent tax reduces one component of the price by 10 cents; it does not guarantee the posted price will remain 10 cents lower than it was weeks earlier.</p>
<h2>Economists See a Problem With Making Broad Relief Permanent</h2>
<p>The strongest economic criticism of making the cut permanent is that it is broad rather than targeted. The OECD’s 2026 assessment of Canada described the temporary federal fuel-tax suspension as relatively broad-based and insufficiently targeted, arguing that support could be better tailored to households and businesses most exposed to the energy shock. In a separate policy brief on the 2026 energy crisis, the OECD recommended clear sunset clauses, targeted help for vulnerable households and firms, and policies that preserve incentives to conserve energy. That framework cuts directly against the idea that an emergency tax holiday should automatically become permanent.</p>
<p>Distribution also matters. A per-litre tax cut gives more total dollars to people and businesses that purchase more fuel. That does not mean lower-income households never benefit; many depend on cars for work and have few transit alternatives. But it does mean the program cannot distinguish between a household struggling with commuting costs and a high-income household buying far more gasoline. Research on Germany’s 2022 discount found that a majority of estimated financial relief accrued to above-median-income households. The Canadian distribution could differ, but the study illustrates why economists often prefer targeted transfers when the goal is specifically to protect vulnerable families.</p>
<h2>Poilievre Is Adding Pressure From the Federal Opposition</h2>
<p>Ford is not the only politician pressing Carney on fuel taxes. Pierre Poilievre and the federal Conservatives had already called for a broader package earlier in the 2026 energy-price surge. Their proposal sought to suspend both the federal fuel excise tax and GST on gasoline and diesel through the end of 2026, while also permanently eliminating federal clean-fuel and industrial carbon-pricing measures. The Conservatives estimated their package would reduce gasoline costs by roughly 25 cents per litre and diesel by about 21 cents, although those figures combine several different policy changes rather than the excise tax alone.</p>
<p>Carney’s April decision narrowed some of the political distance by adopting the excise-tax suspension while leaving the GST and other measures in place. Now Ford is adding provincial pressure from a different angle: he is not merely asking for a longer summer holiday, but pointing to Ontario’s permanent nine-cent tax rate as a model. That alignment gives the federal government a difficult political choice. Letting the tax return allows Conservatives and Ford to characterize September 8 as a tax increase at the pump; extending it means accepting a larger fiscal cost and moving a temporary crisis response closer to permanent policy.</p>
<h2>September 8 Is Now the Date to Watch</h2>
<p>The next key date is September 8. Under the law already passed by Parliament, that is when the federal excise tax returns to 10 cents per litre on gasoline and four cents on diesel unless Ottawa intervenes. Ford’s preferred near-term compromise would push that date to at least January 1, 2027, buying several more months to see whether global fuel markets and inflation normalize. A permanent suspension would be a much bigger decision because the fiscal cost would continue beyond the current energy shock and would effectively rewrite a longstanding federal revenue source.</p>
<p>That leaves Carney with three broad paths: allow the tax to return as scheduled, extend the temporary suspension, or make some form of reduction permanent. The government’s own April language stressed that the measure was temporary and aimed at bridging short-term pressures, while Ford is arguing that affordability and tariff uncertainty have made the relief worth preserving. With gasoline still materially more expensive than a year ago in the latest Statistics Canada data, the issue is unlikely to fade before Labour Day. Whatever Ottawa chooses, motorists will see the result quickly because this is one tax decision that shows up litre by litre.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/Gasoline.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canada-adds-58000-private-sector-jobs-as-ottawas-public-sector-payroll-falls-by-27000/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Adds 58,000 Private-Sector Jobs as Ottawa’s Public-Sector Payroll Falls by 27,000]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 26 14:17:29 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canada-adds-58000-private-sector-jobs-as-ottawas-public-sector-payroll-falls-by-27000/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s labour market delivered one of its strongest surprises of 2026 in July, with employment rising by roughly 75,000 as]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s labour market delivered one of its strongest surprises of 2026 in July, with employment rising by roughly 75,000 as hiring shifted decisively toward the private sector. Private-sector employment climbed by about 58,000, while self-employment increased by another 44,000. At the same time, public-sector employment fell by 27,000.</p>
<p>The unemployment rate slipped to 6.4%, its lowest level in two years, adding to evidence that a labour market that struggled earlier in the year may finally be regaining traction. However, an important distinction sits behind the headline: Statistics Canada’s “public sector” includes far more than the federal government, covering provincial and municipal governments as well as publicly funded institutions such as hospitals, universities and schools.</p>
<h2>Private Hiring Becomes the Main Engine</h2>
<p>Canada added approximately 75,000 jobs in July, a 0.4% monthly increase that easily surpassed economists’ expectations. Analysts surveyed by Reuters had expected an increase of only about 16,500 positions. The employment rate also increased by 0.1 percentage points to 60.9%, giving the report considerably more strength than a headline employment number alone would suggest.</p>
<p>More important was where the growth happened. Private-sector employees increased by approximately 58,000, or 0.4%, while self-employment surged by about 44,000, or 1.6%. Those increases were partly offset by 27,000 fewer public-sector employees. For businesses and households wondering whether the economic recovery is translating into hiring outside government, that composition stands out. Since April, Statistics Canada estimates that private-sector employment has grown by approximately 146,000, while self-employment has risen by roughly 73,000. That makes July less of an isolated monthly spike and more consistent with a private-sector recovery that has been developing through the spring and early summer.</p>
<h2>The 27,000 Public-Sector Drop Is Broader Than Ottawa</h2>
<p>The decline of 27,000 public-sector employees will inevitably attract political attention, particularly as the federal government faces pressure to control spending. But the figure should not be interpreted as Ottawa eliminating 27,000 federal government positions. Statistics Canada uses a much wider definition of public-sector employment than the federal civil service alone.</p>
<p>Its classification includes employees working for federal, provincial, territorial, municipal and Indigenous public administrations. It also includes Crown corporations and publicly funded institutions such as hospitals, universities, schools and public libraries. A separate industry measure showed employment specifically in public administration falling by about 15,000 in July, considerably less than the overall 27,000 public-sector decline. The distinction matters because a nurse employed by a publicly funded hospital, for example, may fall into Statistics Canada’s public-sector category without working in government administration. Public-sector employment had already declined by approximately 31,000 in June, meaning July represented a second consecutive month of weakness in the category even as private-sector hiring strengthened.</p>
<h2>Unemployment Falls to a Two-Year Low</h2>
<p>Canada’s unemployment rate declined from 6.5% in June to 6.4% in July, marking its third consecutive monthly decline and bringing the rate to its lowest level since July 2024. That is a meaningful shift from April, when unemployment had reached 6.9% and concerns were growing that weak economic activity and trade uncertainty could produce a more prolonged deterioration in hiring.</p>
<p>The improvement was particularly visible among Canadians in their prime working years. Employment among people aged 25 to 54 increased by approximately 51,000 in July, including a gain of around 33,000 among women in that age group. The unemployment rate for core-aged women fell 0.3 percentage points to 5.2%. Youth unemployment, however, remained substantially higher at 12.6%, highlighting why the labour market can still feel difficult despite better national numbers. The participation rate also edged up to roughly 65.1%, meaning the decline in unemployment occurred while slightly more Canadians were participating in the labour force rather than simply because large numbers stopped looking for work.</p>
<h2>Full-Time Work Strengthens the Three-Month Picture</h2>
<p>July’s employment increase was almost evenly divided between full-time and part-time positions. Full-time employment increased by approximately 38,600, while part-time employment rose by around 36,600. That balance helps address one frequent concern surrounding monthly employment reports: a strong headline number driven overwhelmingly by part-time work can look considerably less impressive once the details are examined.</p>
<p>The trend since April is even more notable. Total employment has increased by approximately 181,000 over those three months, while full-time employment alone has risen by about 193,000. The unusual difference reflects declines in part-time employment over the broader period even as full-time positions expanded. May was particularly strong, with Canada adding about 88,000 jobs, followed by a much smaller increase of 18,000 in June and July’s 75,000 gain. Monthly Labour Force Survey numbers can fluctuate considerably, but three consecutive months showing a cumulative recovery provide more useful context than any single report. For workers searching for stable employment, the increase in full-time work is one of the more encouraging elements of the recent data.</p>
<h2>Ontario and British Columbia Drive Regional Gains</h2>
<p>Ontario accounted for the largest provincial increase in July, adding approximately 52,000 jobs, equivalent to a 0.6% monthly gain. British Columbia followed with an increase of about 18,000 positions, also a 0.6% rise. Manitoba added roughly 5,900 jobs, while Nova Scotia gained approximately 4,600.</p>
<p>The Ontario result was especially important because of the province’s size. In June, Ontario employment had actually declined slightly and its unemployment rate stood at 7.0%, above the national average. A 52,000-job increase therefore represents a significant reversal from the previous month, although one report does not establish a permanent trend. British Columbia’s gain also followed an increase in June, providing evidence of continuing hiring momentum on the West Coast. The regional distribution shows that July’s national improvement was not simply the result of a single small province producing an unusually strong percentage increase. Two of Canada’s largest provincial labour markets were major contributors, while smaller increases in Manitoba and Nova Scotia broadened the geographic base of the employment expansion.</p>
<h2>Retail, Finance, Professional Services and Construction Lead</h2>
<p>July’s hiring was spread across several major private-sector industries. Wholesale and retail trade led with approximately 21,000 additional workers, an increase of 0.7%. Finance, insurance, real estate, rental and leasing employment rose by about 18,000, or 1.2%, while professional, scientific and technical services added approximately 17,000 workers. Construction employment increased by another 16,000, or roughly 1%.</p>
<p>That combination is noteworthy because it extends beyond a single type of employment. Retail tends to be closely connected to household spending, while finance and professional services contain many higher-skilled occupations. Construction, meanwhile, responds to housing, infrastructure and business investment conditions. There were weak spots. Public administration employment declined by approximately 15,000, while agriculture lost about 9,600 positions. The mixture illustrates why the overall July figure should not be interpreted as every part of the Canadian economy suddenly booming. Instead, several large industries expanded strongly enough to outweigh losses elsewhere. The breadth of those gains nonetheless makes the report more convincing than one driven almost entirely by a single industry.</p>
<h2>Wage Growth Cools Even as Hiring Accelerates</h2>
<p>One part of the report moved in the opposite direction from employment: wage growth slowed. Average hourly wages among employees were approximately $37.17 in July, up 2.8% from a year earlier. That was down from a 3.3% year-over-year increase in June. A separate measure closely watched by economists showed wages for permanent employees rising about 3.0% from a year earlier, the slowest pace since early 2022.</p>
<p>Slower wage growth is not automatically bad news, particularly from an inflation perspective. Rapid increases in wages can support household purchasing power, but persistent wage growth far above productivity gains can also make it harder for inflation to settle sustainably around the Bank of Canada’s target. The July combination is therefore unusual but potentially constructive: employment grew strongly while the pace of wage increases moderated. It also reinforces the idea that Canada has not suddenly returned to an overheated labour market. Businesses may be hiring more workers without facing the severe labour shortages and intense competition for employees that characterized portions of the post-pandemic recovery.</p>
<h2>Why the Report Matters for the Bank of Canada and the Economy</h2>
<p>The July numbers arrive just as broader economic indicators have begun pointing toward a Canadian rebound. The Bank of Canada held its policy interest rate at 2.25% on July 15 and said economic growth appeared to be resuming after a prolonged period of weakness. Governor Tiff Macklem noted that consumers had remained resilient and businesses were adapting to U.S. trade policy, although the Bank continued to describe the economy as operating with excess supply.</p>
<p>The Bank had estimated second-quarter annualized GDP growth of roughly 2.5%. Subsequent preliminary economic data indicated growth could be closer to 3.4%, which would represent a much stronger rebound from the stagnant first quarter. July’s employment report adds another piece to that improving picture: private-sector hiring is rising, full-time employment has strengthened since April and unemployment has fallen for three straight months. There are still reasons for caution, including trade uncertainty, elevated youth unemployment and cooling wages. Labour Force Survey estimates are also based on a household survey and can be volatile from month to month. Still, compared with the weakness seen earlier in 2026, July represents a clear improvement in the direction of Canada’s labour market.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/revenue-agency.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/condo-rents-fall-6-3-as-canadas-rental-market-keeps-sliding/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Condo Rents Fall 6.3% as Canada’s Rental Market Keeps Sliding]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 26 13:42:03 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/condo-rents-fall-6-3-as-canadas-rental-market-keeps-sliding/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s rental market is giving prospective tenants something that was almost unthinkable during the post-pandemic housing crunch: sustained price declines.]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s rental market is giving prospective tenants something that was almost unthinkable during the post-pandemic housing crunch: sustained price declines. Average asking rents slipped again compared with a year earlier in July, extending a downturn that has now lasted nearly two years. Condominium rentals are taking an even bigger hit, falling 6.3% annually as landlords compete for tenants in a market with more available supply and weaker demand.</p>
<p>The decline does not mean renting has suddenly become inexpensive. Asking rents remain above $2,000 nationally, affordability remains a major concern, and lower-priced units are still difficult to find in many cities. But the balance of power has clearly shifted from the frantic rental conditions seen only a few years ago.</p>
<h2>Canada’s Rental Decline Has Reached 22 Consecutive Months</h2>
<p>The average asking rent across all residential property types in Canada was $2,037 in July, 4.0% lower than a year earlier. That made July the 22nd consecutive month in which national asking rents declined on a year-over-year basis. Compared with two years earlier, rents were down 7.5%, taking the national average back to its lowest July level since 2022.</p>
<p>The direction of the market becomes more interesting when monthly numbers are considered. Average asking rent actually edged 0.2% higher from June, marking the fourth consecutive monthly increase since rents reached a 35-month low in March. Summer is normally one of the busiest leasing periods of the year, however, and the latest increase was relatively subdued. The result is a rental market that is still cheaper than last year but no longer falling as quickly as it was earlier in 2026.</p>
<h2>Condo Landlords Are Taking a Much Bigger Hit</h2>
<p>Condominium apartments have become one of the clearest examples of Canada’s rental-market reversal. Average condo asking rent fell 6.3% year over year in July to $2,063. That decline was considerably larger than the 2.6% decrease recorded for purpose-built rental apartments, suggesting investor-owned condos are facing particularly intense competition for tenants.</p>
<p>There is an important short-term wrinkle. Condo asking rents increased 0.3% between June and July, which suggests the market may be approaching a floor rather than continuing to fall at the same pace indefinitely. Still, the annual decline is significant. An investor who purchased a unit expecting steadily rising rents is now operating in a very different environment. Leaving a privately owned condo vacant can quickly become expensive, which gives individual landlords a strong incentive to adjust pricing when comparable units are sitting on the market.</p>
<h2>Studio and One-Bedroom Condos Are Falling Fastest</h2>
<p>Smaller condos have experienced some of the most dramatic rental declines. Studio condo asking rents fell 9.6% year over year in July to an average of $1,594. One-bedroom condo rents were close behind, dropping 7.8%. That puts the greatest downward pressure on the portion of the condo market traditionally associated with singles, students, young professionals and investors buying smaller units.</p>
<p>Larger rentals have proven more resilient. Across all property types nationally, three-bedroom asking rents fell just 2.1% to $2,515, while two-bedroom rents declined 2.7% to $2,159. Studios fell 4.1% and one-bedrooms declined 3.9%. The contrast suggests rental conditions are not weakening equally across every household type. Someone searching for a small downtown condo may encounter noticeably better pricing than a year ago, while a family searching for a three-bedroom home may find far less relief.</p>
<h2>Purpose-Built Rentals Are Holding Up Better</h2>
<p>Purpose-built rental apartments are proving considerably more resilient than investor-owned condos. Average asking rents in that category were $2,041 in July, down 2.6% from a year earlier. Three-bedroom purpose-built rents were essentially unchanged annually at $2,743, even as studios fell 3.9% and one-bedroom units declined 3.0%.</p>
<p>At the other end of the market, secondary rentals such as houses and townhouses recorded an even steeper decline than condos. Their average asking rent fell 7.5% year over year to $2,007. The difference highlights how ownership structure can affect pricing behaviour. Large apartment operators can spread vacancies across hundreds of units, while someone renting out one condo or house may feel financial pressure much sooner when it sits empty. That does not guarantee discounts in every neighbourhood, but it helps explain why privately supplied rental categories have adjusted more aggressively.</p>
<h2>A Wave of New Supply Is Giving Renters More Choice</h2>
<p>Canada spent years struggling to build rental housing quickly enough to match demand. The picture has started to change. CMHC reported that rental apartment completions in early 2026 were running above the same period in 2025, while vacancy was particularly elevated in buildings completed after 2020. Newly constructed units are also taking longer to lease in some markets.</p>
<p>Competition is not coming only from purpose-built apartments. CMHC says investor-owned condominium apartments are adding unusually strong competition in large markets, particularly where recently completed condos have entered the rental pool. Some landlords have responded by cutting asking rents; others are using incentives such as discounted parking, move-in credits, gift cards or periods of free rent. For renters accustomed to bidding wars and limited choice, the return of landlord incentives represents one of the clearest signs that market conditions have become more balanced.</p>
<h2>Slower Population Growth Is Changing the Demand Equation</h2>
<p>Housing supply is only half of the equation. Canada is also experiencing a major shift in population growth. Preliminary Statistics Canada estimates showed the country's population fell by approximately 55,000 people during the first quarter of 2026, leaving the population at roughly 41.4 million on April 1. The estimated number of non-permanent residents dropped 4.4% during the quarter to about 2.56 million.</p>
<p>Ontario, the country’s largest rental market, experienced particularly notable changes. Its population declined by roughly 32,600 during the first quarter, while the estimated number of non-permanent residents fell 4.4%. Population changes should not be treated as the sole explanation for falling rents—new construction, local employment conditions, affordability and household formation also matter. But fewer additional renters competing for new listings removes some of the demand pressure that helped produce the extraordinary rent increases of the early 2020s.</p>
<h2>Toronto Is Starting to Break Away From the Downturn</h2>
<p>Toronto may be offering an early glimpse of what a rental-market bottom looks like. Apartment and condo asking rents in the city increased 1.6% from June to $2,577 in July. They were down only 0.6% from a year earlier, making Toronto the best-performing rental market among Canada’s six largest cities on an annual basis. Three-bedroom Toronto rents actually increased 3.9% year over year to $3,655.</p>
<p>Supply may be playing a role in the turnaround. Rentals.ca and Urbanation reported that Toronto rental listings were roughly 6% lower than a year earlier. Yet the improvement has not spread evenly throughout the Greater Toronto Area. Brampton, Mississauga, Oakville and Oshawa were still recording annual declines of more than 7% across property types. The contrast shows why the national average can hide major differences even between communities separated by relatively short drives.</p>
<h2>The Provincial Divide Is Getting Bigger</h2>
<p>Canada increasingly looks like a collection of very different rental markets. Apartment and condo asking rents fell 4.3% annually in Alberta, 4.1% in British Columbia and 3.7% in Ontario in July. Ontario nevertheless recorded a 0.8% monthly increase, its third consecutive monthly gain after reaching a 46-month low in April, another indication that some previously weak markets may be stabilizing.</p>
<p>Nova Scotia continues to move in the opposite direction. Its apartment and condo asking rent averaged $2,377, up 4.5% year over year and 0.7% from June. That kept it ahead of British Columbia for a third consecutive month, although the comparison requires context: Nova Scotia’s average is boosted by a high concentration of recently completed, higher-priced rental projects and a larger share of two- and three-bedroom listings. Over three years, Ontario rents were down 7.9% and B.C. rents 10.1%, while Saskatchewan remained 25.7% higher.</p>
<h2>Falling Asking Rents Do Not Mean Renting Is Suddenly Affordable</h2>
<p>A national rent decline sounds encouraging, but the experience of many renters remains difficult. A Rentals.ca renter study conducted in the spring found that 70% of respondents identified high prices as the biggest challenge in their housing search. In a regional analysis of 1,194 renters, high rents ranked as the leading problem in every major market studied.</p>
<p>CMHC data provides another reason for caution. Greater vacancy and renter mobility are concentrated disproportionately in newer and more expensive units, while vacancy remains low in many of the cheapest rental segments. That means someone shopping for a relatively expensive new apartment may suddenly have multiple buildings competing for their business, while someone seeking the lowest-cost unit in the same city can still face limited options. CMHC also distinguishes between asking rent on available units and average rent paid by existing tenants—the two measures can move differently because existing leases adjust more gradually.</p>
<h2>Renters Are Also Getting Less Space for Their Money</h2>
<p>The headline decline in monthly rent does not tell the entire affordability story. Across Canada’s six largest rental markets, average asking rent per square foot was $2.54 in July, unchanged from a year earlier. It was only 3.6% below July 2024, when the figure stood at $2.63 per square foot.</p>
<p>At the same time, the average size of an available rental unit fell to 831 square feet, down 3.0% from a year earlier. Compared with two years ago, average available unit size had shrunk 5.5%, from 879 square feet. In practical terms, part of the improvement seen in headline rents is accompanied by tenants shopping among smaller homes. A renter may find that a monthly asking price has dropped, yet still discover that the apartment offering that lower price has less living space than comparable listings available during the peak of the market.</p>
<h2>The Market May Be Stabilizing—But It Has Not Fully Turned</h2>
<p>July’s numbers point in two directions at once. Annual rents are still clearly falling: national asking rents are down 4.0%, condo rents are down 6.3%, and declines have persisted for 22 consecutive months. Yet monthly asking rents have now risen for four months in a row, Toronto is showing stronger momentum and the annual rate of decline is becoming smaller. Those signals suggest the downturn may be entering a more stable phase.</p>
<p>CMHC expects renter household formation to continue even with weaker population growth, supported partly by younger Canadians forming households and by improving affordability allowing some previously constrained renters to move. That could gradually absorb excess supply. For now, however, the market remains noticeably friendlier to prospective tenants than it was during the rental surge of 2022 through 2024. The next several months will show whether Canada has reached a durable floor—or merely another pause in a longer adjustment.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/Condo.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/carneys-economy-beats-expectations-on-jobs-but-wage-growth-falls-to-lowest-since-2022/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Carney’s Economy Beats Expectations on Jobs—but Wage Growth Falls to Lowest Since 2022]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Aug 26 13:35:40 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/carneys-economy-beats-expectations-on-jobs-but-wage-growth-falls-to-lowest-since-2022/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s labour market delivered one of its strongest surprises in months in July, handing Prime Minister Mark Carney’s government a]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s labour market delivered one of its strongest surprises in months in July, handing Prime Minister Mark Carney’s government a welcome economic data point at a time of intense trade uncertainty. Employment jumped by roughly 75,000 positions, dramatically exceeding forecasts, while the unemployment rate fell to 6.4%, its lowest level in two years.</p>
<p>Yet beneath those encouraging numbers was a development that matters directly to household finances: wage growth continued to cool. Pay for permanent employees rose 3.0% from a year earlier, the slowest pace since early 2022. Together, the figures suggest an economy that is creating jobs again and navigating external pressure better than feared—but one where workers may have less bargaining power than during the post-pandemic labour shortage.</p>
<h2>Canada Added Far More Jobs Than Economists Expected</h2>
<p>The headline number was difficult to dismiss. Employment increased by approximately 75,000 positions in July, a monthly gain of 0.4%. Economists surveyed by Reuters had expected only about 16,500 additional jobs, meaning the actual increase came in dramatically above the consensus forecast. The employment rate also edged higher by 0.1 percentage points to 60.9%, another sign that the improvement was not simply the result of people abandoning their job searches.</p>
<p>It extends a meaningful turnaround from the weakness seen earlier in 2026. Employment had fallen on a net basis during the first four months of the year, before Canada added nearly 88,000 positions in May and another 18,000 in June. Since April, employment has risen by roughly 181,000. One strong month can always contain statistical noise, but several months of improving employment make the July result harder to dismiss as an isolated spike. For businesses and households that spent much of the past year preparing for weaker conditions, the direction is becoming noticeably more encouraging.</p>
<h2>The Unemployment Rate Has Fallen for Three Straight Months</h2>
<p>Canada’s unemployment rate declined from 6.5% in June to 6.4% in July, marking its third consecutive monthly decrease. That is the lowest national unemployment rate recorded since July 2024 and represents a significant improvement from the 6.9% reached in April. The labour force itself also grew during July, making the decline more meaningful than a drop caused simply by discouraged workers leaving the workforce.</p>
<p>Still, a 6.4% unemployment rate should not be confused with an exceptionally tight labour market. Before the pandemic, Canada routinely experienced national unemployment rates around or below 6%, and the Bank of Canada has continued to describe the labour market as having excess capacity. The better interpretation is that conditions appear to be healing. Statistics Canada found that 20.8% of people who had been unemployed found work from one month to the next, up from 18.5% during the comparable period last year. That remains below the 26.6% pre-pandemic average for the same period, showing why finding a job can still feel difficult despite improving headline statistics.</p>
<h2>The Job Gains Were Not Simply Part-Time or Government Hiring</h2>
<p>One of the strongest features of July’s report was the composition of the employment increase. Full-time employment grew by approximately 38,600 positions, while part-time employment increased by about 36,600. Looking across the period since April provides an even clearer picture: total employment rose by about 181,000, while full-time work increased by approximately 193,000. Part-time employment actually declined slightly over that period.</p>
<p>Private-sector employment also played the leading role. The number of private-sector employees increased by roughly 58,000 in July, while self-employment rose by about 44,000. Public-sector employment moved in the opposite direction, falling by approximately 27,000. Since April, private-sector payrolls have expanded by roughly 146,000 and self-employment by about 73,000. That matters because a jobs rebound concentrated exclusively in temporary work or government employment would raise questions about its durability. Instead, July showed businesses adding workers even while many companies continue to face uncertainty surrounding U.S. trade policy, tariffs and global demand.</p>
<h2>Hiring Strength Appeared Across Several Major Industries</h2>
<p>The employment increase was not confined to one unusual industry. Wholesale and retail trade added approximately 21,000 positions in July. Finance, insurance, real estate, rental and leasing gained about 18,000, while professional, scientific and technical services added roughly 17,000. Construction employment rose by another 16,000. Together, those gains point to improvement across consumer-facing businesses, professional services and economically sensitive industries.</p>
<p>There were weak spots. Public administration employment decreased by approximately 15,000, while agriculture lost about 9,600 positions. Even wholesale and retail employment, despite leading July’s gains, remained weaker than a year earlier. That mixed picture is important because Canada is emerging from a period in which employers became much more cautious about recruiting. The Bank of Canada reported in July that businesses had generally been retaining existing staff while hesitating to expand headcounts because of uncertain demand. A sustained increase in hiring across multiple private industries would therefore represent a meaningful change in behaviour—but July alone is not enough to prove that shift has become permanent.</p>
<h2>Ontario Was Responsible for Much of the Increase</h2>
<p>Ontario produced the largest provincial employment gain, adding approximately 52,000 jobs in July, an increase of 0.6%. British Columbia followed with roughly 18,000 additional positions, while Manitoba gained about 5,900 and Nova Scotia approximately 4,600. Ontario’s improvement is particularly notable because parts of the province have been highly exposed to uncertainty surrounding Canada-U.S. trade, especially communities connected to manufacturing and the automotive supply chain.</p>
<p>There was also a notable demographic improvement among Canadians in their prime working years. Employment among people aged 25 to 54 increased by roughly 51,000, including approximately 33,000 additional jobs among women. The unemployment rate for core-aged women consequently declined by 0.3 percentage points to 5.2%. Youth unemployment, however, remained considerably higher at 12.6%. Returning students aged 15 to 24 faced a 15.1% unemployment rate in July. That was substantially better than a year earlier, but still above the pre-pandemic July average of 12.6%, illustrating how differently the labour-market recovery is being experienced across age groups.</p>
<h2>Wage Growth Is Now Sending a Much Softer Signal</h2>
<p>The most important warning buried inside the report concerned wages. Average hourly earnings for permanent employees increased 3.0% from July 2025, slowing noticeably from the 3.7% annual increase recorded in June. According to Reuters, it was the weakest growth rate for that measure since February 2022, when permanent-employee wages rose 2.8%. Economists had expected wage growth to remain stronger, making the slowdown one of the clearest soft spots in an otherwise upbeat employment report.</p>
<p>Statistics Canada’s broader measure covering employees showed a similar trend. Average hourly wages rose 2.8% year over year to $37.17 in July, compared with 3.3% growth in June. For workers, that means the labour market may be becoming easier to enter without necessarily returning to the period of unusually rapid salary increases that followed the pandemic. July inflation data has not yet been released, so a precise comparison between July wages and consumer prices cannot yet be made. Canada’s Consumer Price Index was running at 2.8% in June.</p>
<h2>The Jobs Report Fits a Broader Economic Rebound</h2>
<p>July’s employment numbers did not arrive in isolation. Recent economic data have increasingly suggested that Canada recovered from its weak start to 2026 more strongly than many forecasters anticipated. Statistics Canada reported that real GDP grew 0.3% in May after April growth was revised upward to 0.6%. Its preliminary estimate pointed to another 0.2% expansion in June.</p>
<p>Those numbers implied annualized second-quarter economic growth of approximately 3.4%, which would be the strongest quarterly pace in more than three years. That is significantly above the 2.5% second-quarter growth estimate published by the Bank of Canada in July. Energy production, exports, residential investment and consumer spending have all contributed to the improvement, although temporary factors have influenced some recent data. The Bank itself has argued that businesses appear to be adapting to U.S. tariffs and trade uncertainty. July’s employment report strengthens the case that economic momentum carried into the beginning of the third quarter rather than disappearing once those temporary second-quarter boosts faded.</p>
<h2>Slower Wages Complicate the Bank of Canada’s Next Move</h2>
<p>For the Bank of Canada, July delivered almost exactly the kind of conflicting signals that make interest-rate decisions difficult. Strong job creation and falling unemployment suggest the economy has more momentum than previously thought. Slower wage growth, however, reduces one potential source of persistent inflation pressure. The Bank has held its overnight rate at 2.25% since October 2025 and maintained that level again at its July 15 decision.</p>
<p>The central bank has also stressed that Canada still has excess economic capacity despite the recovery. That helps explain why one unusually strong employment report is unlikely to automatically trigger higher interest rates. Market economists cited after the July figures generally continued to expect the Bank to remain patient. The next scheduled rate announcement is September 2. For households with mortgages, loans or planned purchases, the distinction matters: a healthier economy does not necessarily mean borrowing costs are about to rise sharply if wage and inflation pressures remain contained.</p>
<h2>Carney Gets a Political Boost—but the Bigger Test Comes Next</h2>
<p>For Carney, the timing of the report is favourable. His government is trying to demonstrate that Canada can withstand an increasingly difficult relationship with its largest trading partner while encouraging investment and expanding economic ties elsewhere. U.S. tariffs remain a major risk, and Canada and the United States are still negotiating over trade disputes affecting important sectors of the economy. Against that backdrop, stronger employment and unexpectedly fast economic growth provide Ottawa with evidence that the economy has so far proved more resilient than many feared.</p>
<p>That does not mean federal policy can take credit for 75,000 jobs created in a single month. Employment data are influenced by provincial policies, interest rates, global demand, commodity prices, population changes and decisions made by thousands of individual businesses. The stronger conclusion is more modest: Canada entered the second half of 2026 with noticeably better momentum than it had several months earlier. Whether that becomes a sustained expansion will depend on hiring continuing through the fall, wages stabilizing, inflation easing and businesses remaining willing to invest despite trade uncertainty.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Mark-Carney.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/new-york-offers-canadians-30-off-as-trump-era-travel-boycott-hits-visitor-numbers/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[New York Offers Canadians 30% Off as Trump-Era Travel Boycott Hits Visitor Numbers]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jul 26 14:40:00 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/new-york-offers-canadians-30-off-as-trump-era-travel-boycott-hits-visitor-numbers/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A weekend in New York has rarely come with an apology-sized discount. Yet the city is now offering Canadian travellers]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A weekend in New York has rarely come with an apology-sized discount. Yet the city is now offering Canadian travellers 30% off participating hotels, Broadway shows, attractions, restaurants and museums as it tries to repair one of its most valuable tourism relationships.</p>
<p>The “Northern Neighbour Deal” arrives after a sharp pullback in Canadian travel to the United States, driven by political tension, tariffs, concerns about feeling welcome and the cost of converting Canadian dollars. New York remains a powerful draw, but the campaign signals that famous landmarks and cultural cachet are no longer enough on their own. City officials are now competing directly for Canadians who have been redirecting trips and spending toward destinations at home and overseas.</p>
<h2>A Three-Week Offer Built Specifically for Canadians</h2>
<p>The Northern Neighbour Deal will run from August 18 through September 7, 2026, giving Canadian visitors 30% off at more than 85 participating tourism and hospitality businesses. Reservations are scheduled to open August 4 through New York City Tourism + Conventions, the city’s official destination marketing organization. The timing targets the final stretch of summer, when families, couples and short-break travellers may still have flexibility to book.</p>
<p>The offer is unusually direct because it is not simply a citywide seasonal promotion open to everyone. It is designed around a specific international market that New York is trying to rebuild. Officials have said the discount is intended to help offset the currency exchange rate, one of the practical barriers facing Canadians. For a Toronto couple considering a hotel, two Broadway tickets and an observation deck visit, a 30% reduction across several parts of the trip could turn an expensive weekend into a more realistic one.</p>
<h2>Hotels, Broadway and Major Attractions Join the Push</h2>
<p>More than 40 hotels are listed among the participating businesses, including the Ace Hotel Brooklyn, The Knickerbocker, Sofitel New York, the Westin New York at Times Square and properties in Harlem and the Financial District. That range matters because accommodations are usually the largest expense on a New York trip. The city’s average hotel rate reached $334 a night in 2025, making a meaningful discount capable of saving hundreds of dollars over several nights.</p>
<p>The promotion also stretches well beyond hotel rooms. Participating attractions include the Empire State Building Observation Deck, Edge, the Intrepid Museum, City Cruises and New York Yankees experiences. Broadway productions such as Aladdin, Chicago, The Great Gatsby and The Book of Mormon are included, along with selected restaurants. By bundling culture, entertainment, food and lodging, the campaign is trying to influence the entire purchase decision rather than relying on one discounted ticket to generate a visit.</p>
<h2>Porter Adds Another Incentive From Canadian Cities</h2>
<p>Porter Airlines is supporting the campaign with discounts of up to 20% on New York itineraries booked by August 7 for travel through December 15. The airline operates as many as 91 weekly flights to the New York metropolitan area, serving LaGuardia Airport and Newark Liberty International Airport from Toronto, Montreal and Ottawa, with connections available from other Canadian cities.</p>
<p>The airline component gives the promotion a longer reach than the three-week window attached to most participating businesses. It also addresses the first price many travellers see: the airfare. Porter has described New York as its first U.S. destination, launched in 2008, and its top international market every year since. That history adds a human dimension to the campaign. The Toronto–New York trip has long functioned almost like a domestic city break, but the political and economic climate has forced tourism operators to persuade Canadians that the familiar journey is still worth taking.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Too Important for New York to Ignore</h2>
<p>Canada remains New York City’s second-largest international visitor market, behind the United Kingdom. City tourism officials forecast approximately 820,000 Canadian visitors in 2026, which would represent a 3.1% increase from 2025. Even with that projected improvement, the total remains well below the 983,000 Canadians who visited in 2024 and the 995,000 recorded in 2023. The latest forecast is still approximately 175,000 visitors below the 2023 level.</p>
<p>That gap explains why New York is willing to offer a broad 30% discount rather than wait for sentiment to improve naturally. Canadian visitors are valuable not only because of their numbers but because international travellers spend heavily on hotels, restaurants, retail and entertainment. International visitors represented only about one-fifth of New York City’s total visitation in 2025, yet they accounted for roughly half of tourism spending. Losing a portion of the Canadian market therefore creates a larger financial hole than the raw visitor count may suggest.</p>
<h2>The Pullback Became a National Economic Story</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada found that Canadian-resident return border crossings from the United States fell 25.4% in 2025 compared with 2024. A separate measure of trips that included a U.S. visit fell 23.5% to 23.1 million. The decline was not a brief reaction concentrated around one news cycle. Excluding the pandemic period, the 11-month streak of year-over-year decreases was the deepest and most sustained in records dating back decades.</p>
<p>Spending moved with the travellers. Canadians spent $18.8 billion on U.S. visits in 2025, down $3.3 billion from the previous year. Leisure travel produced most of the loss, with 3.2 million fewer leisure-related visits and $2.2 billion less spending. Those figures help explain why destinations are responding with discounts, advertising and public messages of welcome. What began as a political expression by individual travellers has become a measurable revenue problem for hotels, attractions, restaurants, airlines and border communities.</p>
<h2>U.S. Cities May Be Feeling an Even Sharper Decline</h2>
<p>Official border statistics capture entries and returns, but they do not always show where travellers actually spend their time. Researchers at the University of Toronto’s School of Cities used anonymized cellphone activity to compare Canadian visits to major U.S. metropolitan areas over two consecutive 12-month periods. They found a median year-over-year decline of roughly 42%, considerably steeper than the drop suggested by border-crossing totals.</p>
<p>The city-focused finding is especially relevant for New York. Canadians may still cross the border for family visits, business, shopping or brief practical trips while avoiding longer urban vacations. New York City’s Canadian visitation fell about 19% in 2025, from 983,000 to roughly 796,000. That decline means fewer theatre seats sold, fewer restaurant tables filled and fewer hotel rooms booked. It also suggests the challenge is not merely getting Canadians across the border; it is convincing them to choose an American city for discretionary leisure spending.</p>
<h2>Politics, Safety and the Exchange Rate All Matter</h2>
<p>The pullback cannot be explained by price alone. A Léger travel study found that 70% of Canadians were less likely to visit the United States in 2026 than the year before, while only 9% said they were more likely. Among those avoiding or reconsidering U.S. travel, 67% cited the political climate and Canada–U.S. tensions, 61% pointed to tariffs and trade conflict, and 59% said they no longer felt safe travelling there.</p>
<p>Nearly half, 48%, said they did not feel welcome, while 39% identified the weak Canadian dollar or poor exchange rate. These findings show why a 30% promotion is both practical and symbolic. It reduces the financial penalty, but it also communicates that Canadian business is actively wanted. Still, a discount cannot fully resolve concerns tied to rhetoric, border treatment or national pride. For some travellers, the decision has become less about the cost of a room and more about where they feel comfortable spending their money.</p>
<h2>Border Communities Across New York Have Paid a Price</h2>
<p>The damage is not limited to Manhattan. New York State’s comptroller reported nearly 3.6 million fewer travellers crossing from Canada into the state in 2025, a decline of 21.2%. Canadian traffic is particularly important to communities in Western New York and the North Country, where restaurants, outlet malls, hotels, attractions and small retailers have long depended on frequent cross-border visits.</p>
<p>The decline showed up at major public attractions as well. Attendance at the Niagara Reservation, which includes Niagara Falls, dropped by more than 610,000 visits, or 6.4%, in 2025. Travel-related employment also weakened near the border: Western New York lost 656 jobs in the sector through September, while the North Country recorded the steepest regional percentage decline. Those numbers turn an abstract boycott into a local story. A cancelled weekend does not only affect a large hotel chain; it can mean fewer shifts for a server, tour guide or front-desk employee.</p>
<h2>Canadians Redirected Their Trips Instead of Staying Home</h2>
<p>The decline in U.S. travel did not mean Canadians stopped travelling. Statistics Canada found that the reduction of 7.1 million U.S. visits in 2025 was almost entirely offset by five million more domestic visits and 1.3 million more overseas visits. Canadian residents made 342 million domestic visits during the year, while overseas visits rose to 14.3 million.</p>
<p>Spending followed the same pattern. Domestic tourism expenditures climbed to $81.3 billion, while spending on overseas visits rose 17.5% to $31.3 billion. Leisure trips were especially easy to substitute: Canadians made 3.2 million fewer leisure visits to the United States but 1.1 million more leisure visits overseas. In practical terms, a New York weekend may have become a Montreal stay, a Maritime road trip or part of the budget for Europe or Asia. New York is therefore not competing against inactivity; it is competing against alternative destinations that have already captured Canadian attention.</p>
<h2>The Discount Tests Whether Value Can Repair the Relationship</h2>
<p>There are early signs that the decline may be stabilizing. Statistics Canada reported a 1.8% year-over-year increase in Canadian return trips from the United States in April 2026, the first monthly increase since February 2025. New York City is also forecasting a modest Canadian rebound to about 820,000 visitors this year. The Northern Neighbour Deal is designed to strengthen that movement during a period when the city still has late-summer inventory to sell.</p>
<p>Yet the test is larger than whether hotel bookings rise for three weeks. New York is trying to determine whether a strong value proposition can overcome a political rupture that changed travel habits. The campaign may win back price-sensitive visitors who still love Broadway, museums and neighbourhood dining but hesitated over cost. Others may remain unmoved until the broader relationship feels less confrontational. The outcome will show whether the boycott is temporary consumer anger—or the beginning of a more durable shift in how Canadians choose where to travel.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/New-York.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/immigrants-birth-rates-fall-toward-canadian-levels-new-research-finds/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Immigrants’ Birth Rates Fall Toward Canadian Levels, New Research Finds]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jul 26 12:40:41 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/immigrants-birth-rates-fall-toward-canadian-levels-new-research-finds/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A family may arrive in Canada carrying traditions shaped by another country, but decisions about children are quickly influenced by]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A family may arrive in Canada carrying traditions shaped by another country, but decisions about children are quickly influenced by the realities of building a life here. New peer-reviewed research finds that immigrants still have slightly more children, on average, than Canadian-born residents, yet the difference has narrowed sharply over the past two decades.</p>
<p>The findings complicate a familiar assumption behind Canada’s demographic model: that immigration can continually offset low birth rates and population aging. Immigration remains essential to labour-force growth and community renewal, but newcomers are increasingly experiencing the same low-fertility environment as everyone else. Age at arrival, admission category and country of origin all matter, revealing a far more varied picture than the idea of immigrants as a single high-fertility group.</p>
<h2>The Fertility Gap Is Closing</h2>
<p>The study, published in Population Research and Policy Review in July 2026, examined fertility patterns from 2001 to 2021 using four long-form censuses and the 2011 National Household Survey. Researchers linked infants living in census families to their mothers and used age-specific birth patterns to estimate total fertility rates for different groups. That approach allowed them to compare immigrant and Canadian-born women across two decades while also separating immigrants by age at arrival, admission stream and country of birth.</p>
<p>In 2001, immigrant women had an estimated total fertility rate of 1.68 children, compared with 1.44 among Canadian-born women—a gap of 0.24 births. By 2021, the immigrant rate had fallen to 1.42 while the Canadian-born rate stood at 1.31, reducing the difference to 0.11. Immigrants therefore remained somewhat more fertile, but their decline was faster. The central story is not that both groups have become identical; it is that the historical gap has become much smaller and appears likely to narrow further.</p>
<h2>Age at Arrival Changes the Pattern</h2>
<p>The age at which someone moves to Canada was one of the clearest dividing lines in the results. Researchers classified people who arrived after age 15 as first-generation immigrants and those who arrived at or before 15 as the “1.5 generation.” First-generation immigrants recorded the highest fertility, with rates hovering near 2.0 between 2001 and 2016 before declining to 1.75 in 2021. Their family decisions may retain more influence from the social expectations and life plans formed before migration.</p>
<p>The pattern was strikingly different among those who arrived as children. The 1.5 generation had fertility rates between 1.36 and 1.46 from 2001 to 2016, then fell to 1.25 in 2021—below both first-generation immigrants and Canadian-born residents. A child who grows up in Canadian schools, enters the Canadian labour market and faces Canadian housing and relationship timelines may develop family plans that resemble those of locally born peers. The finding offers strong evidence of adaptation, although it does not prove which specific Canadian pressures or cultural influences caused the difference.</p>
<h2>Economic Immigration Does Not Produce a Baby Boom</h2>
<p>Canada selects a large share of permanent residents through economic programs, emphasizing education, language ability, work experience and skills needed in the labour market. That profile is often treated as a demographic advantage because many successful applicants are in their prime working years. The new findings show, however, that being young enough to work for decades does not necessarily mean having a large family after arrival.</p>
<p>Economic immigrants had a total fertility rate of 1.47 in 2016 and 1.32 in 2021, almost matching the low rate among Canadian-born residents. They were the lowest-fertility permanent-immigrant category in the study, despite representing more than half of permanent immigration in both years examined. The researchers suggest that employment establishment, professional advancement and financial stability may take priority during the settlement years. Picture a skilled newcomer completing licensing requirements, accepting an entry-level role and trying to secure suitable housing: parenthood may still be desired, but the timing can become difficult. The data reveal the outcome, though not the personal reasons behind every delayed or forgone birth.</p>
<h2>Family and Refugee Streams Remain Higher</h2>
<p>Family-class immigrants recorded the highest fertility among permanent-resident groups, at 2.18 in 2016 and 1.97 in 2021. That difference is understandable because many people in this stream arrive through spousal or partner sponsorship and may already be at a stage of life associated with marriage and parenthood. Even so, the 2021 rate was below the approximate replacement level of 2.1 children per woman, meaning the highest-fertility permanent stream was no longer producing enough births for long-term generational replacement without continued migration.</p>
<p>Refugees ranked second, with rates of 1.78 in 2016 and 1.77 in 2021. Their fertility was notably higher than that of economic immigrants but still below replacement. The researchers discuss several possible influences, including family norms in countries of origin and the desire to rebuild life after displacement, while also acknowledging that trauma, uncertainty and Canada’s cost of living can constrain family formation. These categories should not be treated as fixed cultural types. Each contains people with different histories, education levels, relationships and goals, and the study identifies group-level patterns rather than predicting any individual family’s choices.</p>
<h2>Temporary Residents Record the Lowest Rate</h2>
<p>Temporary residents had the lowest fertility of every category measured: 1.17 children per woman in 2016 and just 0.96 in 2021. This group includes many international students and temporary foreign workers whose legal status, employment or education may be tied to permits. Starting a family while studying, living apart from a partner or waiting to learn whether permanent residence will be possible can be considerably more complicated than doing so with settled status.</p>
<p>The result is especially relevant because Canada’s temporary population expanded rapidly after the pandemic, even though the study’s final observation reflects 2021 rather than the later peak. A low fertility rate among temporary residents does not mean they never have children. Some may postpone births until they obtain permanent residence, reunite with a partner or become more financially secure, meaning births could occur later rather than disappear entirely. The study cannot fully distinguish postponement from a permanently smaller completed family size. Still, a rate below one child per woman shows why simply increasing the number of students or temporary workers should not be assumed to generate lasting population replacement.</p>
<h2>Canada’s Main Source Countries Have Changed Too</h2>
<p>Fertility is falling in many of the countries from which Canada now receives large numbers of immigrants. In 2001, the leading countries of birth among immigrants reflected older migration waves, with the United Kingdom, China and Italy at the top. By 2021, India accounted for 10.7% of immigrants, while the Philippines and China each accounted for 8.6%. These countries have also moved through major demographic transitions, with smaller families becoming more common than they were a generation ago.</p>
<p>Among immigrant women from the top 10 source countries in 2021, every group recorded below-replacement fertility in Canada. Estimates ranged from 0.75 for Iranian-born women and 0.92 for Chinese-born women to 1.70 for Pakistani-born women. Immigrants from India and the Philippines had rates in Canada that were more than 50% below the rates in their origin countries across parts of the study period. This matters because Canada can no longer assume that newcomers will arrive from consistently high-fertility societies. The global decline is reshaping both the countries sending migrants and the family patterns immigrants establish after settlement.</p>
<h2>A Large Share of Births Is Not the Same as High Fertility</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada reported that 42.3% of babies born in Canada in 2024 had a foreign-born mother, nearly double the 22.5% share recorded in 1997. In Ontario and British Columbia, the proportion reached 48.7%. Those numbers show how central immigrant mothers have become to Canada’s annual births, especially in the country’s largest immigrant-receiving provinces. Without births to foreign-born mothers, the national number of births would have been declining since 2010.</p>
<p>That contribution can appear to conflict with research showing low immigrant fertility, but the measures answer different questions. The share of births describes who gave birth in a particular year; the total fertility rate estimates how many children women would have over their lifetimes if current age-specific rates continued. A growing immigrant population can therefore account for a larger share of babies even when the average fertility of immigrant women is falling. Canada may have more foreign-born women in childbearing ages, producing many births collectively, while each woman has a relatively small family on average. Understanding the denominator prevents a large birth share from being mistaken for a newcomer-driven baby boom.</p>
<h2>Immigration Still Matters, but Aging Continues</h2>
<p>The findings do not diminish immigration’s immediate importance. International migration has supplied most of Canada’s recent population growth and brings workers, students, caregivers, entrepreneurs and family members into communities that would otherwise grow much more slowly. In 2024, economic-class immigrants represented 58.2% of permanent resident admissions, reflecting the system’s strong labour-market focus. Foreign-born mothers also prevented national births from falling as sharply as they otherwise would have.</p>
<p>The limitation is time. Immigrants grow older, retire and eventually draw on health and pension systems just as Canadian-born residents do. When newcomers and their children also have below-replacement fertility, each new cohort must be followed by another migration cohort to maintain growth—a pattern the researchers describe as a demographic revolving door. Statistics Canada projects that population aging will continue under every major scenario, even though immigration can slow some effects and improve the working-age balance. The practical conclusion is not that immigration has failed. It is that immigration can replenish population numbers and labour supply in the near term without permanently resolving the deeper arithmetic of low fertility and longer life expectancy.</p>
<h2>The Policy Question Is Broader Than Immigration Targets</h2>
<p>The study shifts the debate away from a simple choice between more immigration and fewer immigrants. Canada can continue using migration to meet labour needs while also asking why people—newcomers and Canadian-born residents alike—often build smaller families than they may have imagined. Statistics Canada found that 46% of Canadians in 2024 wanted one or more biological children in the future, up from 41% in 2021. Intentions do not guarantee births, but they show that record-low fertility cannot be explained only by a universal rejection of parenthood.</p>
<p>Policy discussions therefore extend into housing, stable employment, partner formation, reproductive health, parental leave and access to child care. The new immigrant-fertility study did not directly measure those causes, so it should not be used as proof that any single policy would raise birth rates. It also notes limitations: 2021 may reflect pandemic disruptions, a small share of infants could not be linked to mothers, and the method estimates fertility for the period before each census rather than a standard calendar year. Its strongest contribution is diagnostic. Canada’s demographic future requires coordinated planning, not the assumption that immigration alone will keep every generation equally large.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Baby-Name-Persephone.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/u-s-tourism-loses-3-3b-as-canadians-keep-travel-spending-at-home/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[U.S. Tourism Loses $3.3B as Canadians Keep Travel Spending at Home]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 24 Jul 26 10:19:31 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/u-s-tourism-loses-3-3b-as-canadians-keep-travel-spending-at-home/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[The familiar stream of Canadian licence plates heading south thinned dramatically in 2025, and the financial impact was impossible to]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The familiar stream of Canadian licence plates heading south thinned dramatically in 2025, and the financial impact was impossible to miss. Canadian residents spent C$18.8 billion on visits to the United States, down 15.1 per cent from a year earlier—a decline of roughly C$3.3 billion. At the same time, domestic tourism spending climbed to C$81.3 billion, while overseas trips and expenditures also increased.</p>
<p>The shift was more than a temporary change in vacation plans. Political tensions, “Buy Canadian” sentiment, a weak dollar and concerns about value all influenced where households chose to spend limited travel budgets. For American hotels, restaurants, retailers and attractions—especially near the border—the result was fewer customers. For Canadian destinations, it created a rare opportunity to keep more tourism dollars circulating at home.</p>
<h2>A $3.3-Billion Retreat From a Familiar Market</h2>
<p>The headline number comes from a sharp reversal in a travel relationship that had long felt almost automatic. Statistics Canada recorded C$18.8 billion in Canadian spending during U.S. visits in 2025, 15.1 per cent less than in 2024. That percentage implies the previous year’s total was approximately C$22.1 billion, leaving a gap of roughly C$3.3 billion. Leisure travel accounted for most of the pullback: spending on U.S. holidays and recreational visits fell by C$2.2 billion to C$12.1 billion.</p>
<p>The decline was not limited to one type of traveller. Leisure visits to the United States dropped by 3.2 million, or 21.5 per cent, while trips to see friends and relatives also decreased. That matters because Canadian tourism spending reaches far beyond hotel rooms. It includes meals, shopping, attractions, local transportation and other purchases that support workers in destination communities. A cancelled weekend in Buffalo or a skipped winter trip to Florida may appear small on its own, but millions of similar decisions produced a multibillion-dollar change in spending.</p>
<h2>Fewer Trips, but the Remaining Travellers Spent More</h2>
<p>Canadian residents made 23.1 million trips that included a U.S. visit in 2025, down 23.5 per cent from 2024 and 26.7 per cent below 2019. Spending fell by a smaller 15.1 per cent. That difference suggests the Canadians who still travelled south tended to spend more per recorded visit, stay longer, choose costlier travel or absorb higher prices and exchange-rate costs. The United States did not lose every high-value traveller, but it lost a substantial amount of overall traffic.</p>
<p>The pattern remained visible late in the year. During the fourth quarter, Canadians made 5.4 million U.S. visits, a 24 per cent annual decline, and spent C$4 billion, down 16.4 per cent. Overnight visitors spent an average of C$1,138 per trip and stayed approximately 5.1 nights. Families who kept longstanding holiday plans or had relatives to visit still crossed the border. Discretionary day trips, shopping runs and quick weekend getaways, however, were much easier to cancel or replace with alternatives closer to home.</p>
<h2>Border Communities Felt the Loss First</h2>
<p>The national total became especially tangible in American communities built around Canadian traffic. A December 2025 report from the minority staff of the U.S. Congress Joint Economic Committee said passenger-vehicle crossings from Canada into New York fell more than 17 per cent during the first ten months of the year. In a North Country Chamber of Commerce poll cited by the report, 83 per cent of businesses reported fewer Canadian customers and 35 per cent said they had reduced staffing.</p>
<p>Similar patterns appeared across the border. Passenger-vehicle crossings from Canada were reported down approximately 25 per cent in Maine, more than 24 per cent in Washington and more than 28 per cent in Vermont. The congressional report also said Canadian credit-card spending in Vermont fell 49 per cent between January and September compared with the same period in 2024. These places are accustomed to Canadian families filling hotels, buying fuel, shopping and eating locally. When that traffic disappears, the effects quickly reach servers, retail employees, independent businesses and communities dependent on visitor-generated revenue.</p>
<h2>Canada Captured More of Its Own Travel Budget</h2>
<p>As U.S. travel weakened, more money stayed within Canada. Canadian residents made 342 million domestic visits in 2025, up 1.5 per cent from 2024 and 2.5 per cent above 2019. Domestic tourism expenditures reached C$81.3 billion, an 8.7 per cent annual increase and 41.8 per cent more than in 2019. Some of that spending growth reflected higher prices, but the increase in domestic visits shows that the change was not purely the result of inflation.</p>
<p>The second quarter offered a clearer view of the economic lift. Domestic tourism spending increased 2.9 per cent, helping real tourism GDP grow 1.3 per cent even as economy-wide real GDP by industry declined 0.2 per cent. Tourism employment rose to 712,100 jobs, with gains in food services, recreation and entertainment. Money that might once have gone to an American hotel, restaurant or attraction was more likely to support a Canadian business instead. For seasonal destinations, that redirection could mean stronger bookings, fuller dining rooms and more working hours for local employees.</p>
<h2>Hotels, Restaurants and Attractions Shared the Gain</h2>
<p>The domestic shift was not confined to one corner of the tourism economy. In the second quarter of 2025, Canadian spending on accommodation services rose 6.5 per cent, while spending on food and beverage services increased 3.9 per cent. Non-tourism purchases made during trips, including retail goods, also increased. This helps explain why a decision to vacation closer to home can benefit considerably more than the hotel, cottage or campground listed on the original booking.</p>
<p>A family replacing a U.S. road trip with a week in Quebec, Nova Scotia or British Columbia may still buy fuel, eat at restaurants, visit museums and pay for recreational activities. Those purchases flow through suppliers, workers and public finances. Statistics Canada estimated that every C$100 spent by Canadian tourists in Canada generated an average of C$25.14 in government revenue in 2024 through consumption taxes, income taxes and other channels. The figures do not mean every Canadian destination benefited equally, but they demonstrate how travel spending retained at home can circulate through a much broader economic network.</p>
<h2>Overseas Destinations Also Won Canadian Business</h2>
<p>Not every traveller who avoided the United States chose a staycation. Canadian residents made 14.3 million overseas visits in 2025, up 10.2 per cent from 2024 and 16.3 per cent from 2019. Spending on those visits climbed 17.5 per cent to C$31.3 billion. That contrast is important: Canadians did not simply stop travelling. Many redirected their plans toward destinations that felt more appealing, welcoming or worthwhile.</p>
<p>The fourth quarter showed where some of that demand went. Mexico received 673,000 Canadian visits, followed by France with 236,000 and the Dominican Republic with 231,000. Overseas travellers spent an average of C$2,278 per visit and stayed 13.4 nights during the quarter. These trips are generally more expensive than a short U.S. getaway, yet demand still increased. That weakens the argument that the U.S. decline was caused only by squeezed household budgets. Cost mattered, but destination preference, political sentiment and the desire for a different experience also appear to have influenced decisions.</p>
<h2>Politics Became Part of the Vacation Decision</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada linked the abrupt change in travel patterns to political tensions that intensified after the new U.S. administration took office in early 2025. Tariff threats, “America First” policies and repeated rhetoric involving Canada altered the emotional calculation behind a trip that had once seemed routine. For some households, avoiding the United States became a practical expression of support for Canadian businesses rather than merely a change in itinerary.</p>
<p>Bank of Canada research captured that shift while it was happening. In its second-quarter 2025 consumer expectations study, 55.1 per cent of respondents planned to spend less on U.S. vacations because of the trade conflict, while 34.8 per cent planned to spend more on vacations in Canada. About 60 per cent also intended to increase spending on domestic goods. Follow-up interviews showed that some Canadians still liked the United States and had personal connections there but did not feel comfortable directing discretionary money south. That distinction helps explain why the downturn became broader and more persistent than a normal seasonal fluctuation.</p>
<h2>A Weak Canadian Dollar Added Another Barrier</h2>
<p>Political frustration arrived alongside an unfavourable exchange rate. The Bank of Canada’s annual average showed that one U.S. dollar cost C$1.3978 in 2025, compared with C$1.3698 in 2024. That was approximately a two per cent increase in the Canadian-dollar cost of U.S. currency before credit-card fees or other conversion charges. A US$1,000 hotel, dining and entertainment bill therefore translated to roughly C$1,398 at the 2025 annual average rate.</p>
<p>The currency difference alone cannot explain a 23.5 per cent drop in U.S. visits, especially because Canadians increased travel to several overseas destinations. It did, however, make an already sensitive decision easier to reconsider. American hotel rates, restaurant prices, resort fees and attraction tickets all become more noticeable when converted into Canadian dollars. A domestic trip removes the foreign-exchange penalty, while a longer international trip may feel more distinctive for a similar total cost. The weaker dollar acted as an amplifier: political tensions reduced the desire to go, while the final price made staying away easier to justify.</p>
<h2>The U.S. Is Trying to Win Canadians Back</h2>
<p>The stakes are significant because Canada has traditionally been one of the United States’ most important international visitor markets. Using its own methodology and U.S.-dollar figures, the U.S. Travel Association estimated that 20.4 million Canadian visits in 2024 generated US$20.5 billion in spending and supported 140,000 American jobs. Its early warning suggested that even a 10 per cent decline could erase US$2.1 billion in spending. The eventual Canadian pullback was considerably larger by several measures.</p>
<p>There are early signs of a partial rebound, but not a return to normal. Preliminary Statistics Canada data showed Canadian return trips from the United States rising year over year in April, May and June 2026. However, June trips remained 28.7 per cent below June 2024, and the agency said the apparent increase partly reflected comparison with an unusually weak 2025 base. Brand USA is preparing a new Canadian marketing campaign, while Tourism Economics forecasts 16.7 million Canadian arrivals in 2026. Rebuilding demand may require more than advertising. Prices, confidence at the border and the broader political relationship will determine whether Canadians restore their old travel habits.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Canada-Travel.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/trump-uses-never-before-deployed-1930-law-to-hit-canada-with-50-tariffs/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Trump Uses Never-Before-Deployed 1930 Law to Hit Canada With 50% Tariffs]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 20 Jul 26 17:09:32 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/trump-uses-never-before-deployed-1930-law-to-hit-canada-with-50-tariffs/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For decades, Canada and the United States built their economic relationship around the idea that most goods could cross the]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For decades, Canada and the United States built their economic relationship around the idea that most goods could cross the border with little friction. That assumption has now been jolted by a tool buried in Depression-era law. President Donald Trump has ordered 50% tariffs on a broad range of Canadian products under Section 338 of the Tariff Act of 1930, an authority the United States had never previously used to impose duties.</p>
<p>The measures are scheduled to begin after a 30-day waiting period and reach products as varied as wine, hockey sticks and cement, while several strategic commodities remain exempt. More than a tariff increase, the decision tests how far a president can stretch an old statute, how much protection the North American trade pact still provides and how quickly deeply integrated supply chains can adjust to a political shock.</p>
<h2>A 30-Day Clock Starts on a 50% Tariff Shock</h2>
<p>Trump signed three proclamations addressing what his administration describes as discriminatory Canadian practices involving automobiles, alcohol and dairy products. The resulting duties are scheduled to take effect 30 days after the proclamations, giving businesses and both governments a narrow window to negotiate, reroute shipments or prepare for significantly higher border costs. The White House highlighted products ranging from wine to hockey sticks to cement—a mix that makes the action unusually visible. One is connected to provincial liquor systems, another is closely associated with Canadian identity and the third is essential to construction.</p>
<p>The tariff is broad, but it is not universal. Energy products, potash, fish and critical minerals are among the stated exemptions, limiting immediate disruptions to supplies that many American industries cannot easily replace. Steel and aluminum are already governed by separate national-security tariffs. For an Ontario manufacturer with an American customer waiting on an August delivery, those distinctions offer little comfort when its product is covered. A duty equal to half the import value can erase profit margins, force contracts to be renegotiated or leave finished goods sitting on the Canadian side of the border.</p>
<h2>The Obscure Law Behind the Move</h2>
<p>Section 338 is one of the most sweeping and least tested tariff powers still sitting in the U.S. Code. It allows a president who finds that another country is placing American commerce at a disadvantage to proclaim new or additional duties of up to 50% of a product’s value. The statute specifies that the duties begin 30 days after the proclamation. In more extreme circumstances, it also contemplates excluding products from the offending country if the alleged discrimination continues or increases.</p>
<p>That language was written for a trading system very different from the one now governed by detailed free-trade agreements and World Trade Organization rules. What makes Trump’s action historic is not merely the law’s age. The Congressional Research Service reported that the United States had never previously imposed tariffs under Section 338, although the threat was occasionally used as negotiating leverage. Its modern procedures are therefore largely untested. CRS has also identified an unresolved question about the International Trade Commission’s role in determining whether discrimination exists. A House bill introduced in 2025 sought to repeal the authority altogether. Trump’s proclamations have turned those academic and legislative concerns into an immediate commercial dispute involving America’s second-largest goods export market.</p>
<h2>Why Trump Says Canada Discriminated</h2>
<p>The administration’s case focuses on three different disputes. On automobiles, Trump points to Canada’s 25% tariff, introduced in April 2025, on certain U.S. vehicles that do not qualify for preferential treatment under the continental trade agreement. On alcohol, Washington objects to provincial and territorial liquor boards that stopped purchasing and distributing many American beverages after the earlier tariff confrontation. The U.S. Trade Representative reported that, as of the end of 2025, every provincial and territorial liquor authority except those in Alberta and Saskatchewan had halted the distribution of U.S. alcohol.</p>
<p>Dairy is the oldest and most technically complicated grievance. Canada’s supply-management system uses production controls and tariff-rate quotas to protect dairy, poultry and egg producers. The USTR’s 2026 trade-barriers report says imports above quota can face tariffs of 245% on cheese and 298% on butter. Washington also argues that Canadian cheese-composition rules reduce demand for American dry milk proteins and that some European products receive more favourable treatment than comparable U.S. goods. Canada has defended key parts of its system under negotiated trade rules, and a 2023 USMCA panel found that the Canadian dairy measures it examined were not inconsistent with the provisions cited by Washington. That history makes the word “discrimination” politically powerful but legally contested.</p>
<h2>The Tariff Map: What Is Hit and What Is Spared</h2>
<p>The most important question for companies is not simply whether Canada has been targeted, but whether a particular customs classification appears in the proclamations. Initial descriptions indicate that the tariffs reach many products that had continued to enter duty-free under USMCA rules, including consumer goods and manufactured materials. Wine, sporting goods and cement are prominent examples, while reporting has also identified possible exposure for clothing, furniture, dairy products and other categories. The final burden on an importer will depend on the detailed tariff codes, existing duties and whether separate trade remedies already apply.</p>
<p>The exemptions reveal Washington’s pressure points. Canadian oil and gas are deeply connected to U.S. refineries and energy security. Potash is a critical fertilizer input for American farmers, while Canadian critical minerals feed advanced manufacturing and defence supply chains. Fish has also been excluded. Sparing those products reduces the likelihood of an immediate supply shock in politically sensitive American markets, but it concentrates the pain on firms with fewer strategic carve-outs. A hockey-stick maker may be able to search for another distributor. A cement producer serving a nearby U.S. construction market faces the harder problem of transporting a heavy, comparatively low-margin product much farther from home.</p>
<h2>USMCA Still Exists, but Its Shield Has Been Pierced</h2>
<p>The new tariffs are especially significant because they apply to goods that previously qualified for duty-free treatment under the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement. USMCA entered into force in July 2020 and was designed to preserve tariff-free continental trade for products meeting its rules of origin. At the 2026 joint review, the United States declined to extend the agreement for a new 16-year term. That did not instantly terminate the pact. It remains in force and moves into annual reviews, with a possible expiry in 2036 if the three countries never agree to extend it.</p>
<p>For exporters, that legal survival offers less comfort when Washington uses a separate domestic statute to impose new duties anyway. The decision signals that satisfying USMCA origin rules may no longer guarantee practical protection from U.S. tariffs. It also changes the negotiating balance. Four days before the announcement, U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer said formal negotiations with Canada had not begun, even though officials remained in regular contact, while talks with Mexico were moving forward. The implementation period now functions as both a statutory waiting period and a negotiating deadline imposed under pressure.</p>
<h2>The Cost Could Cross the Border Both Ways</h2>
<p>Canada’s exposure is enormous because the bilateral market is not a collection of isolated export transactions. U.S. government data put two-way goods trade at approximately US$719.5 billion in 2025, including US$383 billion in imports from Canada and US$336.5 billion in American exports to Canada. Canadian government briefing material says more than 75% of Canada’s exports go to the United States and roughly 70% of those exports are incorporated into American supply chains. A tariff can therefore strike a Canadian producer first, then raise costs for a U.S. factory, wholesaler or builder using the imported material.</p>
<p>Past tariff episodes suggest that foreign producers do not automatically absorb the bill. Research examining the 2018 U.S. trade war found that tariffs were almost fully passed through to the prices paid by American importers. One major study estimated that the measures had reduced U.S. real income by approximately US$1.4 billion per month by the end of 2018. That is not a precise forecast for the Canadian tariffs, but it illustrates why a 50% rate carries domestic risks for Washington. The Bank of Canada has similarly warned that integrated supply chains can cause tariff costs to accumulate at multiple production stages, particularly when components cross the border several times before a finished product reaches a customer.</p>
<h2>The Legal and Diplomatic Fight Starts Now</h2>
<p>Section 338 gives the president broad authority, but broad statutory language does not guarantee an uncontested result. Because the provision has never been used to impose tariffs, courts have no modern record showing how much evidence a president must provide, whether the International Trade Commission must make a prior finding or how the statute interacts with later trade laws. The Supreme Court’s February 2026 ruling against Trump’s use of emergency powers for sweeping tariffs also demonstrated that judges are willing to examine the boundaries of delegated trade authority.</p>
<p>Canadian exporters, U.S. importers or industry associations could test the proclamations in court, while Ottawa could pursue dispute-settlement options under USMCA or the WTO. Canada must also decide whether to negotiate during the 30-day window, prepare targeted retaliation, seek sector-specific exemptions or combine all three approaches. Ottawa previously maintained counter-tariffs covering approximately C$51.4 billion in annual U.S. steel, aluminum and automotive imports, showing that retaliation is more than a theoretical possibility. Yet every countermeasure raises costs for Canadian buyers and manufacturers as well. The central question is whether the 50% threat produces concessions or hardens resistance. Either outcome could turn Section 338 from an obscure historical footnote into a precedent available to future presidents against allies and rivals alike.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/shutterstock_2747572821.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/trumps-own-envoy-says-america-needs-millions-more-barrels-and-canada-is-one-of-the-best-sources/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Trump’s Own Envoy Says America Needs Millions More Barrels—and Canada Is One of the Best Sources]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 20 Jul 26 14:16:36 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/trumps-own-envoy-says-america-needs-millions-more-barrels-and-canada-is-one-of-the-best-sources/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For years, Donald Trump’s energy message has rested on a simple claim: the United States has enough resources to stand]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For years, Donald Trump’s energy message has rested on a simple claim: the United States has enough resources to stand on its own. His ambassador to Canada has now offered a more complicated—and more revealing—version of the story. Speaking in Edmonton, Pete Hoekstra said the U.S. needs to find an additional three to four million barrels of oil per day over the next decade, describing Alberta and Saskatchewan as among the most compelling places to secure them.</p>
<p>That admission does not mean Washington is preparing to hand Canada a guaranteed supply contract. Hoekstra also stressed that the United States has alternatives and that Canada must make its case. Still, the underlying economics are difficult to ignore. American refineries already depend heavily on Canadian crude, cross-border pipelines are deeply embedded in the continent’s fuel system, and Canada offers a stable source close to the markets that need it most.</p>
<h2>A Remark That Cuts Through Washington’s Rhetoric</h2>
<p>Hoekstra’s Edmonton remarks were striking because they came from inside the Trump administration, not from an Alberta premier, an oil executive or a Canadian trade negotiator. He said the United States would need to locate three to four million additional barrels per day over the next decade and that Alberta and Saskatchewan could make the “most compelling” case for supplying part of that demand. He also said cabinet members had been eager to reach an agreement for more Canadian oil, while Trump preferred to keep negotiating because other suppliers remained available.</p>
<p>The message was both an endorsement and a warning. Canada has a strong commercial argument, but Washington does not intend to treat access to the American market as an entitlement. Hoekstra made a similar point in earlier trade remarks, urging Canada to negotiate aggressively by showing how its integrated industries, comparable standards and existing infrastructure meet U.S. needs. In practical terms, he was telling Canadian governments to stop relying on geography alone and start selling reliability, speed and strategic value.</p>
<h2>Record U.S. Production Does Not Eliminate the Import Gap</h2>
<p>The United States is producing oil at historic levels, but that fact is often used too loosely in political debate. The U.S. Energy Information Administration’s July 2026 outlook projected average American crude production of roughly 13.8 million barrels per day this year. Yet U.S. refineries were expected to process about 16.3 million barrels of crude per day, while total petroleum-product consumption was forecast near 20.7 million barrels per day. Those categories are not identical, but together they show why record production does not translate into complete self-sufficiency.</p>
<p>America also exports crude and refined fuels, and its domestic production mix does not perfectly match what every refinery was built to process. A country can therefore be a major producer, a major exporter and a major importer at the same time. For motorists, airlines and trucking companies, the important question is not whether the United States produces a lot of oil in the abstract. It is whether the right grades can reach the right refineries at the right price. Canadian crude already fills a large part of that operational gap.</p>
<h2>Canada Already Supplies the Majority of Imported Crude</h2>
<p>Canada is not trying to enter the U.S. oil market from the sidelines. It is already the dominant external supplier. Canada Energy Regulator data show that Canada exported about 4.3 million barrels of crude per day in 2025, with approximately 3.9 million barrels per day going to the United States. Canada supplied 63.4 per cent of all crude oil imported by the U.S. that year—far more than any other country.</p>
<p>The financial stakes are equally large. Canadian crude exports were worth about C$140 billion in 2025, and roughly C$126.1 billion of that value came from shipments to the United States. Those flows support producers and workers in Western Canada, but they also feed refineries, petrochemical plants and fuel-distribution networks across the Midwest, Rocky Mountain region and Gulf Coast. The relationship is therefore not a favour from one country to the other. It is a mature industrial system in which Canadian supply and American processing capacity have grown around each other over decades.</p>
<h2>The Barrel Type Matters as Much as the Barrel Count</h2>
<p>Much of the rapid growth in U.S. production has come from relatively light crude, including shale output. A significant share of Canadian production, particularly from the oil sands, consists of heavier crude. That difference matters because many U.S. refineries have invested heavily in equipment designed to process those barrels into gasoline, diesel, jet fuel, asphalt, chemicals and other products. Replacing Canadian oil is therefore not as simple as directing more domestic shale output into the same facility.</p>
<p>The U.S. Energy Information Administration reported that Canadian crude represented about 24 per cent of total U.S. refinery throughput in 2023, up from 17 per cent a decade earlier. It also noted that many American refineries are specifically designed to handle heavy Canadian oil. For a refinery manager in the Midwest, this is a daily engineering and economics question rather than a patriotic slogan. A plant optimized for a particular feedstock can change its crude slate, but doing so may raise costs, reduce efficiency or require supplies from more distant and politically complicated producers.</p>
<h2>The Pipeline Network Gives Canada an Immediate Advantage</h2>
<p>Canada’s strongest advantage is not only the size of its resource. It is the infrastructure already connecting Western Canadian production to American refining centres. The Enbridge Mainline averaged about 3.2 million barrels per day in the first quarter of 2026. Keystone has nominal capacity of roughly 622,000 barrels per day, while Express can move about 310,000 barrels per day. Together, those systems form a large overland supply chain linked directly with established storage, trading and refinery hubs.</p>
<p>That does not mean several million extra barrels can begin flowing immediately. Existing systems are heavily utilized, and expansions still require contracts, capital, permits and construction. Enbridge is advancing projects that could add hundreds of thousands of barrels per day, while smaller optimization projects may unlock capacity faster than an entirely new pipeline. Canada’s Pacific outlet also matters: the expanded Trans Mountain system can carry about 890,000 barrels per day, giving producers access to overseas buyers and strengthening Canada’s negotiating position with the United States.</p>
<h2>Three to Four Million More Barrels Is Still an Enormous Ask</h2>
<p>Hoekstra’s three-to-four-million-barrel figure should not be read as a forecast that Canada will supply the entire increase. Canada produced a record volume in 2025, rising four per cent to 310.9 million cubic metres of crude oil and equivalent products. Even so, adding several million barrels per day would amount to an extraordinary expansion relative to the country’s current production base, requiring major new projects, pipeline capacity, labour, electricity, diluent, financing and regulatory approvals.</p>
<p>The Canada Energy Regulator’s current-measures scenario projects national crude production rising from about 5.5 million barrels per day in 2024 to 5.8 million by 2030, then reaching approximately 6.1 million around 2040. Its higher-growth scenario climbs to about 6.7 million barrels per day during the 2040s. Those projections suggest Canada could capture a meaningful share of additional U.S. demand, but not automatically all of it. The realistic near-term opportunity is measured in incremental expansions and market-share gains—not an overnight doubling of output.</p>
<h2>Energy Is Leverage, but Dependence Runs Both Ways</h2>
<p>Hoekstra’s remarks arrive while broader Canada-U.S. trade negotiations remain tense. Washington has criticized Canada for not offering enough concessions in the CUSMA review, even as the ambassador acknowledges that American energy demand creates an opening for Canadian producers. That contradiction gives Ottawa and the western provinces leverage: the United States wants secure barrels, and Canada can offer a politically stable source connected by existing infrastructure.</p>
<p>But Canada’s leverage has limits because its own industry remains heavily dependent on American customers. About 90 per cent of Canadian crude exports still went to the United States in 2025. Trans Mountain has begun changing that equation by opening more access to Pacific markets, and the Canada Energy Regulator says the share of western export supply with access to global markets could rise from roughly 13 per cent in 2025 to as much as 25 per cent in some future scenarios. The more credible Canada’s alternatives become, the stronger its negotiating position will be.</p>
<h2>A Durable Deal Would Need More Than a Handshake</h2>
<p>A serious North American energy agreement would require more than a political announcement about buying additional barrels. Producers need long-term shipping commitments before financing projects. Pipeline companies need predictable regulation and cross-border permits. Refiners need confidence that tariffs or sudden trade actions will not disrupt feedstock costs. Indigenous nations affected by major projects need meaningful consultation and opportunities for ownership, rather than participation added at the end of the process.</p>
<p>Environmental performance would also remain central. The oil and gas sector was Canada’s largest source of greenhouse-gas emissions in 2024, accounting for about 30 per cent of the national total. Any large production increase would intensify pressure to reduce methane, electrify operations and deploy carbon-management technology. Ottawa has expanded its Indigenous Loan Guarantee Program to C$10 billion, creating a tool that could support equity stakes in major infrastructure. The opportunity identified by Trump’s envoy is real, but converting it into durable prosperity would demand stable policy, credible emissions reductions and partnerships capable of surviving the next political cycle.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/oil-sand-mining.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canadas-world-cup-host-run-ends-with-estimated-1-07-billion-bill-still-unsettled/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada’s World Cup Host Run Ends With Estimated $1.07-Billion Bill Still Unsettled]]></title>
      <pubDate>Sun, 19 Jul 26 09:57:47 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canadas-world-cup-host-run-ends-with-estimated-1-07-billion-bill-still-unsettled/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s brief turn at the centre of world soccer ended in dramatic fashion at BC Place, where Vancouver’s final match]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s brief turn at the centre of world soccer ended in dramatic fashion at BC Place, where Vancouver’s final match required penalties to determine a winner. The stadium lights have since dimmed, temporary infrastructure is being removed and the tournament has shifted entirely to the United States. What remains is a much harder contest to settle: whether the experience justified its public cost.</p>
<p>The Parliamentary Budget Officer estimated that Canadian governments would spend approximately $1.066 billion to stage 13 matches in Toronto and Vancouver. That works out to roughly $82 million per game. Yet the figure is not a final invoice. Several budgets contained estimates, contingencies and projected revenues, meaning Canadians may not know the true financial outcome until governments complete their post-tournament accounting.</p>
<h2>The $1.07-Billion Figure Is Still Only an Estimate</h2>
<p>The Parliamentary Budget Officer’s calculation offers the clearest national snapshot available. It estimated federal support at approximately $473 million, with provincial, municipal and other levels of government responsible for another $593 million. Toronto hosted six matches, while Vancouver staged seven, including Canada’s group-stage appearances and two knockout games. The final Canadian-hosted match took place in Vancouver on July 7, when Switzerland defeated Colombia in a penalty shootout.</p>
<p>However, the PBO’s calculation was based largely on budgets and commitments available before the tournament was completed. Its analysis assumed that Toronto and British Columbia’s previously announced hosting totals would not increase. The office also warned that updated municipal and provincial spending plans could change the numbers. At the time of its review, only $96 million of the planned federal spending had been recorded as spent by January 2026. Outstanding invoices, contract adjustments and final security costs could therefore move the total in either direction.</p>
<h2>Ottawa’s Commitment Expanded as the Tournament Approached</h2>
<p>Federal involvement began modestly, with a $3.6-million grant to Canada Soccer during the early preparation period. Ottawa later committed up to $220 million directly to the Canadian host cities, divided between approximately $104 million for Toronto and $116 million for British Columbia. Budget 2025 then provided another $100 million for federal departments and agencies involved in delivering the event.</p>
<p>Security added another substantial layer. The federal government announced up to $145 million for provincial and municipal security operations, including $100 million for British Columbia and $45 million for Toronto. The PBO also identified planned spending by federal agencies, including approximately $79 million for the RCMP, $6.4 million for immigration services and $4.3 million for border operations. Those expenses reflect how hosting involved far more than opening stadium gates. Governments had to manage visas, border traffic, protected visitors, emergency planning, commercial-rights enforcement and security operations across crowded downtown areas.</p>
<h2>Toronto’s Six-Match Plan Reached $380 Million</h2>
<p>Toronto entered the tournament with a $380-million direct hosting budget. Approximately $226.4 million was allocated to operating expenses, while nearly $153.6 million was categorized as capital spending. That was considerably higher than the $300-million estimate presented to city council in 2022, before officials had confirmed the final number of matches and fully defined FIFA’s operational requirements.</p>
<p>The most visible investment was the transformation of BMO Field into the temporarily renamed Toronto Stadium. The work cost approximately $157.9 million, with the city providing $132.9 million and Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment contributing $25 million. Improvements included expanded seating, new broadcast infrastructure, videoboards and upgraded player facilities. The $380-million figure does not necessarily capture every public resource connected to the event. Toronto’s budget documents separately identified supporting projects, accelerated infrastructure work and existing staff resources that were redirected toward tournament preparation without being recorded as additional World Cup spending.</p>
<h2>Vancouver’s Financial Picture Became More Complicated</h2>
<p>Vancouver’s final pre-tournament projections showed why a single headline number can obscure the way major-event budgets are assembled. The city estimated that core hosting and event costs would fall between $320 million and $338 million. Services delivered by other public organizations, including transportation, ambulance and health agencies, were expected to add another $67 million to $74 million.</p>
<p>Combined provincial and municipal security expenses were estimated at approximately $242 million, partly offset by Ottawa’s $100-million security contribution. Vancouver also expected significant revenues to reduce the public burden. A temporary accommodation tax was projected to generate between $250 million and $260 million, while sponsorships, facility rentals, festival income and other sources were expected to provide an additional $43 million to $53 million. British Columbia said its projected net provincial cost had declined, with the upper estimate falling from $145 million to $114 million. Even so, officials acknowledged that final expenses could be affected by factors outside the city’s control.</p>
<h2>Governments Promised an Economic Return Beyond the Stadiums</h2>
<p>Supporters have argued that comparing hosting costs only with ticket revenue misses the broader economic value. The federal government projected that the World Cup would add approximately $2 billion to the Canadian economy, attract more than one million visitors and support thousands of jobs. Those benefits were expected to extend into hotels, restaurants, transportation, construction and tourism promotion.</p>
<p>Regional forecasts were similarly ambitious. An assessment prepared by Deloitte Canada projected that the tournament could generate up to $940 million in economic output for the Greater Toronto Area, including $520 million in GDP, $340 million in labour income and $25 million in government revenue. British Columbia projected approximately $1 billion in provincial GDP and more than $200 million in tax revenue during the tournament and the five years afterward. Those figures are forecasts rather than profits. Economic output includes activity that flows to workers and private businesses, while only a fraction returns directly to governments to offset their spending.</p>
<h2>Toronto’s Early Spending Data Told a Mixed Story</h2>
<p>The first available Toronto data suggested that visitors did spend more, although the increase was uneven. Moneris transactions during the tournament’s first two weeks showed hotel spending rising 18 per cent from the same period a year earlier. Grocery spending increased six per cent, while restaurants and bars recorded a more modest three-per-cent gain. Apparel spending declined five per cent.</p>
<p>Foreign-issued cards provided a brighter picture, with international spending at Toronto restaurants and bars rising 34 per cent. Still, hotel occupancy reportedly declined during the opening portion of the tournament, suggesting some regular tourists or business travellers may have avoided the city. The public-transit impact was clearer: ridership increased between 40 and 47 per cent on five streetcar routes serving the stadium and fan festival. Toronto officials said a complete revenue assessment would be released after the tournament, making these figures an early indicator rather than the final verdict on the promised economic windfall.</p>
<h2>Residents Remained Skeptical Despite the Celebration</h2>
<p>The atmosphere surrounding the matches was difficult to measure in dollars. Toronto supporters described crowded watch parties, conversations with visiting fans and a sense of community that stretched well beyond the stadium. Vancouver hosted Canada’s emphatic victory over Qatar and later watched the national team reach unfamiliar territory in the knockout rounds. The final Canadian-hosted game ended with Switzerland advancing over Colombia after a tense shootout.</p>
<p>Public enthusiasm did not eliminate concern over the cost. An Angus Reid Institute survey conducted shortly before kickoff found that 70 per cent of Greater Toronto respondents and 72 per cent of Metro Vancouver respondents believed hosting was not worth the public expense. More than two-thirds also felt the event created too much disruption. The survey captured opinion before residents experienced the full tournament, but it revealed how difficult it would be for governments to declare success using atmosphere alone. Many residents wanted transparent evidence showing where the money went and what their communities received in return.</p>
<h2>The Real Legacy Test Starts After the Final Whistle</h2>
<p>Canada will retain several physical improvements. Toronto Stadium now has upgraded broadcast, hospitality and player facilities, while Centennial Park gained a regulation-sized training pitch and supporting infrastructure. Vancouver points to improvements at BC Place, Killarney Park and the city’s ability to coordinate transportation, security and emergency services during a global event. Community pitches, youth programming and increased interest in soccer could also produce benefits that take years to measure.</p>
<p>History nevertheless gives residents reason to demand careful accounting. Academic research covering 43 Olympic Games and men’s World Cups found that average event costs exceeded direct revenues, producing an average return on investment of negative 38 per cent. The PBO noted that Canada’s estimated per-game spending was broadly comparable with earlier World Cups, but being typical does not automatically make it good value. The final judgment will depend on audited costs, actual tax revenues, tourism changes, long-term facility use and whether governments clearly disclose expenses that fell outside their headline budgets.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/AI-Powered-Opta-Data-Integrated-League-Wide-Soccer.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/u-s-republicans-accuse-canada-of-not-doing-enough-to-prevent-wildfires/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[U.S. Republicans Accuse Canada of Not Doing Enough to Prevent Wildfires]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 26 13:28:46 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/u-s-republicans-accuse-canada-of-not-doing-enough-to-prevent-wildfires/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Smoke does not stop at a border checkpoint, and neither does the anger it creates. After another wave of Canadian]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Smoke does not stop at a border checkpoint, and neither does the anger it creates. After another wave of Canadian wildfire smoke spread across Michigan and much of the U.S. Midwest and Northeast, four Republican members of Michigan’s congressional delegation accused Ottawa of failing to prevent a recurring cross-border health threat. Their July 15 letter demanded more forest thinning, fuel reduction, prescribed burning and enforcement against deliberately set fires.</p>
<p>The criticism lands during a rapidly worsening Canadian fire season, but it also simplifies a problem shaped by remote lightning strikes, limited firefighting capacity, decades of fire suppression and a warming climate. Canada’s record shows both significant new spending and serious remaining gaps, leaving the central question less about whether action exists than whether it is fast, broad and effective enough.</p>
<h2>The Accusation Has Returned With Sharper Language</h2>
<p>Michigan Republicans Jack Bergman, John James, Lisa McClain and John Moolenaar framed the latest smoke emergency as the result of Canadian inaction. In a joint letter to Prime Minister Mark Carney, they argued that earlier warnings had produced too little progress and blamed what they described as chronic underinvestment in forest thinning, fuel reduction and prescribed burns. They also questioned enforcement against arson and suggested U.S. agencies could explore a more direct role in cross-border fuel reduction and firefighting capacity.</p>
<p>The intervention was unusually blunt, but it was not isolated. Republican officials from several northern states made similar complaints in 2025, when smoke repeatedly disrupted outdoor life and triggered health advisories. Some urged the International Joint Commission to examine Canadian practices, while others floated wildfire smoke as a possible issue in wider trade discussions. The political appeal is clear: families see orange skies, cancelled activities and air-quality warnings, then demand accountability. Still, the claim that Canada has done nothing is not supported by the public record. The more defensible argument is that existing measures have not yet prevented repeated smoke emergencies.</p>
<h2>Smoke Turned a Canadian Emergency Into a U.S. Political Crisis</h2>
<p>By July 16, Canada had 859 active wildfires, including 113 classified as out of control, while approximately 2.384 million hectares had burned. Many of the most significant fires were in Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Ontario. Ontario requested federal help for evacuations in remote northern communities, and roughly 1,600 people had been evacuated from First Nations communities by July 15. Near Armstrong, Ontario, Canadian National Railway suspended operations after fire surrounded a train and forced employees and residents from the area.</p>
<p>The smoke rapidly transformed those distant fires into an urban emergency hundreds of kilometres away. Detroit recorded an IQAir reading of 600, while federal monitoring showed dangerous smoke across parts of Minnesota, Michigan, Illinois, Ohio and other states. New York City distributed KN95 masks and urged residents to reduce outdoor exposure days before the World Cup final in nearby New Jersey. The speed of the escalation was striking: a July 9 federal update said national activity remained below the five-year average, yet a week later Canada had more active fires than at the same point in either of the previous two years.</p>
<h2>Republicans Are Pointing to Real, but Limited, Fire-Management Tools</h2>
<p>Forest thinning, community fire guards and prescribed burns are not invented political talking points. Fire specialists use them to remove vegetation that can feed an intense blaze, slow fire spread and improve the odds that crews can hold a fire near homes or infrastructure. Parks Canada reported conducting 15 prescribed fires across 1,988 hectares in nine parks or sites during 2025. It also uses FireSmart standards, mechanical tree removal and targeted fuel breaks in places where people, buildings and transportation corridors face elevated risk.</p>
<p>The limitation is scale and timing. A prescribed burn is a complex operation that can take years to plan and can proceed only when wind, fuel moisture, drought conditions, air quality and staffing all fall within a safe window. Those windows may be brief or may not appear at all in a particular season. Fuel treatments are also most practical around communities and strategic corridors, not across every remote forest where lightning may strike. These tools can reduce damage and improve suppression, but they cannot guarantee a smoke-free summer or prevent every large fire across Canada’s vast northern landscapes.</p>
<h2>Canada’s Geography Makes a Simple Prevention Promise Impossible</h2>
<p>Lightning starts roughly 45% to 46% of Canadian wildfires but accounts for about 81% to 83% of the area burned. Those fires often occur in remote locations and may ignite in clusters, making rapid access difficult. Research on the 2023 season found that fires larger than 200 hectares represented only a small share of incidents but accounted for approximately 97% of the total area burned. Once a fire survives initial attack and enters a stretch of hot, dry and windy weather, its growth can outpace even a major suppression effort.</p>
<p>Fire is also a natural process in boreal ecosystems, which complicates demands that every ignition be extinguished immediately. Where no community or critical asset is threatened, agencies may monitor or manage a fire rather than commit scarce crews to dangerous terrain. That does not mean prevention is irrelevant. Human-caused ignitions can be reduced through bans, enforcement and public compliance, while fuel treatments can protect populated areas. However, the national data do not support treating arson as the principal explanation for Canada’s burned area. Lightning and extreme fire weather remain central to the problem.</p>
<h2>Climate Conditions Are Expanding the Window for Extreme Fire</h2>
<p>The strongest evidence against a purely management-based explanation comes from the fire-weather record. During Canada’s record 2023 season, the average temperature from May through October was 2.2°C above the 1991–2020 average. More than 14.6 million hectares burned, about four times the recent 10-year average. Peer-reviewed research concluded that human-caused climate change enabled sustained extreme fire-weather conditions, with widespread heat, dryness and long periods in which fires could continue growing.</p>
<p>That does not mean climate change determines every ignition or fully explains the size of every 2026 fire. Local precipitation, wind, vegetation, lightning and human behaviour still matter. It does mean hotter conditions can dry fuels faster, lengthen the season and create simultaneous emergencies across several provinces, stretching aircraft and crews at the same time. Natural Resources Canada says the country’s wildfire season has already become longer, while projections indicate some regions could face seasons more than a month longer by 2100. Any diagnosis that focuses only on thinning and enforcement leaves out a force that is making fires harder to control.</p>
<h2>Canada Has Increased Spending, Though Capacity Gaps Remain</h2>
<p>Ottawa has announced substantial investments since the record 2023 season. For 2026 through 2031, the federal government committed $316.7 million to lease and manage national aerial firefighting capacity, including 10 aircraft and two support assets secured for this season. Other commitments include $285 million for wildfire resilience and FireSmart expansion, $256 million for specialized provincial and territorial equipment, $28 million intended to train 1,000 additional firefighters, and $47.8 million for Parks Canada preparedness and risk reduction.</p>
<p>The federal government says its wildfire-resilience commitments since 2019 total close to $1 billion, including research, Indigenous fire knowledge, satellite monitoring and community mitigation. Those figures directly challenge the idea that Canadian governments have simply ignored the problem. They do not prove the response is sufficient. Aircraft must be positioned, firefighters trained and retained, and provincial systems coordinated during periods when several regions need help at once. Canada’s decentralized emergency system also means provinces and territories lead the initial response before requesting federal support. The fairer criticism is that rising risk may be moving faster than institutions can expand.</p>
<h2>Communities on Both Sides Are Paying the Price</h2>
<p>The Republicans’ anger resonates because wildfire smoke is not merely an inconvenience. Fine particulate matter, known as PM2.5, can penetrate deep into the lungs and is associated with coughing, breathing difficulty, worsened asthma and other respiratory and cardiovascular effects. During the July 16 smoke event, dangerous readings affected major U.S. cities far from the flames. For a child with asthma, an outdoor worker or an older adult with heart disease, the border offers no protection from exposure.</p>
<p>Canadians living near the fires face the smoke plus evacuation, disrupted transportation and the possibility of losing homes or community infrastructure. First Nations are especially exposed because many communities are remote and surrounded by fire-prone landscapes. Federal data estimate that First Nations account for 42% of wildfire-related evacuations despite representing about 5% of Canada’s population; in 2025, 44,920 people from 61 on-reserve First Nations were displaced. That reality makes the suggestion that Canadian officials are indifferent difficult to sustain. American health concerns are legitimate, but Canada is not exporting a problem it escapes at home.</p>
<h2>Cooperation Offers More Leverage Than a Cross-Border Blame Fight</h2>
<p>Canada and the United States already have a framework designed for this challenge. A 2023 memorandum expanded bilateral wildfire cooperation beyond emergency suppression to include prevention, research, innovation, technical coordination and risk mitigation. Firefighting support has historically moved in both directions. When destructive fires struck Southern California in January 2025, Canada prepared personnel and other assistance in coordination with U.S. agencies, describing that support as reciprocal.</p>
<p>That framework offers more practical leverage than threats of unilateral involvement. The two countries can improve joint smoke forecasting, pre-position crews and aircraft, coordinate fuel treatments near communities and the border, share satellite intelligence, and expand Indigenous-led cultural burning where appropriate. They can also address the longer-term warming trend that is increasing fire danger across North America, including in the United States. Republican lawmakers have drawn attention to a real cross-border health problem and to prevention tools that deserve greater use. But reducing the dispute to Canadian negligence risks turning a shared emergency into a nationalist argument when the smoke itself demonstrates how little room there is for one-country solutions.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/Wildfires-forest-burning-place.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/business-closures-outpace-openings-for-third-straight-quarter-as-investment-plans-sink-6-3/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Business Closures Outpace Openings for Third Straight Quarter as Investment Plans Sink 6.3%]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 26 11:55:12 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/business-closures-outpace-openings-for-third-straight-quarter-as-investment-plans-sink-6-3/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s economy is sending two very different signals. Growth is expected to regain momentum through the middle of 2026, yet]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s economy is sending two very different signals. Growth is expected to regain momentum through the middle of 2026, yet the machinery of business renewal is moving in reverse. Revised data show business exits exceeding entries for three consecutive quarters, while private investment is projected to fall 6.3% in the second quarter.</p>
<p>That combination carries more weight than either figure alone. When firms disappear faster than new ones take their place, communities lose employers, customers and suppliers. When surviving companies also postpone equipment, technology and expansion, productivity suffers long after the immediate slowdown has passed. The emerging concern is not simply that a few weak businesses are closing. It is that uncertainty, higher costs and uneven demand may be discouraging the next generation of firms from replacing them.</p>
<h2>What the Three-Quarter Streak Really Measures</h2>
<p>The latest revised estimates show a clear deterioration through 2025. Business entries exceeded exits by neither a narrow margin nor a one-month statistical quirk. In the first quarter, exits surpassed entries by 9,844. The gap narrowed to 2,547 in the second quarter, then widened again to 7,561 in the third. During that third quarter, 45,489 businesses entered the economy while 53,050 exited. It marked the first sustained run of net business losses since the disruption surrounding the pandemic.</p>
<p>Those figures require careful interpretation. A business exit is not identical to a “closed” sign appearing in a storefront window. Statistical agencies may need as long as 24 months to confirm that an operation has permanently left the market, and exit estimates lag entry data by roughly six months. Recent quarters are therefore modelled and can be revised as tax, payroll and administrative records become more complete. That does not make the trend meaningless. It means the three-quarter streak is best understood as a delayed warning about business formation and survival, rather than a real-time count of shops that shut their doors last week.</p>
<h2>The 6.3% Investment Drop May Be the Bigger Warning</h2>
<p>The projected 6.3% decline in private investment during the second quarter of 2026 suggests that caution has spread beyond firms already in distress. A further 4.7% contraction is projected for the third quarter. Private investment covers the long-lived assets that allow companies to grow or operate more efficiently, including machinery, buildings, software, vehicles and technology. When those purchases are deferred, the immediate effect may look modest. A contractor keeps an older truck, a restaurant postpones a kitchen upgrade, or a manufacturer delays adding a production line. Over time, however, those decisions limit capacity and raise operating costs.</p>
<p>The outlook is not uniformly bleak. The Bank of Canada has reported that investment intentions remain relatively solid among some businesses, particularly where commodity prices or capacity needs support spending. Both findings can be true at once. A group of large energy or resource companies may proceed with major projects while a much broader population of smaller firms trims, delays or reduces the size of planned investments. The result is an economy in which capital spending becomes concentrated in a few strong sectors, while everyday businesses preserve cash until demand, financing conditions and trade rules become easier to predict.</p>
<h2>Equipment and Technology Costs Are Forcing Hard Choices</h2>
<p>Cost pressure is one reason investment plans are weakening. Thirty-eight per cent of small and medium-sized businesses identified the cost of capital equipment and technology as a serious constraint, far above the long-run average of 24%. The burden was especially pronounced in transportation and utilities, where 60% reported difficulty. It also increased with business size: 56% of firms with at least 50 employees cited the problem, compared with 34% of the smallest firms. Machinery prices, borrowing costs, tariffs, supply disruptions and currency movements can all turn a routine replacement into a major financial decision.</p>
<p>For an independent garage, that decision could involve choosing between a new diagnostic system and preserving enough cash to cover payroll during a slow month. For a delivery company, it may mean extending the life of vehicles that cost more to maintain and consume more fuel. The report estimates that, at May 2026 import levels, a one-cent decline in the Canadian dollar would add about $2.7 billion to the annualized cost of imported industrial machinery and electronic equipment, all else equal. Delayed investment can therefore create a cycle of higher repair bills, more downtime and weaker productivity—the very problems new equipment was meant to solve.</p>
<h2>Economic Growth Can Return Without a Broad Business Recovery</h2>
<p>The headline growth outlook is stronger than the business-entry figures might suggest. The CFIB and AppEco model projects annualized real GDP growth of 2.7% in the second quarter and 1.6% in the third. That would represent a rebound from an official first quarter in which Canada’s real GDP was essentially unchanged. Higher activity in construction, energy and other capital-intensive industries can lift national output quickly, especially when commodity production or large projects accelerate.</p>
<p>Yet GDP does not reveal how widely growth is shared. A major energy project can add billions of dollars in output without creating a comparable number of new independent businesses. Strong spending in one province or industry can also mask weakness among retailers, professional firms or local service providers elsewhere. This helps explain why national growth can improve while business exits remain elevated and investment plans fall. The two measures answer different questions: GDP shows how much the economy produces, while entry, exit and capital-spending data reveal whether the base of firms is expanding and renewing itself. A durable recovery normally needs both—not only more output from established leaders, but enough confidence for smaller companies to launch, replace equipment and hire.</p>
<h2>Ontario, British Columbia and Alberta Carry Most of the Losses</h2>
<p>The national decline is heavily concentrated. In the third quarter of 2025, Ontario recorded 16,423 business entries and 23,252 exits, producing a net loss of 6,829. British Columbia posted a net decline of 1,304, while Alberta lost 1,135. Ontario and Alberta had each recorded three consecutive negative quarters, and British Columbia had reached five. Saskatchewan was the only province with a clearly positive balance, although its gain was just 32 businesses. Quebec was effectively flat, with three more exits than entries.</p>
<p>The industry picture is equally uneven. Health and education services added a net 1,131 businesses, accommodation and food services gained 380, and retail trade added 80. Those increases were overwhelmed by losses in professional services, which fell by 2,343, and transportation and utilities, down 1,988. Finance, insurance and real estate also recorded a net decline of 815. The contrast matters locally. A new clinic, café or shop can bring visible energy to a neighbourhood, but the disappearance of professional firms, carriers and financial-service businesses removes less visible infrastructure—accountants, consultants, logistics providers and advisers that other companies rely on to operate and expand.</p>
<h2>Trade Uncertainty Is Reshaping Expansion Plans</h2>
<p>The 2026 CUSMA review has added another layer of hesitation. The United States declined to extend the agreement at the July 1 review, but CUSMA remains in force and will face annual reviews unless the three countries agree to extend it before its scheduled 2036 expiry. Among Canadian small businesses, 35% said it was still too early to judge the impact of the review, while 64% preferred taking more time to secure a stronger agreement rather than accepting a quick deal. That preference reflects how difficult it is to invest when future market access, tariffs and rules of origin remain unsettled.</p>
<p>Businesses are already trying to reduce their exposure. Canada’s export mix shifted from roughly 75% going to the United States during 2016–2024 to about 69%, with the rest of the world taking 31%. Nearly half of firms trading with the United States said they had moved toward non-U.S. customers or suppliers; Canada itself was the most common alternative, followed by Asia and the European Union. Diversification is not frictionless. Sixty-five per cent identified shipping costs as a barrier to expansion, 38% cited border delays and 36% pointed to customs procedures. These obstacles can make a promising new market feel riskier than staying put, even when the existing U.S. relationship looks less dependable.</p>
<h2>A Cooler Labour Market Does Not Remove the Long-Term Risk</h2>
<p>Canada’s job vacancy rate fell to 2.8% in the second quarter, representing roughly 393,000 unfilled positions. That is far below the extreme shortages seen after the pandemic, but the burden remains uneven. Businesses with one to four employees reported a vacancy rate of 5.4%, compared with 1.9% among firms with at least 100 employees. Construction, professional services and other service industries also continued to report above-average difficulty filling positions. Smaller employers may therefore be cutting investment and facing business exits while still struggling to recruit specialized workers.</p>
<p>The broader danger is a slow erosion of productivity. Business-sector labour productivity fell 0.5% in the first quarter of 2026 after declining in the previous quarter. OECD research has long linked healthy business entry, competition and capital investment with the spread of new technology and more efficient use of workers and resources. The policy challenge is not to prevent every closure; inefficient firms must sometimes leave so stronger ones can grow. The concern arises when financing costs, regulatory barriers, internal trade friction and persistent uncertainty suppress both weak firms and promising newcomers. Without stronger renewal and investment, a temporary slowdown can harden into a lasting shortage of productive capacity, innovation and well-paying jobs.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Small-Businesses-Closing-Near-Condo-Hubs.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/u-s-push-for-permanent-daylight-time-could-force-canadas-hand/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[U.S. Push for Permanent Daylight Time Could Force Canada’s Hand]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 26 11:34:50 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/u-s-push-for-permanent-daylight-time-could-force-canadas-hand/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[The twice-yearly clock change has long been treated as a minor seasonal nuisance. That could change quickly if Washington turns]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The twice-yearly clock change has long been treated as a minor seasonal nuisance. That could change quickly if Washington turns its latest vote into law. On July 14, 2026, the U.S. House of Representatives approved the Sunshine Protection Act by 308 votes to 117, advancing a plan to keep most of the United States on daylight time throughout the year. The Senate remains the main obstacle, but the proposal now carries stronger momentum than earlier attempts.</p>
<p>For Canada, the decision would not be automatic. Timekeeping is largely controlled by provinces and territories. Yet Canada’s economy, transportation networks and daily schedules are deeply synchronized with the United States. A permanent shift south of the border could leave Canadian governments choosing between darker winter mornings and a disruptive one-hour gap with their largest trading partner.</p>
<h2>Washington Has Moved the Debate Beyond a Seasonal Complaint</h2>
<p>The U.S. House vote transformed permanent daylight time from a recurring political talking point into an active cross-border policy issue. The measure passed with support from 193 Republicans, 114 Democrats and one independent, a rare bipartisan coalition in a divided Congress. It would end the November return to standard time for most states, although jurisdictions already outside the daylight-saving system, or those choosing permanent standard time under the bill’s rules, could remain exempt.</p>
<p>The proposal still faces a difficult Senate path. Majority Leader John Thune said it was unclear whether supporters could secure the 60 votes generally needed to move the legislation forward, and he cited concerns about northern regions. President Donald Trump supports ending the clock changes, giving the bill a likely route to a signature if it clears Congress. Public frustration is also real: a 2025 AP-NORC poll found 56% of U.S. adults preferred year-round daylight time, while 42% preferred permanent standard time. Only a small minority wanted to preserve the current clock-changing system.</p>
<h2>Canada Has Followed American Clock Rules Before</h2>
<p>Canada has no single national law that dictates daylight time everywhere. Provincial and territorial governments establish local time rules, with exceptions in some communities. Even so, the country has repeatedly coordinated with the United States. When Washington extended daylight time through the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 2005, most Canadian jurisdictions changed their schedules to match when the new dates took effect in 2007.</p>
<p>That precedent matters because the practical benefits of synchronization often outweigh the desire for a uniquely Canadian policy. Airlines, railways, broadcasters, financial institutions and trucking companies operate across the border every day. Saskatchewan government research noted that, aside from Saskatchewan, Canadian provinces and territories matched the American schedule when the United States changed its rules. The same pressure could return if the U.S. stops changing clocks altogether. Canada would still have the legal freedom to choose differently, but maintaining two time systems across tightly connected regions would create recurring confusion every winter rather than the brief disruption of two clock changes each year.</p>
<h2>Ontario Is Ready on Paper but Still Waiting</h2>
<p>Ontario has already passed the legal framework for year-round daylight time. The Time Amendment Act received royal assent in November 2020 and would make the time now known as daylight saving time the province’s standard time throughout the year. However, the law does not activate automatically. It comes into force only on a date proclaimed by the lieutenant governor, giving the provincial government control over when—or whether—the change occurs.</p>
<p>The delay was intentional. During legislative debate, Ontario lawmakers repeatedly emphasized the importance of remaining aligned with Quebec and New York. The concern was especially practical in Ottawa-Gatineau, where thousands of people cross the provincial boundary for work, and in Toronto, whose business hours are closely tied to New York’s financial markets. If the United States adopts permanent daylight time, New York would likely remain synchronized with Ontario during the winter only if Queen’s Park also acts. Quebec’s position would then become critical. A U.S. law could therefore remove one obstacle for Ontario while intensifying pressure on Quebec to make a matching decision.</p>
<h2>Western Canada Is Already Building a Different Clock Map</h2>
<p>British Columbia is no longer waiting for a continent-wide agreement. After clocks moved forward on March 8, 2026, most of the province adopted year-round Pacific time at UTC-7. Residents will not turn their clocks back on November 1. The legal framework had existed since 2019, but the province originally delayed implementation to coordinate with nearby U.S. states. Its decision to proceed shows that Canadian governments can move independently when political patience runs out.</p>
<p>B.C. also joined a country that was already more fragmented than many Canadians realize. Yukon permanently observes UTC-7 and no longer springs forward or falls back. Most of Saskatchewan remains on Central Standard Time throughout the year, while the Lloydminster area follows Alberta’s seasonal pattern. These systems are described differently, but they demonstrate that permanent time is workable inside Canada. The challenge is not whether clocks can remain fixed. It is whether neighbouring provinces, border states and major cities can accept temporary or permanent time differences. A U.S. shift could accelerate that regional patchwork—or push governments toward broader coordination.</p>
<h2>A One-Hour Gap Would Reach Far Beyond Household Clocks</h2>
<p>The Canada-U.S. relationship is too large for a time difference to remain a personal inconvenience. Nearly $3.6 billion in goods and services crossed the border each day in 2024. In 2025, 71.7% of Canadian merchandise exports still went to the United States, even after tariffs and trade tensions reduced that share. Supply chains often depend on carefully sequenced pickups, customs appointments, production shifts and deliveries across multiple jurisdictions.</p>
<p>A winter time gap could force companies to rewrite schedules for flights, freight, call centres, live broadcasts and financial operations. A truck leaving Windsor for Detroit would cross into a different local hour despite travelling only a few kilometres. Ottawa and Gatineau could face different times during the workday if Ontario and Quebec split. None of these problems would be impossible to manage; businesses already handle international time zones. The difference is scale. Canada’s border economy was built around shared North American time zones. A policy that disrupts that alignment would add friction to millions of ordinary transactions, encouraging provincial governments to follow the larger market.</p>
<h2>The Health Debate Is Not as Simple as Ending Clock Changes</h2>
<p>Medical experts broadly agree that abruptly moving clocks can disturb sleep and circadian rhythms. A major U.S. study found fatal traffic crashes rose by about 6% during the workweek after the spring transition. Research has also linked the spring shift with reduced sleep and more serious workplace injuries, while a 2024 meta-analysis found evidence of a modest increase in heart-attack risk after the transition. Some newer research, however, has found no significant rise in heart attacks, showing that individual health outcomes remain debated.</p>
<p>The larger disagreement is over which permanent time should replace the switches. The American Academy of Sleep Medicine and the Canadian Sleep Society recommend permanent standard time, not permanent daylight time. Their reasoning is that morning light helps regulate the body clock, while brighter evenings can delay sleep. Supporters of permanent daylight time focus on later sunsets, outdoor activity and commercial benefits. That leaves governments with an uncomfortable choice: eliminating the acute disruption of changing clocks does not automatically make permanent daylight time the healthiest option. Canada could follow Washington for economic alignment while moving against the advice of its own sleep specialists.</p>
<h2>Dark Winter Mornings Could Decide the Politics</h2>
<p>Permanent daylight time sounds most attractive in summer, when evenings are already long. Its political test would arrive in December and January. Because the clock would remain one hour ahead, sunrise would appear one hour later than it does under standard time. Around Ottawa, where the latest sunrise is roughly 7:40 a.m. under the current system, permanent daylight time would push that close to 8:40 a.m. School buses, construction crews and early commuters would begin more winter mornings before sunrise.</p>
<p>The United States has experienced this backlash before. Congress imposed year-round daylight time during the 1970s energy crisis, but the experiment was reversed within the year as public concern grew over dark mornings and children travelling to school. Canada’s higher latitudes could make those objections even sharper. Longer evening light may feel valuable after work, but it does not create more daylight; it moves light from morning to evening. Once families experience the trade-off in daily life, support can change quickly. That history helps explain why senators from northern states are now among the proposal’s most cautious voices.</p>
<h2>Canada Would Face Pressure, Not an Automatic Order</h2>
<p>Even if the U.S. bill becomes law, Washington cannot directly reset Canadian clocks. Provinces and territories would still need to amend laws, issue regulations or activate legislation already passed. Ontario would require a proclamation. Quebec would need to decide whether keeping pace with Ontario and New York outweighs health concerns. Atlantic provinces and Manitoba would have to evaluate their own regional and U.S. connections, while B.C., Yukon and Saskatchewan would begin from different fixed-time systems.</p>
<p>The most likely Canadian response would be coordinated but uneven. Governments would first seek implementation details and transition time from the United States, then consult transportation, technology, education and health sectors. Some provinces could move quickly; others might resist permanent daylight time and prefer standard time. The result could be a compromise, a delayed national realignment or a more complicated Canadian time-zone map. What the House vote has already changed is the urgency. Canada can continue debating the ideal clock, but if the Senate acts, the cost of waiting may become more visible than the cost of choosing.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Before-Sunrise.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://trendonomist.com/canada-becomes-first-g7-country-to-approve-three-generic-semaglutide-versions/</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Becomes First G7 Country to Approve Three Generic Semaglutide Versions]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jul 26 15:52:59 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://trendonomist.com/canada-becomes-first-g7-country-to-approve-three-generic-semaglutide-versions/</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Laila Sorrento]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[The arrival of generic semaglutide in Canada marks a major turning point for one of the world’s most closely watched]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The arrival of generic semaglutide in Canada marks a major turning point for one of the world’s most closely watched classes of medicine. Between April 28 and June 29, 2026, Health Canada authorized three generic semaglutide products—two referencing Ozempic for type 2 diabetes and one referencing Wegovy for chronic weight management.</p>
<p>Canada became the first G7 country to approve a generic semaglutide when it cleared Dr. Reddy’s version in April. Apotex followed three days later with a Canadian-based alternative, before receiving authorization for Sevmia, the country’s first generic semaglutide specifically approved for weight management. The decisions could eventually lower costs and broaden treatment options, although regulatory approval does not guarantee immediate availability, insurance coverage or dramatic price reductions at every pharmacy.</p>
<h2>Dr. Reddy’s Semaglutide Opens the G7 Market</h2>
<p>Health Canada authorized Dr. Reddy’s Semaglutide Injection on April 28, making it the first generic semaglutide approved in Canada and across the G7. The product is a generic equivalent of Ozempic and is approved as a once-weekly treatment for adults with type 2 diabetes who require additional help controlling their blood sugar. Its authorization covers pre-filled pen presentations containing 2 milligrams and 4 milligrams of semaglutide, corresponding to dosing options already familiar to many Ozempic patients. Health Canada completed its review within its 180-day target, although periods when the manufacturer was supplying additional information were not counted toward that target. At the time of approval, eight other generic semaglutide submissions were still being examined, showing how quickly manufacturers were preparing to compete once Canadian patent and data-protection barriers permitted entry.</p>
<p>Calling the medicine “generic” does not mean Health Canada treated it as a simple copy. Semaglutide is a complex synthetic peptide, requiring manufacturers to demonstrate pharmaceutical equivalence, consistent manufacturing and comparable performance to the Canadian reference product. Dr. Reddy’s product was listed as marketed in early May, but approval and dependable supply have not moved in a perfectly straight line. In July, the company disclosed that an impurity had been detected while production of its active ingredient was being scaled up. It paused new production, with additional shipments expected to be disrupted until at least late October. The company said doses already distributed in Canada were not affected. For patients, that distinction matters: a medicine can be authorized and technically on the market while still being difficult for some pharmacies to obtain consistently.</p>
<p>The supply interruption also demonstrates why three approvals may prove more valuable than a single first-to-market product. A person managing diabetes generally needs predictable refills rather than occasional access to a lower-priced pen. Multiple suppliers can provide alternatives when one manufacturer encounters production constraints, although each product remains subject to its own availability, dispensing rules and provincial coverage decisions. Health Canada says many generic medicines in Canada cost between 45 and 90 per cent less than their brand-name equivalents. That range should not be interpreted as a guaranteed discount for semaglutide, however. Final patient costs can depend on manufacturer pricing, pharmacy fees, public formularies, private insurance and whether a plan requires substitution with a generic product.</p>
<h2>Apo-Semaglutide Adds Canadian Competition</h2>
<p>Apotex received authorization for Apo-Semaglutide Injection on May 1, only three days after the first approval. That made the Toronto-based company the first Canadian-based global manufacturer to secure approval for a generic equivalent of Ozempic. The product is offered in two multi-dose pre-filled pen formats: one containing 2 milligrams of semaglutide that delivers either 0.25-milligram or 0.5-milligram doses, and another containing 4 milligrams that delivers 1-milligram doses. Like the Dr. Reddy’s version, it is approved for once-weekly use by adults with type 2 diabetes, alongside diet and exercise and in combinations described in its product monograph. Health Canada’s database listed Apo-Semaglutide as marketed as of May 14, giving pharmacies another authorized source shortly after the Canadian generic market opened.</p>
<p>The product was developed through a partnership between Apotex and India-based Orbicular Pharmaceutical Technologies, illustrating how even a Canadian-branded generic can rely on international scientific and manufacturing collaboration. When this second product was approved, seven additional semaglutide submissions remained under review. That pipeline suggested Canada’s market could become considerably more crowded, placing pressure on both generic manufacturers and Novo Nordisk, the producer of Ozempic and Wegovy. Competition may encourage lower prices, but it can also reward manufacturers capable of keeping enough pens in stock. Semaglutide production involves more complicated chemistry, quality controls and injection-device manufacturing than many conventional generic tablets, making reliable supply an important part of the competition.</p>
<p>For patients, the most important question is whether a generic will work like the medication it replaces. Health Canada requires a generic to contain the same medicinal ingredient in the same amount and a similar dosage form as its reference product. Manufacturers must also show that differences in non-medicinal ingredients, packaging or production do not meaningfully alter safety, effectiveness or quality. Generic products may carry a different name and use a pen that looks or operates somewhat differently, but they are not approved as weaker versions of the original medicine. Provincial legislation and individual drug-plan policies can allow or require pharmacists to dispense a generic once one becomes available. Patients who notice a change in the product, pen or instructions are encouraged by Health Canada to speak with their pharmacist rather than assume that every device is handled identically.</p>
<p>The approval could be particularly meaningful for people whose insurance previously limited semaglutide coverage or who paid much of the cost themselves. A lower list price can reduce direct expenses and may make it easier for public and private plans to cover larger patient populations. Still, savings are unlikely to appear evenly across Canada. A drug may be authorized federally before being listed by a provincial plan, and private insurers can establish their own eligibility requirements. The opening of the generic market is therefore better understood as the beginning of a pricing and access shift—not an overnight guarantee that every Canadian prescription will immediately become inexpensive.</p>
<h2>Sevmia Extends Generics Into Weight Management</h2>
<p>Health Canada authorized Sevmia on June 29, with Apotex announcing the decision the next day. It was the third generic semaglutide product approved nationally and the first referencing Wegovy rather than Ozempic. That difference is important because the authorized uses are not interchangeable. Sevmia is indicated as part of chronic weight management for adults with a body mass index of at least 30, or at least 27 when accompanied by a weight-related condition such as hypertension, type 2 diabetes, abnormal cholesterol or obstructive sleep apnea. It is also authorized for eligible adolescents aged 12 to under 18 who meet age- and sex-based obesity criteria, weigh more than 60 kilograms and have not responded adequately to nutrition and physical-activity measures alone. The product also carries an indication for reducing the risk of non-fatal heart attack in adults with established cardiovascular disease and a BMI of at least 27.</p>
<p>The initially authorized Sevmia presentation is a multi-use pen delivering 1-milligram doses. That creates an important practical limitation. The product monograph describes a gradual escalation beginning at 0.25 milligrams weekly and moving through 0.5, 1, 1.7 and ultimately 2.4 milligrams, generally increasing every four weeks to reduce gastrointestinal symptoms. Because Sevmia’s approved pen delivers only the 1-milligram dose, its monograph states that alternative products are required for other stages of the schedule. In other words, the approval establishes a generic option within weight-management treatment, but the first presentation may not independently cover every dose needed from initiation through maintenance. Prescribers, pharmacists and insurers will need to account for that when constructing a complete treatment plan.</p>
<p>The clinical interest surrounding semaglutide is supported by substantial research on the reference medicine. In the STEP 1 randomized trial, adults with overweight or obesity who received weekly semaglutide alongside lifestyle intervention lost an average of 14.9 per cent of their starting weight over 68 weeks, compared with 2.4 per cent among those receiving placebo and lifestyle intervention. Those results should not be interpreted as a promise that every patient will experience the same outcome. Individual responses vary, and nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, constipation and other gastrointestinal effects are common reasons for slower dose escalation or discontinuation. The authorized monograph also includes significant contraindications and precautions, including restrictions involving pregnancy, breastfeeding, certain thyroid-cancer histories and the use of other semaglutide or GLP-1 medicines.</p>
<p>For a family seeking treatment for an adolescent with severe obesity, or an adult facing both obesity and cardiovascular disease, a less expensive authorized option could make long-term therapy more attainable. However, semaglutide remains a prescription medicine intended for patients who meet specific clinical criteria—not a general-purpose cosmetic weight-loss product. The three Canadian approvals represent a landmark in pharmaceutical competition, but their ultimate impact will depend on pricing, consistent production, additional dose formats and whether public and private drug plans translate authorization into affordable access.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://trendonomist.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Weight-Loss-Pills-drug.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
</channel>
</rss>